aussenen.fm Seite 1 Mittwoch, 14. April 2004 1:21 13

G-Class Owner's Manual Manual

É463 584 36 81hË Owner's

Order no. 6515 4058 02 Part no. 463 584 36 81 EN Edition D1, 01/04 G-Class Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Thank you for choosing You cannot, therefore, base any claims on Mercedes-Benz. the data, illustrations or descriptions in this Owner's Manual. Before you drive off, get to know your Mercedes-Benz and read this Owner's The Owner's Manual, the brief instructions, Manual. This will help you to obtain the the "Services" booklet and the "Service maximum pleasure from your vehicle and Centres" booklet are an integral part of the avoid endangering yourself and others. vehicle. These should therefore always be kept in the vehicle and passed on to the Items of optional equipment are marked new owner if you sell the vehicle. with an asterisk *. The equipment in your vehicle may vary, depending on the model, Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Service availability and country specifications. Centre if you have any questions. Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its The technical documentation team at vehicles to the state of the art and there- DaimlerChrysler AG wishes you safe and fore reserves the right to introduce chang- pleasant motoring. es in design, equipment and technical features at any time.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Contents

Introduction ...... 9 Getting started ...... 25 Safety ...... 45 The aim of this manual ...... 9 Opening ...... 26 Restraint systems ...... 46 Symbols ...... 11 Opening ...... 26 Seat belts ...... 47 Protection of the environment ...... 12 Adjusting ...... 27 SRS ...... 51 Operating safety ...... 13 Seats ...... 27 Children in the vehicle ...... 61 Correct use ...... 14 Steering wheel ...... 29 Driving safety systems ...... 71 Mirrors ...... 30 ABS ...... 71 Driving ...... 31 BAS ...... 72 At a glance ...... 15 Wearing seat belts ...... 31 4-ETS ...... 72 Cockpit ...... 16 Ignition lock ...... 35 ESP ...... 73 Instrument cluster ...... 18 Automatic transmission ...... 36 Anti-theft systems ...... 76 Multi-function steering wheel ...... 20 Parking brake ...... 36 Immobiliser ...... 76 Centre console ...... 21 Starting the engine ...... 37 Anti-theft alarm system* ...... 76 Upper section ...... 21 Pulling away ...... 39 Tow-away protection* ...... 77 Lower section ...... 22 Switching on the headlamps . . . . . 40 Interior motion sensor* ...... 78 Overhead control panel ...... 23 Turn signals ...... 41 Door control panel ...... 24 Windscreen wipers ...... 41 Parking and locking ...... 44

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Contents

Storing settings ...... 102 Instrument cluster ...... 126 Controls in detail ...... 81 Storing ...... 102 Adjusting the instrument Opening and closing ...... 82 Calling up the stored positions . . 102 lighting ...... 126 Key with remote control ...... 82 Exterior mirror parking position . . 103 Resetting the trip meter ...... 127 Opening a door from the inside . . . 85 Loading ...... 104 Rev counter ...... 127 Opening the rear door ...... 86 Loading guidelines ...... 104 Outside temperature display . . . . 127 Closing the rear door ...... 88 Safety net* ...... 106 Operating system ...... 129 Opening the tailgate (Cabriolet) . . . 89 Luggage compartment cover . . . . 111 Multi-function display ...... 129 Closing the tailgate (Cabriolet) . . . 91 Stowage boxes* in the short- Multi-function steering wheel . . . . 130 Automatic locking ...... 91 wheelbase station wagon ...... 112 Menus on vehicles with a Locking and unlocking the vehicle Ski holder* and roof rack* ...... 113 COMAND system* installed . . . . . 132 from the inside ...... 91 Trailer tow hitch* ...... 113 Audio menu ...... 135 Seats ...... 93 Lighting ...... 115 Navigation* menu ...... 136 Multi-contour seat* ...... 93 Light switch ...... 115 Malfunction memory menu . . . . . 137 Seat heating* ...... 94 Exterior lighting delayed Settings menu ...... 138 Head restraints ...... 95 switch-off ...... 118 Trip computer menu ...... 157 Folding down the front seat Locator lighting ...... 119 TEL* menu ...... 159 backrests (easy-entry function) Remote-operated illuminated Automatic transmission ...... 164 Short-wheelbase station wagon entry system ...... 119 Selector lever positions ...... 166 and Cabriolet ...... 96 Adjusting the headlamp range . . . 119 One-touch gearshifting ...... 166 Easy-entry feature ...... 98 Combination switch ...... 121 Shift ranges ...... 167 Rear bench seat ...... 99 Hazard warning lamps ...... 121 Driving tips ...... 169 Side-facing rear bench seat* in Interior lighting ...... 122 the luggage compartment ...... 100

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Contents

Transfer case ...... 170 Adjusting the airflow manually . . . 188 Driving systems ...... 208 Shift ranges ...... 170 Defrosting ...... 188 Cruise control ...... 208 Transfer case switch ...... 170 Air-recirculation mode ...... 189 Variable Speedtronic ...... 213 Differential locks ...... 173 Residual heat ...... 190 Ultrasound reversing aid* ...... 218 Engaging the differential locks . . 174 Economy mode ...... 191 Features ...... 221 Disengaging the differential Activating/deactivating the Stowage compartments ...... 221 locks ...... 175 cooling function ...... 191 Cup holders ...... 224 Good visibility ...... 176 Rear-compartment air Ashtray and cigarette lighter . . . . 225 Headlamp cleaning system . . . . . 176 conditioning ...... 192 Floormats ...... 228 Mirrors ...... 176 Auxiliary heating/ventilation* . . . . . 193 Telephone* ...... 228 Windscreen wipers ...... 179 Before switching on ...... 193 Mobile phone* version with Windscreen heating ...... 179 Switching on ...... 194 code 852 or code 854 (telephone Sun visors ...... 181 Switching off ...... 195 bracket* with spiral cable) ...... 229 Thermatic (automatic air Heater booster system* ...... 196 Mobile phone* version with conditioning) ...... 182 Switch ...... 196 code 386 or code 388 (telephone Control panel ...... 184 Water separator* ...... 197 bracket* without spiral cable) . . . 233 Rear air vents ...... 184 Open-air ...... 198 Mercedes-Benz telematic Switching Thermatic Side windows ...... 198 services ...... 236 on and off ...... 186 Sliding sunroof* ...... 200 Garage door opener* ...... 240 Basic settings ...... 187 Cabriolet soft top ...... 201 Sockets ...... 242 Setting the temperature ...... 187 Draught stop* ...... 204 Steering wheel heating* ...... 243 Adjusting air distribution Tonneau cover* ...... 206 manually ...... 187

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Contents

Driving tips ...... 265 Service ...... 283 Operation ...... 245 Driving and parking ...... 265 Active Service System ...... 283 The first 1,500 km ...... 246 After a cold start ...... 265 Clearing the service indicator . . . 284 Refuelling ...... 247 Pulling away on a slippery Missing the service due date . . . . 284 Petrol (EN 228) ...... 248 surface ...... 265 Calling up the service due date . . 285 Diesel (EN 590) ...... 249 Free-wheeling with the engine Resetting the service indicator . . 285 Bleeding the fuel system ...... 251 switched off ...... 265 Care ...... 286 Vegetable oil methyl ester Braking ...... 266 Caring for the exterior of your (V.O.M.E. fuels)* ...... 251 Overrun cut-off ...... 267 vehicle ...... 287 Engine compartment ...... 252 Driving in wet conditions ...... 267 Bonnet ...... 252 Tyre grip ...... 268 Engine oil ...... 254 Driving in winter ...... 268 Practical advice ...... 291 Oil level in the automatic Off-road driving ...... 269 Troubleshooting ...... 292 transmission ...... 258 Winter driving ...... 277 Automatic transmission ...... 296 Coolant ...... 258 Winter tyres ...... 277 Soft top switch* ...... 297 Windscreen washer system, Snow chains ...... 278 Keys ...... 299 headlamp cleaning system . . . . . 259 Driving abroad ...... 279 Windscreen wipers ...... 302 Tyres and wheels ...... 261 Symmetrical dipped-beam Lamps in the switches and General notes ...... 262 headlamps ...... 279 buttons ...... 303 Tyre pressures ...... 263 Trailer towing ...... 280 Lamps in the instrument Interchanging wheels ...... 264 Coupling a trailer ...... 280 cluster ...... 307 Driving with a trailer ...... 281 Display messages ...... 315 Text messages ...... 316 Symbol message ...... 322

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Contents

Where will I find...? ...... 340 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 366 Warning triangle, first-aid kit and Removing ...... 366 Technical data ...... 387 vehicle tool kit ...... 340 Fitting ...... 366 Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts . . . . . 388 Fire extinguisher* ...... 345 Flat tyre ...... 367 Vehicle electronics ...... 390 CD changer* ...... 345 Changing a wheel and fitting Tampering with the engine Spare wheel ...... 346 the spare wheel ...... 367 electronics ...... 390 Opening/closing in an Battery ...... 372 Retrofitting electrical or emergency ...... 348 Disconnecting the battery ...... 374 electronic equipment ...... 390 Unlocking the vehicle ...... 348 Removing the battery ...... 375 Vehicle identification plates ...... 392 Changing the batteries ...... 349 Charging and installing the Trailer tow hitch ...... 394 Fuel filler flap emergency battery ...... 375 Installation dimensions ...... 394 release ...... 352 Connecting the battery ...... 376 Engine ...... 395 Sliding sunroof* ...... 353 Jump-starting ...... 377 Performance ...... 396 Cabriolet soft top ...... 354 Jump-starting ...... 377 Speeds ...... 396 Releasing the parking lock Towing ...... 379 Tyres and wheels ...... 397 manually ...... 356 Front towing eye ...... 380 Speed index for tyres ...... 397 Changing bulbs ...... 357 Rear towing eye ...... 380 Tyres ...... 398 Front bulbs ...... 357 Towing the vehicle ...... 381 Vehicle dimensions ...... 400 Rear bulbs ...... 357 Transporting the vehicle ...... 381 Vehicle weights ...... 401 Before changing bulbs ...... 358 Tow-starting ...... 381 Long-wheelbase station Changing the front bulbs ...... 358 Towing in the event of various wagon ...... 401 Changing the rear bulbs ...... 363 malfunctions ...... 381 Short-wheelbase station Fuses ...... 383 wagon ...... 402 Cabriolet ...... 403

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Contents

Trailer loads ...... 404 Service products and capacities . . . . 405 Technical terms ...... 415 Fuels ...... 405 Engine oil ...... 408 Coolant ...... 409 Index ...... 423 Brake fluid ...... 411 Windscreen washer system . . . . . 411 Frequencies for garage door openers* ...... 412

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Introduction The aim of this manual :The aim of this manual This Owner's Manual is intended to assist you in all situations with your vehicle. Each Safety Operation section has its own colour code to help you This section describes all the safety fea- Here you will find all the information you find the information you require quickly. tures of the vehicle. will need when you are driving your vehi- cle.

At a glance Controls in detail Here you will find an overview of all the This is where you will find more detailed in- Practical advice controls you can operate from the driver's formation about the equipment in your ve- Here you will find practical help for possi- seat. hicle. This section expands on the "Getting ble problems. started" section and also describes techni- cal innovations. If you are already familiar Getting started with the basic functions of your vehicle, Technical data Here you will find all the information you you will find this section particularly inter- All the important technical data for your will need when you are driving your vehicle esting. vehicle is listed here. for the first time. You should read this sec- tion first if this is your first Mercedes-Benz or you have hired the vehicle.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 9 Introduction The aim of this manual

Contents and index The glossary explains the most important technical terms. The table of contents and the index are in- tended to help you find information quick- ly.

The following are part of the documenta- tion for your vehicle:

A This Owner's Manual

A The brief instructions

A The "Services" booklet

A The "Service Centres" booklet

You will receive additional supplementary instructions, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

10 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Introduction Symbols :Symbols You will find the following symbols used in 7 This symbol means that you have to do this Owner's Manual: Environmental note H something. * This asterisk identifies an item of 7 A number of these symbols one after An environmental note gives you tips on the optional equipment for all models. the other indicates a sequence of ac- protection of the environment. The equipment in your vehicle may tions. differ from some of the descriptions RR This continuation symbol indi- and illustrations you see here as ! cates an interrupted sequence not all models have the same stand- A note draws your attention to possible of actions that will be continued ard equipment. hazards to your vehicle. on the next page. G R page This symbol indicates the page Warning i on which you will find further in- A tip contains advice or further infor- formation on the subject. A warning draws your attention to possible mation you may find useful. risks to your health or life. -> This symbol in the glossary of technical terms means that the term following the arrow is also explained. DISPLAY Messages in the multi-function display are printed in this font.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 11 Introduction Protection of the environment

Therefore, observe the following points: Style of driving: Environmental note H Operating conditions: A Do not depress the accelerator pedal DaimlerChrysler's declared policy is one of while starting the engine. A Avoid driving short distances, as they integrated environmental protection. increase fuel consumption. A Do not warm up the engine with the ve- hicle stationary. The objectives are for the natural resources A Make sure that the tyre pressures are which form the basis of our existence on this always correct. A Anticipate road and traffic conditions planet to be used sparingly and in a manner and maintain sufficient distance from A Do not carry any unnecessary weight. which takes the requirements of both nature the vehicle in front. A Keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel con- and humanity into account. Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration. sumption. A You can also contribute to environmental A Change gear in good time and use each A Remove roof racks once you no longer gear only up to 2/ of its maximum en- protection by operating your vehicle in an need them. 3 environmentally-responsible manner. gine speed. A A regularly serviced vehicle contributes Switch off the engine in stationary Fuel consumption and engine, transmission, to environmental protection. For this A traffic. brake and tyre wear depend on the following reason, keep to the service intervals. two factors: Returning used vehicles A Always have maintenance work carried A Your vehicle's operating conditions out at a qualified specialist workshop, If you wish to return your Mercedes-Benz e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. to have it disposed of in an environmentally- A Your style of driving responsible manner, you can contact You can influence both these factors. Mercedes-Benz on the following telephone numbers: Germany: 00800 1 777 7777 International: +49 69 95 30 72 77

12 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Introduction Operating safety :Operating safety

Risk of accident G Risk of accident G Risk of accident G

Work incorrectly carried out on electronic Some safety systems only operate when the A heavy impact to the underbody, the tyres equipment and its software could stop this engine is running. Therefore, do not switch or the wheels can lead to damage to your ve- equipment working. The electronic systems off the engine while driving. hicle, for example, when driving the vehicle are connected via interfaces. Tampering Always have service work carried out at a off-road or over an obstacle at high speed. with these electronics systems may even qualified specialist workshop which has the This also applies to vehicles with underbody cause malfunctions in systems which have necessary specialist knowledge and tools to protection. not been modified. carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz If this occurs, have the vehicle checked at a Such malfunctions could therefore jeopard- recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz qualified specialist workshop which has the ise the operating safety of your vehicle, Service Centre for this purpose. necessary specialist knowledge and tools to which could put your own safety at consid- In particular, work relevant to safety or on carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz erable risk. safety-related systems must be carried out recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Other work on or modifications to the vehi- at a qualified specialist workshop. Service Centre for this purpose. cle carried out incorrectly may jeopardise In particular, work relevant to safety or on the vehicle's operating safety. safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 13 Introduction Operating safety

Correct use Risk of injury G Observe the following information when using your vehicle: There are various warning stickers affixed to A The safety notes in this manual your vehicle. Their purpose is to make you and others aware of various risks. A The "Technical data" section in this manual You should not, therefore, remove any of these warning stickers unless expressly in- National road traffic regulations A structed to do so by information on the A National road traffic licensing regula- sticker itself. tions If you remove these warning stickers, you or others may not then be aware of risks and may be injured as a result.

14 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch At a glance Cockpit Instrument cluster Multi-function steering wheel Centre console Overhead control panel Door control panel

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 15 At a glance Cockpit

P68.10-2828-31

16 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch At a glance Cockpit

Function Page Function Page 1 Multi-function steering wheel 20, 9 Cleans the headlamps 176 130 a Cruise control lever: 2 Horn A Cruise control 208 3 Opens the bonnet 252 A Speedtronic 213 4 Adjusts the steering wheel 29 b Instrument cluster 18, 5 Adjusts the headlamp range 119 126 6 Light switch 40, c Linguatronic* lever – see sep- 115 arate Operating Instructions 7 Adjusts the exterior mirrors 30 d Ignition lock 35 8 Combination switch: e Glove compartment 221 A Turn signals 41

A Windscreen wipers 41

A Main-beam headlamps 40, 121

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 17 At a glance Instrument cluster

P54.30-6734-31 English (miles): P54.30-6735-31

18 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch At a glance Instrument cluster

Function Page Function Page Function Page 1 Reset button 126 4 K Turn signal indicator 41 Automatic transmis- 165 2 L Turn signal indicator 41 lamp, right sion selector lever/ lamp, left 5 Fuel gauge with: shift range 3 Indicator and warning Reserve fuel warning 313 Malfunction memory 137 lamps lamp Outside temperature 143, v ABS, ESP, 4-ETS warn- 307 1 Restraint system warn- 312 or digital road speed 134 ing lamp ing lamp display ? Engine diagnostic indi- 314 < Seat belt warning lamp 313 Speedtronic display 336 cator lamp (vehicles 6 Multi-function display with: Clock 142 with a petrol engine) Trip meter 129 7 Speedometer ’ Indicator lamp for 215 8 Rev counter with: 127 cruise control with Total distance 129 3 Speedtronic recorder Brake system warning 312 lamp A Main-beam headlamps 40, Transfer case display 171 - indicator lamp 121 ABS indicator lamp 309 q Preglow indicator lamp 38 (vehicles with a diesel engine)

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 19 At a glance Multi-function steering wheel

Function Page Function 1 Multi-function display 130 4 Jumping from one menu to Controlling the operating 130 another system è Forwards ÿ P46.10-2319-31 2 Selecting a submenu or Back adjusting the volume 5 Scrolling within the menu ç Back/decreases the j Forwards volume k Back æ Forwards/increases the volume 3 Using the telephone* í Accepts a call ì Ends a call

20 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch At a glance Centre console :Centre console

Upper section Function Page Function Page 1 Front left seat heating* 94 8 Switches the hazard warning 121 2 Rear window wiper 43 lamps on/off 3 Deactivates ESP 74 9 COMAND* or audio system – see separate Operating In- 4 Engages the differential locks 174 structions 5 Locks the vehicle centrally 91 a Ashtray with cigarette lighter 226 6 Primes and deactivates 77 b Thermatic (automatic air 182 tow-away protection* conditioning) P68.20-2628-31 Primes and deactivates 78 c AIRBAG OFF warning lamp 66, the interior motion sensor* 304 7 Front right seat heating* 94

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 21 At a glance Centre console

Lower section Function Page 1 Stowage tray Water separator* indicator 197 lamp (not shown here) 2 Automatic transmission se- 165 lector lever 3 Auxiliary heating/ 193 ventilation* 4 Heater booster system* 196 P68.20-2629-31 5 Engages the transfer case 170 6 Parking brake 36

22 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch At a glance Overhead control panel :Overhead control panel

Function Page Function Page 1 Initiates a TeleAid* emergen- 239 5 Rear-view mirror 30, cy call 179 2 Switches the luggage com- 124 6 Transmitter buttons for the 240 partment lighting on/off garage door opener* 3 Switches the right-hand read- 122 7 Indicator lamp for the garage 240 ing lamp on/off door opener* P82.00-2169-31 4 Opens/closes: 8 Controls the interior lighting 122

A Sliding sunroof* 200 9 Switches the left-hand read- 122 ing lamp on/off A Cabriolet soft top 201

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 23 At a glance Door control panel

Function Page 1 Opens/closes the front and 198 rear side windows 2 Adjusts the front seat 27 3 Opens door from the inside 85 4 Stores the seat, mirror and 102 steering wheel settings P72.10-2593-31

24 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Opening Adjusting Driving Parking and locking

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 25 Getting started Opening

ΠThe "Getting started" section contains Opening 7 Press the unlocking button on the brief details of the basic functions of the key. vehicle. Read this section particularly thor- The turn signal lamps flash briefly. The oughly if this is your first Mercedes-Benz driver's door and fuel filler flap are un- vehicle. locked. If you are already familiar with the basic 7 Open the door, get into the vehicle and functions described here, the "Controls in insert the key in the ignition lock. detail" section will help you with more de- tailed information. The appropriate page P80.35-2098-31 You will find further information in the references are at the end of each segment. "Controls in detail" section (R page 82).

Key with remote control 1 ‹ Locking button 2 Œ Unlocking button

26 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Adjusting :Adjusting

Seats Observe the following points: Remove the key from the ignition lock when leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leav- A Position the backrest almost vertically. Risk of accident G ing it for a short time. A Your arms should be slightly bent when you are holding the steering wheel. The seats can be adjusted when the key is Only adjust the seats when the vehicle is removed from the ignition lock or a door is stationary. You could otherwise lose control A The distance from the pedals should be open. of the vehicle as a result of an unexpected such that you can depress them fully. seat movement. A The head restraint should support the For this reason, children should never be left back of your head at about eye level. unsupervised in the vehicle. Failing to observe these notes could result Risk of injury G in injury. 7 Switch on the ignition. Turn the ignition to position 2 (R page 35). RR Seat positions which do not allow you to Make sure that nobody can be trapped as wear your seat belt correctly are a safety the seat is adjusted. hazard and must therefore be avoided. Your seat must be adjusted in such a way that you can wear the seat belt correctly (R page 31).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 27 Getting started Adjusting

The seat adjustment switch is on the door. Seat height Seat angle

7 Slide the switch up or down in the di- 7 Slide the switch up or down in the di- rection of arrow 1. Make sure that you rection of arrow 3 to adjust to a posi- have sufficient head clearance. tion in which your thighs are lightly supported. Seat fore-and-aft adjustment P54.25-2768-31 Backrest angle ! Slide the switch forwards or backwards When moving the seat, make sure that 7 in the direction of arrow 4 to adjust to there is nothing in the footwell and be- a position in which you can hold the hind the seats, and that the cup hold- steering wheel comfortably with your er* (R page 224) is folded down. You 1 Seat height arms slightly bent. 2 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment could otherwise damage the seat or the 3 Seat angle cup holder*. i 4 Backrest angle You can adjust the seats – with the Slide the switch backwards or forwards 5 Head restraint height 7 front door open – up to approximately in the direction of arrow 2 until you 30 minutes after the ignition has been can depress the pedals comfortably. switched off.

28 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Adjusting

Head restraint height Steering wheel The lever for adjusting the steering wheel is on the left of the steering column. 7 Slide the switch up or down in the di- rection of arrow 5. Risk of accident G

Head restraint angle Only adjust the steering wheel when the ve- hicle is stationary. You could otherwise lose 7 Adjust the angle of the head restraint by hand. Pull or push. control of the vehicle as a result of an unex- P46.15-2086-31 pected steering wheel movement. The steering wheel can be adjusted when Risk of injury G the key is removed from the ignition and a Make sure that the back of your head is sup- door is open. ported in the middle of the head restraint at For this reason, children should never be left 1 Steering column fore-and-aft adjust- eye level. unsupervised in the vehicle. ment This reduces the risk of injury to the head 2 Steering column height and neck in the event of an accident or sim- i ilar situations. You can adjust the steering wheel – Steering column fore-and-aft adjust with the front door open – up to approx- ment You will find further information about the imately 30 minutes after the ignition 7 Push the lever forwards or backwards seats in the "Controls in detail" section has been switched off. in the direction of arrow 1 to adjust to (R page 93). a position in which you can hold the 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched steering wheel comfortably with your on or the driver's door is open. arms slightly bent.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 29 Getting started Adjusting

Steering column height Exterior mirrors 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched on. 7 Press the lever up or down in the direc- tion of arrow 2. Make sure that you Risk of accident G 7 Press button 2 for the left-hand exte- can move your legs freely and that you rior mirror or button 3 for the right- can see all the displays in the instru- The exterior mirrors reduce the size of the hand exterior mirror. ment cluster clearly. image. The objects are actually closer than 7 Press button 1 at the top or bottom to they appear. i the right or left until you have adjusted the exterior mirrors to the correct posi- In vehicles with the memory function The buttons are located on the left-hand tion. (R page 102), you can store the steer- side of the dashboard. ing wheel position together with the po- You will find further information about ad- sition of the seats and the exterior justing the mirrors in the "Controls in de- mirrors. tail" section (R page 176).

Mirrors P88.70-2174-31 Before starting off, adjust the rear-view mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a way that you can get a good overview of road and traffic conditions.

Rear-view mirror 1 Adjustment button 7 Adjust the rear-view mirror manually. 2 Left-hand exterior mirror 3 Right-hand exterior mirror

30 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Driving :Driving

Wearing seat belts The lap belt must be routed across your Risk of accident G pelvic area as low down as possible, i.e. G Do not keep any objects in the driver's foot- Risk of injury over your hip joints and not across your well. If you are using floormats or carpets in stomach or abdomen. If necessary, pull If you do not wear your seat belt correctly, the driver's footwell, make sure that: the belt strap down slightly and retight- or if you do not engage your seat belt in the en in the roll-up direction. A there is sufficient clearance for the ped- buckle correctly, it cannot perform its in- als A Do not route the belt strap over sharp or tended protective function. Under certain fragile objects, particularly if these are A they are safely secured circumstances, you may even be severely or on or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, Objects could otherwise get caught be- fatally injured. pens, keys, etc. The belt strap could be tween the pedals if you accelerate or brake For this reason, make sure that all occu- damaged and you could be injured. suddenly. You will then not be able to brake, pants – in particular, pregnant women – A Only one person may use each seat belt operate the clutch pedal or accelerate prop- wear their seat belt correctly at all times at any one time. On no account should erly. This could lead to accident or injury. (R page 31). children travel sitting on the lap of an- other occupant as the child cannot be A The seat belt must pass closely over properly restrained in the event of an ac- your body and must not be twisted. cident, sharp braking or sudden change You should therefore avoid wearing in direction and the child or other occu- bulky clothing (e.g. winter coats). pants could be seriously or fatally in- A The shoulder section of the belt must jured. pass over the middle of your shoulder – never around your neck or under your arm – and be pulled so as to fit snugly against the body.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 31 Getting started Driving

Persons less than 1.50 m tall cannot A Risk of injury G Risk of injury G wear a seat belt correctly. They there- fore require special suitable restraint The seat belt can only provide its intended By design, airbags are not activated in all systems. degree of protection if the backrest is al- types of accidents since a correctly fas- A Children less than 1.50 m tall and under most vertical and the occupant is therefore tened seat belt already provides sufficient twelve years of age cannot wear their sitting upright. Avoid seat positions that do protection in many cases. Airbags do not re- seat belt correctly. Always secure these not allow the seat belt to be routed correctly place seat belts in any way. To reduce the children in a suitable child restraint sys- tem installed on a suitable seat in the (R page 31). For this reason, position the risk of serious or fatal injury, make sure that vehicle (R page 61). Observe the instal- backrest as close to the vertical as possible. all occupants – in particular, pregnant wom- lation instructions of the child restraint Never drive with the backrest reclined too en – always wear their seat belts correctly, system manufacturer. far back. have adopted a normal sitting position and that the backrests are almost vertical. A Do not secure any objects with a seat belt if it is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants.

32 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Driving

7 Pull the belt smoothly from belt reel. G 7 Route the belt over the shoulder. Risk of injury

7 Click belt tongue 1 into buckle 2. You could be injured in an accident if you use seat belts which: 7 Pull up on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across the A are damaged lap, if necessary. P91.10-2420-31 A have been subjected to a load in an ac- 7 If necessary, adjust the belt to the cor- cident rect height (R page 34). A have been modified The seat belts will no longer function or pro- vide their intended degree of protection. Do not route the belt strap over sharp edges as it could tear. 1 Belt tongue Make sure that the seat belt is not caught in 2 Buckle the door or in the seat adjustment mecha- 3 Release button nism. It could be damaged.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 33 Getting started Driving

Belt height adjustment Raising the belt Check the seat belts for damage regularly. You can adjust the seat belt height for the 7 Push the belt sash guide up. You should never modify the seat belts your- following seats: self. They might no longer function correct- The belt sash guide engages in five dif- ly. A Driver's seat ferent positions.

Always have seat belts that are damaged or A Front-passenger seat Lowering the belt have been subjected to a load in an accident A Outer rear seats replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, 7 Press and hold release button 1. as it has the necessary specialist knowledge Adjust the belt height so that the shoulder 7 Move the belt sash guide to the re- and tools for the work required. belt is routed over the middle of your shoulder. quired height. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a 7 Let go of release button 1 and ensure Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- that the height adjustment mechanism pose. is engaged at a detent. In particular, work relevant to safety or on Please observe the information about safety-related systems must be carried out the correct way to wear the seat belt at a qualified specialist workshop. P91.40-2395-31 (R page 31).

1 Release button

34 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Driving

Ignition lock i The key can only be removed when: G Risk of injury A it is turned to position 0 in the igni- tion lock Remove the key from the ignition lock when P82.00-2170-31 leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leav- A the selector lever of an automatic ing it for a short time. transmission is moved to position P The seats and the steering wheel can be ad- A the brake pedal is not depressed. justed when the key is out of the ignition and To unlock the steering wheel, turn the the door is open. Ignition lock steering wheel slightly as you turn the For this reason, do not leave children unsu- key to position 1. 0 To remove the key pervised in the vehicle, as they could be- 1 Power supply for some consumers, e.g. come trapped when the seat or steering the seat adjustment function wheel is adjusted. 2 Ignition (power supply for all consum- ers) and drive position 3 To start the engine (R page 37) Risk of accident G

Only remove the key from the ignition lock when the vehicle is stationary. You cannot steer the vehicle with the key re- moved.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 35 Getting started Driving

Automatic transmission You will find further information about the automatic transmission in the "Controls in Risk of accident G detail" section (R page 81). Never leave children unsupervised in the ve- Parking brake hicle, as they could release the parking brake. This could lead to an accident and could cause injury or fatalities.

Applying the parking brake P27.00-2107-31 P42.20-2116-31 7 Pull lever 1 firmly upwards. The 3 brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up if the ignition is switched on.

Parking brake Automatic transmission gearshift pattern 1 Lever P Park position with selector lever lock 2 Release knob R Reverse gear N Neutral D Driving position

36 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Driving

Releasing the parking brake Starting the engine i 7 Pull lever 1 upwards slightly, press re- If you depress the brake while you are lease knob 2 and guide lever 1 down Risk of poisoning G starting the engine, the pedal travel will fully. be longer than usual and the pedal re- The vehicle can move immediately. Never run the engine in enclosed spaces. sistance low. Exhaust fumes contain poisonous carbon 3 If you depress the brake after starting The brake system warning lamp monoxide. Inhaling exhaust fumes consti- in the instrument cluster goes out. the engine, the pedal travel and resist- tutes a health hazard. It can lead to loss of ance return to normal. i consciousness and death. A warning signal sounds if you pull away with the parking brake applied. ! Do not depress the accelerator pedal during the starting procedure.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 37 Getting started Driving

Starting the petrol engine Starting the diesel engine 7 As soon as the q preglow indicator lamp has gone out, turn the key to po- 7 Apply the parking brake. 7 Apply the parking brake. sition 3 and release it. 7 Shift the selector lever to P or N. 7 Shift the selector lever to P or N. The engine starts automatically. If after ! ! a given time the engine has not started, Do not depress the accelerator pedal Do not depress the accelerator pedal the starting procedure is terminated during the starting procedure. during the starting procedure. automatically. You can terminate the starting procedure manually at any 7 Turn the ignition to position 3 in the ig- 7 Turn the ignition to position 2 time. nition lock (R page 35) and release the (R page 35). 7 Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition key. The q preglow indicator lamp lights lock. The engine starts automatically. up in the instrument cluster. The starting procedure is terminated. i If the engine is warm, you can start it without preglow.

38 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Driving

Pulling away 7 Depress the brake pedal. Risk of accident G ! The selector lever lock will be released. Only select reverse gear when the vehi- 7 Shift the selector lever to D or R. Do not shift down until the road speed is in the permissible range for the gear required. cle is stationary. Otherwise, you will i damage the transmission. Do not shift down for additional engine brak- Wait for the shift process to complete ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels before pulling away. i could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. You could lose control of your vehicle The vehicle will lock itself centrally once 7 Release the parking brake. you have pulled away. The locking and cause an accident. 3 knobs in the doors drop down. The brake system warning lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. You will find further information about the You can open the doors from the inside automatic transmission in the "Controls in at any time. 7 Release the brake pedal. detail" section (R page 164). You can also switch off the automatic 7 Gently depress the accelerator pedal. locking function (R page 91). Upshifts are made at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the catalytic converter to reach its operating tempera- ture more quickly.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 39 Getting started Driving

Switching on the headlamps 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched Main-beam headlamps on.

Dipped-beam headlamps 7 Turn the light switch to B. The The switch is located between the steering headlamps are switched on. wheel and the driver's door. i P54.25-2771-31 On some country-specific vehicle mod- els, the dipped-beam headlamps come on when you switch on the ignition.

P54.25-2770-31 Combination switch 1 Main-beam headlamps 2 Headlamp flasher

7 Press the combination switch forwards Light switch to 1. 1 Headlamps off The main-beam headlamps are 2 Dipped-beam headlamps on switched on. The A indicator lamp in the instru- ment cluster lights up.

40 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Driving

Turn signals 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched Windscreen wipers on. The combination switch is located on the 7 Press the combination switch upwards left of the steering column. 1 or downwards 2 until it engages. The corresponding turn signal indicator P54.25-2844-31 lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. The combination switch returns to its initial position automatically if the P54.25-2845-31 steering wheel is turned sufficiently. i Combination switch Press the switch briefly to signal a mi- 1 Right-hand turn signal nor change in direction. The respective 2 Left-hand turn signal turn signal flashes three times. Combination switch 1 Single wipe 2 To switch on the windscreen wipers

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 41 Getting started Driving

Switching on the windscreen wipers i Single wipe 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched If the vehicle is stationary, the wind- 7 Briefly press the switch to the pressure on. screen wipers automatically return to point in the direction of arrow 1. intermittent wipe. 7 Turn the combination switch to the cor- The windscreen wipers wipe once with- rect setting depending on the intensity If you open a door, the intermittent out windscreen washer fluid. of the rain. wipe stops. This protects people enter- Wiping using windscreen washer fluid 0 Windscreen wipers off ing and leaving the vehicle from being splashed. Intermittent wipe continues Press the switch beyond the pressure I Intermittent wipe (interval depends 7 when you: point in the direction of arrow 1. on how heavy the rain is) A close the doors again The windscreen wiper wipes with wash- II Normal wipe A turn the combination switch to posi- er fluid while the switch is being III Rapid wipe (reverts to normal wipe tion II or III pressed. with the vehicle stationary) A move the selector lever to D or R

42 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Getting started Driving

i Rear window wiper Switching on intermittent wipe You should also use washer fluid when The switch is located on the upper section 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched wiping the windscreen in the rain. This of the centre console. on. prevents smears on the windscreen. 7 Press upper section 1 of the switch. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. i You can use position I as a universal Switching off intermittent wipe setting. The correct wiping frequency is P54.25-2772-31 selected according to the intensity of 7 Press upper section 1 of the switch the rain. again. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. You will find further information about the combination switch in the "Controls in de- Wiping using windscreen washer fluid tail" section ( page 121). 1 Intermittent wipe R Press and hold lower section 3 of the 2 Indicator lamp 7 switch. 3 Windscreen washer system When you release the switch, the rear i window will continue to be wiped for The rear window wiper comes on auto- about another five seconds. matically if the windscreen wipers are You will find further information about the switched on and you engage reverse windscreen wipers in the "Controls in de- gear. tail" section (R page 179).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 43 Getting started Parking and locking

You have now completed your first jour- 7 Apply the parking brake (R page 36). 7 Turn the steering wheel until the steer- ney. You have stopped your vehicle and ing wheel lock engages. 7 Move the selector lever to P. have parked properly. End your journey as 7 Press the release button on the seat follows: 7 Turn the key to position 0 in the ignition belt (R page 33). lock (R page 35) and remove it. G The immobiliser is activated. Risk of accident Risk of injury G ! Only remove the key from the ignition lock Make sure that nobody can be trapped as when the vehicle is stationary. You cannot Whenever you stop the vehicle, always you close the doors. steer the vehicle with the key removed. remove the key to prevent the battery from discharging. Make sure that the transfer case is not in po- 7 Press the ‹ locking button on the sition N. i key (R page 26). Never leave children unsupervised in the ve- On steep slopes, turn the front wheels The turn signal lamps flash briefly three hicle. They could release the parking brake. towards the kerb. times. The locking knobs in the doors This could lead to an accident and could drop down. The vehicle is locked. cause injury or fatalities. You will find further information about locking the vehicle in the "Controls in de- tail" section (R page 82).

44 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems Driving safety systems Anti-theft systems

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 45 Safety Restraint systems

This section will familiarise you with the The most important restraint systems are: most important features of the restraint G A Seat belts Risk of injury systems in your vehicle. In the event of an accident, your vehicle may collide with an- A Restraint systems for children in the An airbag increases the degree of protection other object, e.g. another vehicle. This may vehicle for vehicle occupants wearing a seat belt result in rapid acceleration or deceleration If necessary, the following also provide ad- and therefore supplements the seat belt. of your vehicle. During this acceleration or ditional protection: Airbags in no way replace the requirement deceleration, the vehicle occupants will be for all vehicle occupants to wear their seat moved towards the force acting on the ve- A SRS system (Supplemental Restraint belt correctly at all times. This is because, hicle. There is therefore the risk of vehicle System) consisting of: on the one hand, an airbag is not deployed occupants injuring themselves on the vehi- A Belt tensioners in all types of accident, as in some situations cle interior or on parts of the vehicle. The it would not provide any additional protec- Belt force limiters purpose of supplemental restraint systems A tion to that already provided by a correctly is to minimise this risk of injury. However, A Airbags fastened seat belt. seat belts and airbags are generally unable A Roll-over bar to prevent injuries caused by objects pen- etrating the vehicle from the outside.

46 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

On the other hand, airbag deployment only Seat belts For this reason, make sure that all vehicle provides increased protection if the seat The most important restraint systems are occupants – in particular, pregnant women belt is worn correctly because: the seat belts and restraint systems for – wear their seat belt correctly at all times. children in the vehicle. In the event of a Only then can all the restraint systems pro- A the belt helps to hold the vehicle occu- pant in the best position in relation to collision, these reduce the movement of vide the best possible protection. the airbag the vehicle occupants in the direction of Make sure that the belt: the impact and therefore reduce the risk A it can significantly reduce the move- of them hitting parts of the vehicle interior. A is routed across your pelvis as low down ment of the vehicle occupant towards as possible, i. e. across your hip joints the force of the impact, e.g. in the event In many countries, there are regulations and not across your abdomen of a head-on collision, and therefore re- concerning the use of seat belts and child A fits closely duce the risk of injury restraint systems. A is not twisted G A is routed across the middle of your Risk of injury G Risk of injury shoulder If you do not wear your seat belt correctly, A is not routed across your neck or under In accidents in which an airbag is activated, your arm or if you do not engage your seat belt in the the airbag can only provide additional pro- buckle correctly, it cannot perform its in- A is pulled tight across the hip joints by tection to that already provided by the seat tended protective function. Under certain pulling the shoulder section of the belt belt if the seat belt is worn correctly. circumstances, you may even be severely or up fatally injured.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 47 Safety Restraint systems

Only one person may use each seat belt at On no account should children travel sitting Risk of injury G any one time. on the lap of another occupant. The child Never use a seat belt to secure objects if it cannot then be properly restrained in the The seat belt can only provide its intended is already being used by one of the vehicle event of an accident, sharp braking or sud- degree of protection if the backrest is posi- occupants. den change in direction and the child or the tioned almost vertically and the occupant other vehicle occupants could be seriously is therefore sitting upright. Avoid seat posi- Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. winter or fatally injured. coats. tions that do not allow the seat belt to be Persons less than 1.50 m tall or children routed correctly. For this reason, position Do not route the belt strap over sharp or under twelve years of age cannot wear their the backrest as close to the vertical as pos- fragile objects, particularly if these are on seat belt properly. They therefore require sible. Never drive with the backrest reclined or in your clothing, e.g. spectacles, pens additional restraint systems fitted on suita- too far back. or keys. The belt strap could tear and you or ble seats in the vehicle for protection in the other vehicle occupants could be injured. event of an accident. Always follow the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

48 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

Have seat belts which have been damaged The airbags or belt tensioners could, for ex- Risk of injury G or subjected to heavy loads in an accident ample, be activated inadvertently or could The seat belt cannot function correctly if the replaced. Their anchorages should also be fail in accidents in which the deceleration belt strap or the belt buckle is dirty or dam- checked. force is sufficient to trigger the airbag. For aged. You must therefore keep the belt Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety this reason, you should never modify the re- strap and buckle clean, otherwise the belt reasons, you only use seat belts that have straint systems. tongue cannot engage correctly. been specially approved for your vehicle by Regularly check that the seat belts: Mercedes-Benz. Risk of injury G A are not damaged By design, airbags are not activated in all A are not routed over sharp edges Risk of injury G types of accidents since a correctly fas- A are not twisted Modifications to or work incorrectly carried tened seat belt already provides sufficient The belt strap could otherwise tear and you protection in many cases. Airbags do not re- or others could be injured. out on a restraint system (seat belts and their anchorages, belt tensioners, belt force place seat belts in any way. To reduce the limiters or airbags) or its wiring could pre- risk of serious or fatal injury, make sure that vent the restraint system from functioning all vehicle occupants – in particular, preg- correctly. nant women – always have their seat belt fastened correctly, have adopted a normal sitting position and that the backrests are almost vertical.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 49 Safety Restraint systems

Fastening a lap-shoulder seat belt 7 Pull the belt smoothly from belt reel. Fastening the rear centre lap-shoulder seat belt 7 Route the belt over the shoulder.

7 Engage belt tongue 1 in buckle 2.

7 Pull up on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across the lap if necessary.

7 If necessary, adjust the belt to the cor- P91.10-2420-31 rect height (R page 34). P91.14-2002-31 Releasing the lap-shoulder seat belt

7 Press release button 3 on belt buckle 2.

1 Belt tongue 2 Buckle 1 Belt tongue retainer 3 Release button 2 Buckle for fixed belt tongue 3 Release button for fixed belt tongue 4 Fixed belt tongue 5 Buckle for free belt tongue 6 Release button for free belt tongue 7 Free belt tongue

50 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

7 Pull the belt tongues out of retainer 1. Releasing the rear centre lap-shoulder SRS seat belt 7 Pull the belt smoothly from the belt The SRS system (Supplemental Restraint reel. 7 Press release button 6 on belt buckle System) consists of: 5. 7 Click fixed belt tongue 4 into buckle A Restraint system warning lamp 2. 7 Press release button 3 on belt buckle 2. A Belt tensioners 7 Route the belt over the body using free belt tongue 7. A Belt force limiters Stowing the rear centre lap-shoulder A Airbag system 7 Click the free belt tongue into buckle seat belt 5. with: 7 Let the belt roll up to the stop. 7 Pull up on the shoulder section of the A Airbag control unit seat belt to tighten the belt across the 7 Guide both belt tongues into retainer 1 A Airbag lap if necessary. on top of each other.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 51 Safety Restraint systems

Restraint system warning lamp Activation of the belt tensioners, belt G The 1 restraint system warning lamp in Risk of injury force limiters and airbags the instrument cluster lights up: In the event of a collision, the sensor in There is a fault if the 1 restraint system the airbag control unit evaluates important A for approximately four seconds when warning lamp does not light up when you physical data, such as duration, direction you turn the ignition to position 1 switch on the ignition, does not go out a few and degree of vehicle deceleration or ac- seconds after the engine is running or lights This indicates that the restraint sys- celeration. Based on the evaluation of this up again. Some systems may be activated tems are operational. data and depending on the vehicle's rate of inadvertently or not at all in the event of a longitudinal deceleration in a collision, the A continuously when you turn the ignition collision. If this occurs, have the SRS system belt tensioners are the first to be triggered to position 2 checked and repaired immediately at a qual- by the airbag control unit. The front airbags 1 ified specialist workshop which has the nec- This indicates that the restraint are not triggered until a second activation essary specialist knowledge and tools to system warning lamp is operational. threshold is reached, i.e. an even higher carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz The SRS system performs regular self- rate of vehicle deceleration in the longitu- recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz checks while the engine is running. This dinal direction is exceeded. Service Centre for this purpose. means that faults can be detected in good time. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

52 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

i Airbag deployment depends on various If necessary, they can be used to help re- factors, such as: construct the sequence of events in an ac- The belt tensioners and airbags are only cident. These factors include: triggered if the seat belt is fastened. On A the initial rate of deceleration or accel- the front-passenger side, the airbag is eration A the speed of the vehicle at the time of only triggered if the front-passenger the collision A the duration and direction of the decel- seat occupation recognition system de- eration or acceleration A injuries to the vehicle occupants tects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or the seat belt tongue is en- A the distribution of the force during a A vehicle deformation collision gaged in the buckle. The vehicle may be considerably deformed A the collision angle without an airbag being triggered, e.g. if The activation thresholds for the belt ten- only relatively easily-deformable vehicle A the deformation characteristics of the sioners and airbags are variable and are parts are affected by the collision and the vehicle adapted to the rate of vehicle deceleration. required deceleration threshold is not This process is pre-emptive in nature as A the characteristics of the object with reached. On the other hand, airbags may airbag deployment must take place during which the vehicle collides, e.g. the oth- be triggered even though the vehicle only the collision and not after it has happened. er vehicle displays minor deformation, if, for exam- Factors which can only be seen and meas- ple, rigid vehicle parts such as a longitudi- ured after the collision has taken place nal member are affected by the collision cannot be taken into account when trigger- thus causing vehicle deceleration to ing the airbag and are not decisive for this. exceed the pre-determined threshold.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 53 Safety Restraint systems

Belt tensioners and belt force limiters G i Risk of injury The front seat belts and the outer rear seat Belt tensioners do not correct: belts are fitted with belt tensioners and Airbags are not triggered in all types of acci- incorrect sitting positions belt force limiters. A dent. They are controlled by complex sensor A incorrectly worn seat belts technology and evaluation logic. This proc- ! Belt tensioners do not pull occupants ess is pre-emptive in nature as airbag de- Do not place any heavy objects on the back towards the seat backrest. ployment must take place during the impact front-passenger seat and do not insert and must be adapted to provide calculated, the belt tongue on the front passenger Triggered belt force limiters reduce the additional protection for the vehicle occu- seat belt into the buckle if the front- load exerted by the seat belt on the occu- pants. Not all airbags must be triggered in passenger seat is not occupied. the event of an accident. pants. The belt tensioner and the airbags on When the ignition is switched on, the belt The different airbag systems operate inde- the front-passenger side could other- tensioners and belt force limiters function: pendently of each other. However, each sys- wise be triggered in the event of an ac- tem is dependent on the type of accident cident. A if the restraint systems are operational (head-on, side, rear-end impact or overturn- (the 1 restraint system warning ing) and severity of the accident (mainly In the event of a collision, the belt tension- lamp lights up after the ignition is vehicle deceleration or acceleration) deter- ers tighten the seat belts, pulling them switched on) (R page 35). mined during the initial phase of the close against the body. accident.

54 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

A for the driver's and front-passenger i lap-shoulder seat belts and for the left G An indication that a belt tensioner in the Risk of injury and right lap-shoulder seat belts in the rear has been triggered is that the buck- rear if they are engaged in the belt If the belt tensioners have been triggered, le is pulled down and is almost flush buckle have them replaced at a qualified specialist with the top of the seat. workshop which has the necessary special- A in the event of a head-on or rear-end ist knowledge and tools to carry out the collision, if the vehicle has a high rate work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends of acceleration or deceleration in a lon- G Risk of injury that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- gitudinal direction in the initial stages tre for this purpose. of the collision The rear belt tensioners only function if they In particular, work relevant to safety or on on the front-passenger side, if the can pull the belt buckles down without hin- A safety-related systems must be carried out front-passenger seat is occupied in ve- drance. at a qualified specialist workshop. hicles on vehicles with front-passenger This action must not be impeded in any way, seat occupancy recognition* therefore: Observe the safety regulations when dispos- ing of belt tensioners. Any Mercedes-Benz Do not grasp the buckles If the belt tensioners are triggered, you will Service Centre can provide details of these hear a bang, which is not hazardous to your Do not place any objects underneath the regulations. hearing, and some dust may be released. buckles The 1 restraint system warning lamp This could otherwise adversely affect opera- lights up. tion of the belt tensioner or render it com- pletely ineffective. You would then have no additional protection.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 55 Safety Restraint systems

Airbag system Do not lean on the doors from inside the Risk of injury G A vehicle. Risk of injury G Airbags offer an additional degree of protec- A Do not put your feet on the dashboard. tion, but do not replace the seat belts in any The service life of the front-passenger airbag A Only hold the steering wheel by the rim. way. You are therefore only sufficiently pro- This allows the airbag to inflate fully. If is limited to 15 years. Have the front- tected if you wear your seat belt correctly at you hold the steering wheel by the in- passenger airbag replaced after no more all times. side, you could be injured if the airbag is than 15 years at a qualified specialist triggered. workshop which has the necessary special- To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury Do not place any objects on the airbags ist knowledge and tools to carry out the by an airbag inflating in an accident, please A or between the airbags and the vehicle's work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends observe the following points: occupants. that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- A All vehicle occupants – in particular, A Do not hang any hard objects, such as tre for this purpose. pregnant women – must wear their seat coat hangers, on the grab handles. In particular, work relevant to safety or on belt correctly at all times. A Do not place any objects between the safety-related systems must be carried out Choose a seat position as far back from A backrest and the door. at a qualified specialist workshop. the airbag as possible and which still al- lows you to drive the vehicle safely. The risk of skin abrasions or minor injuries caused by an airbag cannot be completely A Do not lean forwards while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. over the padded boss of ruled out due to the high speed at which the the steering wheel. airbag is required to inflate.

56 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

Vehicle occupants must wear their seat Risk of injury G Risk of injury G A belt correctly at all times and sit back against the backrest which should be al- Correct operation of the airbags can only be To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injury in most vertical. The head restraint should guaranteed if: the event of an accident with a high rate of support the back of your head at about deceleration, e.g. due to an airbag inflating A you do not place any objects under the eye level. within milliseconds, or in the event of sud- seat cushion of the front-passenger seat A Rearward-facing child seats must not be den braking, please observe the following: A you do not cover the padded boss of the secured on the front-passenger seat if steering wheel, the front-passenger air- A All vehicle occupants must select a seat the front-passenger front airbag is not bag cover or the areas of the roof lining position in which they can wear their deactivated or cannot be deactivated. In accommodating the windowbags, and seat belt correctly and which is as far Mercedes-Benz vehicles with automatic you do not stick any badges or stickers back from the airbag as possible. The child seat recognition, the front-passen- on them driver's seat position must allow him to ger airbag is deactivated if a child re- drive the vehicle safely. The driver's straint system with automatic child seat A you do not carry out any modifications arms should be slightly bent when hold- recognition is fitted to the front-passen- to the restraint systems, including their ing the steering wheel. The driver must ger seat and the AIRBAG OFF warning wiring maintain the correct distance from the lamp is lit. pedals such that he or she can depress If your vehicle does not have automatic them fully. child seat recognition, children must be secured in a child restraint system on a A Position the front-passenger seat as far back as possible, particularly if a child is suitable seat in the rear. sitting on this seat or is secured in a If you fit a forward-facing child seat on child restraint system on this seat. the front-passenger seat, you must move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 57 Safety Restraint systems

Airbag deployment If you sell your vehicle, you are obliged to Risk of injury G make the buyer aware of these points. You The airbag inflates within milliseconds. The 1 restraint system warning lamp lights should therefore pass on this Owner's Man- After the airbags have been triggered: ual to the new owner for this purpose. up. A Airbag parts are hot. Do not touch them Observe the safety regulations when dispos- i as you could burn yourself ing of airbag units. Any Mercedes-Benz Serv- If the airbags are triggered, you will hear A You must have the airbags replaced at a ice Centre can provide details of these a bang and some dust may be released. qualified specialist workshop which has regulations. This bang is not harmful to your hearing the necessary specialist knowledge and and the dust does not constitute a tools to carry out the work required. Your vehicle is fitted with the following air- health hazard. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you bags: use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for The inflated airbag slows and restricts this purpose. In particular, work relevant A Driver's front airbag, located in the to safety or on safety-related systems movement of the vehicle occupants. steering wheel must be carried out at a qualified spe- A Front-passenger front airbag above the If a vehicle occupant makes contact with cialist workshop glove compartment an airbag which has been deployed, the airbag will release some hot gas. This fea- A Windowbags above the side windows ture is designed to reduce the force acting on the occupant's head and chest. The air- bag is therefore depressurised after the accident.

58 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

Front airbags The driver's front airbag is located in the G steering wheel; the front-passenger front Risk of injury The front airbags are designed to increase airbag is located above the glove compart- protection to the head and chest of the When an airbag inflates, a small amount of ment. driver and front passenger. The driver's fine powder is released. This powder does front airbag and the front-passenger front not constitute a health hazard and does not airbag are triggered: indicate that there is a fire in the vehicle. The powder could cause short-term breath- A in the initial stages of an accident with ing difficulties for persons suffering from a high rate of acceleration or decelera- asthma or other respiratory conditions. To tion acting on the front of the vehicle P54.30-2471-31 prevent these breathing difficulties, you A if it is predicted that additional protec- should either leave the vehicle as soon as it tion would be provided is safe to do so or open the windows to let fresh air in. A if the seat belt is fastened if the vehicle overturns, never, unless A 1 Driver's airbag the system detects high vehicle decel- 2 Front-passenger airbag eration in a longitudinal direction The driver's front airbag inflates in front of the steering wheel; the front-passenger front airbag inflates in front of and above the glove compartment.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 59 Safety Restraint systems

Front-passenger airbag 2 will only be trig- Windowbags The windowbags are triggered: gered if: A in the event of a side impact on the side A the front-passenger seat is occupied of the impact and A if the impact exceeds a predetermined force A the AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the P91.60-2772-31 centre console is not lit (R page 21). A independently of the driver's and front- This means that a child seat with auto- passenger airbags matic child seat recognition has not The windowbags will not be triggered in been fitted or has been incorrectly fit- the event of a minor side impact. ted ! 1 Windowbags (arrows) Do not place any heavy objects on the front-passenger seat. The belt tension- er and the airbags on the front-passen- ger side could otherwise be triggered in the event of an accident and would then have to be replaced.

60 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

Children in the vehicle Child restraint systems Risk of injury G If children are travelling in the vehicle: Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use the child restraint systems listed on A secure each child using a child re- Do not leave children unsupervised in the (R page 63). straint system which is appropriate to vehicle, even if they are secured in a child his/her age and size, and which has restraint system. The children could: Risk of injury G been approved for Mercedes-Benz ve- A injure themselves on parts of the vehicle hicles, preferably on a suitable rear press the central locking button, there- seat A To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries by releasing the child-proof locks, and to children in the event of an accident, sharp then open the doors. They could injure A make sure that the children are braking or sudden change in direction: strapped in throughout the journey themselves or others, or they could get out of the vehicle and injure themselves A always secure children less than 1.50 m You can obtain child seats and information or be injured by passing vehicles tall or under twelve years of age in a spe- about the correct child restraint system cial child restraint system fitted on a A be seriously or fatally injured due to long from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. suitable seat in the vehicle, as they can- periods of exposure to high tempera- not wear the seat belts properly tures

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 61 Safety Restraint systems

do not secure children under twelve A Risk of injury G years old on the front-passenger seat unless the child is secured in a child re- Follow the manufacturer's installation in- straint system with automatic child seat recognition or a forward-facing child structions when fitting a child restraint sys- seat and the front-passenger seat is in tem. its rearmost position It is advisable to fit the child restraint sys- A children must never travel sitting on the tem to one of the rear seats. The child is lap of another occupant. Children can- generally better protected there. not be restrained in the event of an acci- dent, sharp braking or sudden change of direction due to the forces which act. They would be thrown against parts of the vehicle interior and could be serious- ly or fatally injured A all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belt correctly at all times

62 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

Suitable child seats

Weight categories and ages Child seat on the front-passenger seat Child seat on the left and right-hand seat of the rear bench seat Group 0: up to 10 kg As recommended1 Universal up to approximately 9 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg Universal2 Universal approximately 8 months to 4 years Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg Universal2 Universal approximately 3½ to 12 years

1 Only use child seats with automatic child seat "Universal" child seats can be recognised recognition. by their orange-coloured approval label. 2 Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost The label is affixed to the child seat and position when using child seats without automatic child seat recognition. identifies the type of child seat. P91.00-2139-31 aus Ba. 209

Example of a child seat label

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 63 Safety Restraint systems

Recommended child restraint systems

Weight categories and ages Manufacturer Type Approval DaimlerChrysler Automatic child seat number order number recognition Group 0: up to 10 kg Britax-Römer Baby Safe E1 03 301063 B6 6 86 8169 Yes up to approximately 9 months Group I: 9 to 18 kg Britax-Römer Prince E1 03 301095 B6 6 86 8167 No1 approximately 8 months to B6 6 86 8168 Yes 4years Britax-Römer Duo E1 03 301133 B6 6 86 8205 Yes Group II/III: 15 to 36 kg Britax-Römer Zoom E1 03 301061 B6 6 86 8166 No1 approximately 3½ to 12 years B6 6 86 8176 Yes Bingo GmbH Rucky E1 03 301107 B6 6 86 8180 No1

1 Move the front-passenger seat to its rearmost position when using child seats without automatic child seat recognition.

64 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

Risk of injury G Risk of injury G Risk of injury G

Use only child restraint systems with auto- If you use a forward-facing child seat with- An incorrectly installed child seat may work matic child seat recognition that have out automatic child seat recognition on the loose in the event of an accident, sharp been recommended for Mercedes-Benz ve- front-passenger seat, you must move the braking or sudden change in direction and hicles on the front-passenger seat. Informa- front-passenger seat to its rearmost posi- the child and other vehicle occupants could tion about this can be obtained from any tion. be seriously or fatally injured. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Do not leave children unsupervised in the Therefore, you should never place objects, If you use a rearward-facing child seat on vehicle, even if they are secured in a child e.g. a cushion, under the child restraint sys- the front-passenger seat, this must be a spe- restraint system. They may not be able to tem. The entire base of the child restraint cial Mercedes-Benz rearward-facing child save themselves if danger threatens, e.g. system must always be in contact with the seat with automatic child seat recognition. due to heat exposure. They could injure seat cushion of the vehicle seat. If you use any other type of rearward-facing themselves on moving parts in the vehicle, On the rear bench seat, you should only use child seat on the front-passenger seat, the e.g. the seats, or open the doors, thereby child restraint systems with the ISOFIX child front-passenger airbag is not deactivated endangering themselves and others. seat securing system* which have been rec- and the child could be seriously or fatally in- ommended for use in Mercedes-Benz vehi- jured if the airbag deploys. In order to warn cles. against this danger, there is an appropriate warning symbol on the dashboard.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 65 Safety Restraint systems

Activating the child seat lock Automatic child seat recognition

7 Insert the belt tongue in the seat belt The sensor system for the front-passenger buckle. seat automatically detects whether a spe- cial Mercedes-Benz child seat with a trans- 7 Extend the belt fully and allow the iner- ponder has been fitted. If this is the case, P00.0-3185-31 tia reel to draw it back in. the AIRBAG OFF warning lamp lights up on The child seat lock is activated. the centre console.

Releasing the child seat lock

Warning symbol for the rearward-facing 7 After removing the child seat, roll up child seat the belt fully. The child seat lock is released. P68.10-2738-31 Child seat lock With the exception of the driver's seat belt and the rear centre seat belt, all seat belts are fitted with a child seat lock.

The child seat lock ensures that the belt AIRBAG OFF warning lamp does not loosen once the child seat has been secured. The front-passenger airbag is then deacti- vated.

66 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

ISOFIX Ð child seat securing system* Have the automatic child seat recogni- Risk of injury G A tion checked at a qualified specialist ISOFIX is a standardised securing system workshop which has the necessary spe- for special child seats in the rear of the ve- If the AIRBAG OFF warning lamp does not cialist knowledge and tools to carry out hicle. The securing rings for two child seats light up when the child seat is fitted, the the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- are located on the left and right of the rear front-passenger airbag is not deactivated. ommends that you use a Mercedes- seats between the seat cushion and the The child could be seriously injured if the Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In backrest. front-passenger front airbag inflates. In this particular, work relevant to safety or on case, proceed as follows: safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Risk of injury G A Do not use a rearward-facing child seat on the front-passenger seat. i A child restraint system secured by the A Fit the rearward-facing child seat to a ISOFIX child seat securing system does not suitable rear seat. The driver's airbag and the belt ten- provide sufficient protection for children or sioners remain active, even if the front- weighing more than 22 kg. You should passenger airbag is deactivated. A Use a forward-facing child seat on the therefore only secure children weighing up front-passenger seat. To do this, you to 22 kg in a child restraint system secured must move the front-passenger seat to by the ISOFIX child seat securing system. If its rearmost position. the child weighs more that 22 kg, you should secure the child restraint system using a lap-shoulder seat belt.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 67 Safety Restraint systems

In particular, work relevant to safety or on Risk of injury G Risk of injury G safety-related systems must be carried out An incorrectly fitted child seat may work If the child restraint system or its securing at a qualified specialist workshop. loose and seriously or fatally injure the child system, e.g. the ISOFIX child seat securing or other vehicle occupants. After installing system, has been damaged or subjected to the child seat, make sure that it is engaged a load in an accident, the child secured in the securing rings on the left and right. there could be seriously or fatally injured in the event of an accident, sharp braking or sudden change in direction. P91.20-2120-31 Risk of injury G For this reason, have child restraint systems and their securing systems that have been Also follow the child seat manufacturer's in- damaged or subjected to a load in an acci- stallation instructions when fitting the child dent checked and, if necessary, replaced seat. immediately at a qualified specialist work- Securing rings shop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

68 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Restraint systems

Fitting a child seat to the rear bench 7 When you fit the child seat to the left or seat right-hand seat of the rear bench seat, Risk of injury G route the securing strap between the The lashing eyelets are in the luggage com- supports of the respective head re- Only use the lashing eyelet in the corre- partment under the rear bench seat. straint. sponding position for each child seat. Other lashing eyelets could tear in an accident and the child could be seriously injured. Make sure that:

A the straps do not cross over and that P91.40-2497-31 they are not twisted P91.40-2354-31 A the hook is attached and engaged cor- rectly

1 Left-hand lashing eyelet 4 Hook 2 Centre lashing eyelet 3 Right-hand lashing eyelet 7 Attach hook 4 into the corresponding lashing eyelet. 7 Remove the safety net* (R page 108).

7 Remove the luggage compartment cov- er (R page 112).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 69 Safety Restraint systems

Child-proof locks G If children are travelling with you in the Risk of accident vehicle, you can activate special locks for Activate the child-proof locks for the rear the rear compartment. doors and deactivate the rear window con- P72.12-2347-31 trols when children are travelling in the vehi- Child-proof locks on the rear doors cle. The children could otherwise open the You can use the child-proof locks on the doors or windows while the vehicle is in mo- rear doors to secure each door individual- tion, thereby endangering themselves or ly. If a door has been secured: others.

A you will not be able to open it from the Never leave children unsupervised in the ve- 1 Child-proof lock on inside hicle. They could open a front door from the 2 Child-proof lock off you will only be able to open it from the inside, thereby endangering themselves and A Activating the child-proof locks outside if the vehicle is unlocked (door others. locking knobs are raised) 7 Slide the locking latch upwards 1 us- ing a suitable object.

Deactivating the child-proof locks

7 Slide the locking latch downwards 2 using a suitable object.

70 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Driving safety systems :Driving safety systems In this section, you will find information ABS about the following driving safety systems: Risk of accident G ABS controls the brake pressure in such a A ABS (anti-lock braking system) The risk of an accident increases if you: way that the wheels do not lock when A BAS (Brake Assist) braked. This means that the steerability of A drive too fast, particularly when corner- your vehicle is maintained when you brake. A 4-ETS (Electronic Traction System) ing ABS works from a speed of approximately A drive on a wet and slippery road surface A ESP (Electronic Stability Program) 8 km/h upwards, regardless of road sur- A drive too close to the vehicle in front i face conditions. ABS, BAS, 4-ETS and ESP cannot reduce this ABS works on slippery surfaces, even if In wintry conditions, the optimum effect risk nor override the laws of physics. of ABS, BAS, 4-ETS and ESP can only be you only brake gently. achieved when you use M+S tyres, and You should always therefore adapt your driv- snow chains when necessary. ing style to the prevailing road and weather G conditions and maintain a sufficiently safe Risk of accident distance from other road users and objects Do not depress the brake pedal repeatedly on the road. in quick succession (pumping). Depress the brake pedal firmly and evenly. Pumping the brake pedal reduces braking efficiency.

The - indicator lamp in the instrument cluster (R page 19) lights up briefly when you start the engine. This indicates that ABS is operational.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 71 Safety Driving safety systems

Braking BAS 4-ETS If ABS cuts in while you are braking, you Brake Assist supports ABS by boosting 4-ETS makes it possible to pull away or ac- will feel the brake pedal pulsate. the braking force in an emergency braking celerate on a slippery surface. It brakes the When ABS intervenes: situation. If you depress the brake pedal wheels individually before they spin. quickly, BAS automatically boosts the 4-ETS remains active when you deactivate 7 Continue to depress the brake pedal braking force and thus shortens the stop- firmly until the braking situation is over. ESP. 4-ETS comes into effect if at least one ping distance. tyre reaches its tyre grip limit. The system For full braking: i brakes individual wheels until sufficient traction is available once more. 7 Depress the brake pedal with maxi- Continue to depress the brake pedal mum force. firmly, even at maximum deceleration. 4-ETS is no longer active once a road i speed of approximately 60 km/h is ex- ceeded. If ABS has malfunctioned, BAS, ESP and 4-ETS will also be deactivated. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly when you start the The normal driving and braking func- engine. This indicates that 4-ETS is opera- tions are still available to you. tional. It flashes at any speed if even one tyre has exceeded its tyre grip limit.

72 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Driving safety systems

! ESP Risk of accident G The engine must not be running if: ESP brakes individual wheels and limits en- If the v ABS, ESP, 4-ETS warning lamp in A the vehicle is being towed with a gine torque. In this way, it tries to prevent the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as raised axle the vehicle from oversteering or unders- v follows: teering. The warning lamp in the in- A the parking brake is being tested strument cluster flashes when ESP is A do not deactivate ESP using a dynamometer active. only depress the accelerator pedal as A Application of the brakes via 4-ETS The ESP system improves handling stabili- far as necessary when pulling away may otherwise destroy the braking sys- ty and traction in all driving situations. A accelerate less when driving tem. ESP only functions properly if wheels with adapt your driving style to suit road and A the recommended tyre sizes are used traffic conditions (R page 398). Otherwise, the vehicle could begin to skid. The v warning lamp in the instrument If you drive too fast, 4-ETS cannot reduce cluster lights up briefly when you start the the risk of an accident. engine. This indicates that ESP is opera- tional.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 73 Safety Driving safety systems

Deactivating ESP G ! Risk of accident The engine must not be running if: It may be best to deactivate ESP in the fol- lowing situations: If the v ABS, ESP, 4-ETS warning lamp in A the vehicle is being towed with a the instrument cluster flashes, proceed as raised axle A If snow chains are being used follows: A the parking brake is being tested A In deep snow A do not switch off ESP using a dynamometer A On sand or gravel A only depress the accelerator pedal as Application of the brakes by ESP may A On rough terrain far as necessary when pulling away otherwise destroy the braking system. A accelerate less when driving When you deactivate ESP: A adapt your driving style to suit road and i A the engine torque is no longer limited traffic conditions ABS, BAS and ESP are automatically de- A the drive wheels could spin slightly Otherwise, the vehicle could begin to skid. activated if the differential locks are en- You will therefore achieve a cutting ac- gaged. If you drive too fast, ESP cannot reduce the tion for better traction. risk of an accident. 4-ETS remains active.

74 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Driving safety systems

The switch is located on the centre con- ESP will intervene in the following situa- sole. tions, despite having been deactivated: Risk of accident G A When you are braking ESP is deactivated if the ABS, ESP, 4-ETS A At speeds of up to about 60 km/h warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights when a wheel reaches its tyre grip limit, up. e.g. when one side of the road is icy You should therefore always adapt your driv- P54.25-2773-31 The wheel is then braked in order to in- ing style to suit the current road and weath- crease overall traction. er conditions. The v warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes at any speed if the tyres on Activating ESP your vehicle have reached their tyre grip 7 Press the lower section of the switch. 7 Press the upper section of the switch. limit. The v warning lamp in the instru- v The warning lamp in the instru- ment cluster goes out. You are re- ment cluster lights up. turned to normal driving.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 75 Safety Anti-theft systems

Immobiliser Anti-theft alarm system* Priming the anti-theft alarm system The immobiliser prevents unauthorised A visual and audible alarm is triggered The indicator lamp is on the centre con- persons from starting your vehicle. when the alarm system is primed, if: sole.

A a door is opened Activating A the tailgate is opened 7 Remove the key from the ignition lock. A the bonnet is opened

Deactivating A the vehicle's position is changed P54.25-2774-31

7 Switch on the ignition. A a window is broken

A the vehicle is unlocked with the key

1 Indicator lamp

7 Lock the vehicle using the remote con- trol. The anti-theft alarm system is primed after approximately 15 sec- onds. Indicator lamp 1 flashes.

76 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Anti-theft systems

Deactivating the anti-theft alarm sys Tow-away protection* The switch is located on the centre con- tem sole. Visual and audible alarms are triggered if 7 Open the vehicle using the key. the vehicle tilt changes when tow-away The anti-theft alarm system is deacti- protection is primed. vated. i If you do not then open a door or the The tow-away protection alarm is trig- P54.25-2775-31 tailgate, the anti-theft alarm system gered if, for example, the vehicle is will be reactivated automatically after jacked up on one side. about 40 seconds. Priming tow-away protection Disabling the alarm When you lock the vehicle, tow-away pro- There are two ways of disabling the alarm: tection is automatically primed after ap- 1 To deactivate tow-away protection 2 Indicator lamp Press the ‹ or Œ button on the proximately 30 seconds. 7 3 To deactivate the interior motion sen- key. Tow-away protection is automatically de- sor* or activated when you unlock the vehicle.

7 Insert the key into the ignition lock.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 77 Safety Anti-theft systems

Deactivating tow-away protection 7 Move the key to position 0 or 1 in the i ignition lock. Deactivate tow-away protection if the vehi- Do not leave anything (e.g. a mascot) cle is to be carried on another vehicle. This 7 Lock the vehicle using the key. hanging on the rear-view mirror as it will prevent false alarms. Tow-away protection remains deactivated could trigger a false alarm. 7 Move the key to position 0 or 1 in the until the vehicle is locked again. Do not leave anything on the armrest on ignition lock (R page 35). the centre console as this could impair Interior motion sensor* the operation of the interior motion sen- 7 Press switch 1 within 30 seconds. An audible and visual alarm is triggered if sor. Indicator lamp 2 lights up briefly. the vehicle is locked and: Tow-away protection is deactivated. A someone breaks a side window of your To deactivate the interior motion sen- vehicle sor* as well, hold down the switch until the indicator lamp goes out. A someone reaches into the vehicle interior

78 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Safety Anti-theft systems

Activating the interior motion sensor 7 Close the side windows (R page 198). 7 Move the key to position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock. The switch is located on the centre con- 7 Close the sliding sunroof* sole. (R page 200). 7 Press switch 3.

7 Lock the vehicle using the remote con- Indicator lamp 2 flashes briefly. trol. To deactivate the tow-away protec- The interior motion sensor is primed af- tion* as well, hold down the switch un- ter approximately 40 seconds. til the indicator lamp goes out. P54.25-2775-31 Deactivating the interior motion sensor i The interior motion sensor remains de- Deactivate the interior motion sensor if activated until you lock the vehicle people or animals are to remain in the again. locked car. This will prevent false alarms. 1 To deactivate tow-away protection* 2 Indicator lamp 3 To deactivate the interior motion sen- sor

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 79 80 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Opening and closing Seats Storing settings Loading Lighting Instrument cluster Operating system Automatic transmission Transfer case Differential locks Good visibility Thermatic (automatic air conditioning) Auxiliary heating/ventilation* Heater booster system* Water separator* Open-air Driving systems Features

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 81 Controls in detail Opening and closing

You will find detailed information about Key with remote control your vehicle's functions in the "Controls in Risk of accident G The vehicle's equipment includes two re- detail" section. Read this section in partic- mote control keys. ular if you are already familiar with the ve- Never leave children unsupervised in the ve- hicle's basic functions. An emergency key element is inserted into hicle. They could open a locked door from each key. The emergency key element re- the inside or start the engine using a key left If you are not yet familiar with the basic lease slides 4 have different colours to in the vehicle, thereby endangering them- functions, the "Getting started" section will help distinguish between the two keys. selves and others. You should therefore nev- provide you with more information. You er leave children unsupervised in the vehicle will find the reference to the appropriate The remote control allows you to lock and and always take the key with you when leav- part of that section at the start of each seg- unlock the vehicle from some distance. To ing the vehicle. ment. prevent theft, only use the remote control in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. When set to the factory settings, the re- mote control locks and unlocks the follow- ing centrally:

A The doors

A The rear door or tailgate (Cabriolet)

A The fuel filler flap

82 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Opening and closing

i If you do not open any doors after the vehi- cle has been unlocked, the vehicle locks The vehicle cannot be locked or un- again automatically after about 40 sec- locked using the radio remote control if onds. there is a key in the ignition lock. P80.35-2099-31 The driver's door can also be unlocked Locking the vehicle centrally manually in an emergency 7 Press the ‹ button once. (R page 348). The turn signals flash three times. The Unlocking doors, the fuel filler flap and the rear Key with remote control door are locked. The anti-theft alarm Unlocking centrally system* is primed. 1 Battery check lamp Œ 2 ‹ Locking button 7 Press the button once. 3 Œ Unlocking button The turn signals flash once. 4 Release slide All the doors, the fuel filler flap and the 5 Emergency key element (mechanical) rear door are unlocked. The anti-theft ! alarm system* is deactivated. Do not expose the key to high levels of electromagnetic radiation. Doing so may cause the radio remote control to function incorrectly.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 83 Controls in detail Opening and closing

Individual settings Unlocking centrally Restoring the factory settings

If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 7 Press the Œ button twice. 7 Press the Œ and ‹ buttons to change the function of the remote con- The turn signals flash once. The locking simultaneously for approximately trol. Pressing the Œ button once will knobs in the doors pop up. The anti- six seconds until the battery check then unlock the doors, tailgate and fuel fill- theft alarm system* is deactivated. lamp flashes twice. er flap centrally. Checking the batteries 7 Press the Œ and ‹ buttons Locking the vehicle centrally simultaneously for approximately 7 Press the Œ or ‹ button. 7 Press the ‹ button once. six seconds until the battery check The remote control batteries are in lamp flashes twice. The turn signals flash three times. The good condition if the battery check locking knobs in the doors drop down. The remote control will then function as lamp lights up briefly. The anti-theft alarm system* is primed. follows:

Unlocking the driver's door

7 Press the Πbutton once. The turn signals flash once. The locking knob in the driver's door pops up. The anti-theft alarm system* is deactivat- ed.

84 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Opening and closing

Summer opening/convenience closing Opening the side windows Opening a door from the inside feature 7 Press and hold the Œ button when You can also open a locked front door from unlocking the vehicle until the side win- the inside at any time. Risk of injury G dows are opened to the required posi- tion. i Make sure that nobody can become trapped You can only open a locked rear door as you close a side window. If danger threat- Closing the side windows from the inside if it is not protected by ens, release the switch and open the side win- the child-proof locks. 7 Press and hold the ‹ button when dow. locking the vehicle until the side win- Remove the key from the ignition lock when dows are closed. leaving the vehicle, even if you are only leav- ing it for a short time. i For safety reasons, you can only open i and close the side windows in the im- P72.10-2452-31 mediate vicinity of the vehicle. Point the key at the infra-red sensor below the door handle on the driver's door to open and close the vehicle.

1 Locking knob 2 Door handle RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 85 Controls in detail Opening and closing

7 Pull door handle 2. G Locking knob 1 pops up if the door Risk of accident was locked. The door is unlocked and The rear lights may be concealed when the can be opened. spare wheel bracket is folded out to the side. P72.12-2480-31 Opening the rear door You should then protect the vehicle by using a warning lamp or warning triangle. Opening from the outside Do not drive with the spare wheel bracket folded out to the side. You could otherwise in- Risk of injury G jure others or cause an accident by the spare wheel bracket swinging from side to side. 1 Lock cylinder 2 Door handle The rear door swings to the side. Take care Make sure that the spare wheel bracket is al- to allow sufficient clearance. ways correctly locked in place. 7 Press the Πbutton on the key twice. i The vehicle is unlocked centrally. Risk of poisoning G Station wagon: the rear door can also 7 Press lock cylinder 1 and pull door Make sure that the rear door is always be unlocked and opened manually in an handle 2. closed when the engine is running. Exhaust emergency (R page 348). 7 Fold the rear door out to the left. fumes could otherwise get into the vehicle interior and poison you.

86 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Opening and closing

Opening from the inside 7 Pull door handle 2. Do not drive with the spare wheel bracket folded out to the side. You could otherwise The rear door is unlocked. Locking Risk of injury G injure others or cause an accident by the knob 1 pops up. spare wheel bracket swinging from side to 7 Open the rear door. The rear door swings to the side. Take care side. to allow sufficient clearance. Make sure that the spare wheel bracket is i always correctly locked in place. If the rear door is protected by the child- proof locks, it cannot be opened from Risk of poisoning G the inside, even if it is unlocked.

Make sure that the rear door is always closed when the engine is running. Exhaust fumes could otherwise get into the vehicle interior and poison you. P72.20-2196-31

Risk of accident G

The rear lights may be concealed when the spare wheel bracket is folded out to the side. 1 Locking knob You should then protect the vehicle by using a 2 Door handle warning lamp or warning triangle.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 87 Controls in detail Opening and closing

Closing the rear door Closing from the outside Locking/unlocking the rear door sepa rately Closing from the inside Risk of injury G You can lock the rear door separately, in- dependently of the central locking. After Risk of injury G Make sure that nobody can become trapped you have closed the rear door: as you close the rear door. Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you close the rear door. Risk of injury G P72.12-2481-31 Risk of injury G Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. They could open the rear door from the inside, Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. even when it is locked, thereby endangering They could open the rear door from the inside, themselves and others. even when it is locked, thereby endangering themselves and others. i 1 Locked Do not leave the key in the boot. You 2 Unlocked i could otherwise lock yourself out. Do not leave the key in the boot. You could otherwise lock yourself out.

88 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Opening and closing

7 Press the Œ button on the key i twice. G When the vehicle has been locked cen- Risk of poisoning The vehicle is unlocked centrally. trally: the anti-theft alarm system* is The rear lights may be concealed when the triggered if you unlock the rear door us- 7 Remove the emergency key element spare wheel bracket is folded out to the ing the emergency key element and from the key (R page 348). side. Other road users may then fail to no- open it. tice you and could crash into your vehicle. 7 Insert the emergency key element into the rear door lock. To disable the alarm: You should provide additional protection for the vehicle by using a warning lamp or warn- 7 Press the ‹ or Œ button on 7 Turn the emergency key element fully ing triangle. clockwise as far as position 1. the key. Do not drive with the spare wheel bracket or The rear door remains locked even if folded out to the side. You could otherwise the vehicle is unlocked centrally again. 7 Switch on the ignition. endanger yourself and others. i Make sure that the spare wheel bracket is Opening the tailgate (Cabriolet) You will only be able to unlock the rear correctly locked in place. door using the emergency key element if it was previously locked separately Risk of injury G ! using the emergency key element The tailgate swings downwards and Make sure that the tailgate is always closed (R page 348). out. Make sure therefore that there is when the engine is running. Exhaust fumes sufficient clearance below the tailgate. RR could otherwise get into the vehicle interior and poison you.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 89 Controls in detail Opening and closing

i 7 Lift securing hook 1 and pull lever 2 7 Turn quick-release locks 4 anti-clock- in the direction of the arrow. wise. You can only open the tailgate if it is un- locked. 7 Fold spare wheel bracket 3 out to the 7 Open zip fasteners 5 upwards approx- side. imately 10 cm.

P72.10-2453-31 P72.20-2197-31 P72.20-2198-31

1 Securing hook 4 Quick-release locks 6 Handle 2 Lever 5 Zip fasteners 3 Spare wheel bracket 7 Pull handle 6 upwards and fold down the tailgate. 7 Press the Πbutton on the remote control twice. The vehicle is unlocked centrally.

90 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Opening and closing

i Automatic locking You can switch off the automatic locking function using the operating system You must only undo the quick-release The vehicle will lock itself once you have (R page 150). locks if the Cabriolet soft top is open pulled away. and the tonneau cover* is secured. You can open a door from the inside at any Locking and unlocking the vehicle time, even if it is locked. from the inside Closing the tailgate (Cabriolet) You can lock or unlock the vehicle centrally The vehicle unlocks centrally when a front from the inside using the central locking door is opened from the inside. Risk of injury G switch. This feature may be useful if, for i example, you wish to unlock the front- Make sure that nobody can become trapped The doors unlock automatically in an passenger door from the inside or lock the as you close the tailgate. accident if the force of the impact ex- vehicle before you pull away. ceeds a predetermined level. G The vehicle is locked automatically Risk of accident Risk of injury G when the ignition is switched on and the Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. Do not leave children alone in the vehicle. wheels turn. This means that you could become locked out: They could open a door from the inside, They could open the tailgate from the inside, even when it is locked, thereby endangering even if it is locked, thereby endangering them- A when the vehicle is being pushed themselves and others. selves and others. A when the vehicle is on a dynamo- meter

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 91 Controls in detail Opening and closing

i The switch is located on the centre con- Locking sole. You can open a door from the inside at 7 Press upper section 1 of the central any time, even if it is locked. You can locking switch. only open a locked rear door from the If all the doors are closed, the vehicle inside if it is not protected by the child- locks centrally. proof locks (R page 70). If you have previously locked the vehi- P54.25-2777-31 Unlocking cle from the outside with the remote 7 Press lower section 2 of the central control, you cannot unlock it centrally locking switch. from the inside. All the doors unlock if you have not pre- You can only lock the vehicle centrally if viously locked the vehicle with the ra- all the doors are closed. 1 To lock dio remote control. 2 To unlock

92 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Seats :Seats You will find information about adjusting 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched Contour of the backrest in the upper the seats in the "Getting started" section on. back region (R page 27). 7 Adjust the contour of the backrest in Seat cushion length Multi-contour seat* the area of the upper back to the re- 7 Adjust the seat cushion length to the quired position using switch 3. The contour of the backrest and the seat length of your thighs using switch 1. cushion length can be adjusted separately Backrest side cushions to support your back correctly. Contour of the backrest in the lumbar The switch is located on the side of the 7 Adjust the side cushions using switch region 4 seat. so that they give good lateral sup- 7 Adjust the contour of the backrest in port. the lumbar region to the required posi- tion using switch 2.

P91.25-2149-31

1 Seat cushion length 2 Contour of the backrest in the lumbar region 3 Contour of the backrest in the upper back region 4 Backrest side cushions Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 93 Controls in detail Seats

Seat heating* 7 Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ig- Switching on nition lock (R page 35). The switches for the rear seats are located 7 Press switch 1 or 2. on the left and right-hand sides next to the The red indicator lamps in the switch indi- rear doors. cate the current heating level. Switching off 7 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all in- The switches for the front seats are locat- Level ed on the centre console. dicator lamps go out. 1 Normal heating. One indicator lamp lights up. i The seat heating switches off The seat heating may switch off auto- automatically after approxi- matically if the battery voltage is too mately thirty minutes. low. One or both indicator lamps flash. P54.25-2780-31 The seat heating switches back on auto- 2 Rapid heating. Both indicator matically as soon as a sufficient battery lamps light up. voltage is available again. The system switches over to lev- el 1 automatically after ap- proximately five minutes. Switches on the centre console No indicator lamp lights up. The 1 Normal heating seat heating is switched off. 2 Rapid heating

94 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Seats

Head restraints Installing and removing the front seat Removing head restraints 7 Press switch 1 upwards until the head Risk of injury G restraint is fully extended. 7 Remove the head restraint upwards. Only drive with the head restraints fitted. This reduces the risk of injury in the event of Installing an accident. P54.25-2779-31 7 Press switch 1 up for approximately Make sure that occupants only sit on seats five seconds. with the head restraint fitted. 7 Insert the head restraint. When doing so make sure the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed 1 Switch in the direction of travel.

i 7 Push the head restraint downwards Tilt the backrest backwards slightly to until it engages. make fitting and removal easier.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 95 Controls in detail Seats

Resetting the front seat head restraints Installing and removing the rear bench Folding down the front seat Resetting the head restraints is necessary seat head restraints backrests (easy-entry function) following a voltage supply interruption, e.g. Short-wheelbase station wagon and Removing if the battery has been disconnected or Cabriolet discharged. 7 Remove the head restraint upwards. The easy-entry function makes it easier for 7 Front-passenger seat: make sure that you to get in and out of the rear of the ve- Installing the cup holder* on the centre console hicle. is folded down (R page 224). 7 Insert the head restraint. G 7 Position the seat fully forward and the When doing so make sure the notches Risk of injury head restraint fully down. on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. Make sure that nobody can become trapped The head restraint is reset. as the seat is folded forwards or back. 7 Push the head restraint downwards un- til it engages. i Adjust the height and angle of the head 7 The easy-entry function can be can- restraint manually so that the back of celled by: the head is supported at eye level. 7 pressing a seat adjustment switch (R page 28).

7 pressing a memory function posi- tion button (R page 102).

7 operating the lever for adjusting the steering wheel (R page 29).

96 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Seats

A The seat moves forward or back, Folding back the backrests depending on its original position 7 Push the backrest back until it engag- A Backrest 2 tilts forwards es.

A On the driver's side, the steering The seat cushion, head restraint, back- P91.10-2421-31 wheel moves up towards the cock- rest and steering wheel (driver's side) pit move back to their original position.

7 Fold backrest 2 forwards in the direc- For safety reasons, the seat moves in a tion of the arrow. longitudinal direction back to its origi- nal position only if this position was in 1 Seat release lever ! front of the easy-entry position. 2 Backrest Make sure that you only fold backrest 2 forwards when the easy-entry func- i Folding the backrests forwards tion is deactivated. You may otherwise Store your seat position using the damage the centre console or the memory function (R page 102). 7 Pull or push seat release lever 1 in the switches on the multi-contour seat*. direction of the arrow. If your seat was positioned behind the The easy-entry function is activated: easy-entry position, you can move it forwards again by pressing the memory A The seat cushion and head restraint button. RR move down

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 97 Controls in detail Seats

Easy-entry feature i Risk of injury G The easy-entry feature makes it easier for This process can be interrupted by: you to get in and out of the vehicle. The Make sure that the backrest is fully en- A operating the lever for adjusting the steering wheel moves up towards the gaged. steering wheel (R page 29) cockpit. A pressing a memory function posi- The easy-entry feature is activated if you tion button (R page 102) have stored a setting for the key (R page 102) and you:

A remove the key from the ignition lock Risk of injury G P91.00-2156-31 or Make sure that nobody can become trapped A open the driver's door when the key is when you activate the easy-entry feature. in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock Never leave children unsupervised in the ve- If the key is inserted in the ignition lock hicle. They could open the driver's door from when the driver's door is closed, the steer- the inside, even if it is locked, and thereby Protection against entrapment of the feet ing wheel returns to the last position set. unintentionally activate the easy-entry fea- ture.

The easy-entry feature can be activated or deactivated using the operating system (R page 154).

98 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Seats

Folding down the backrest Rear bench seat The head restraint must support the back of your head at about eye level. G Risk of accident Seat positions which do not allow you to wear your seat belt correctly are a safety For safety reasons, only adjust the rear hazard and must therefore be avoided. bench seat when the vehicle is stationary. P91.22-2091-31 Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the seat is adjusted. Risk of injury G Make sure that the seat lock clicks audibly into place. The rear bench seat must be adjusted in such a way that the seat belt can be fas- The rear bench seat is divided asymmetri- 1 Backrest release levers tened correctly (R page 31). cally. You can move the left-hand and right- 2 Rear bench seat release lever The back of the body must be against the hand sections separately to enlarge the 7 Remove the head restraints backrest and the seat belt must be at shoul- luggage compartment. The following varia- (R page 96). der height. tions are possible: 7 Pull release lever 1 and fold the back- Only drive with the head restraints fitted. A The backrests folded down rest forwards until it engages. This reduces the risk of injury in the event of A The rear bench seat folded fully for- an accident. wards

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 99 Controls in detail Seats

Raising the backrest Folding down the rear bench seat Side-facing rear bench seat* in the i 7 Fold down the backrest. luggage compartment Long-wheelbase station wagon: open 7 Pull release lever 2 and fold the rear G the rear doors. This will allow you to bench seat forwards until it engages. Risk of injury reach release lever 1 more easily. Raising the rear bench seat Make sure that nobody can become trapped as the side-facing bench seat is folded 7 Pull release lever 1 and fold up the 7 Fold the rear bench seat back until the down. backrest. Make sure that the seat belt seat lock clicks audibly into place. is not trapped. The side-facing rear bench seat should only 7 Raise the backrest. be occupied when the rear bench seat is 7 Push the backrest backwards until the raised and the seat lock is engaged. seat lock clicks audibly into place. 7 Install the head restraints. The rear bench seat head restraints must be Install the head restraints. 7 installed.

100 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Seats

Folding down the side-facing rear Folding up the side-facing rear bench bench seat seat

7 Fold side-facing rear bench seat 2 up- wards. P91.22-2093-31 7 Fold in support 1 and press it fully into recess 3 of side-facing rear bench P91.22-2092-31 seat 2.

4 Wheel housing

7 Make sure that support 1 is against 1 Support wheel housing 4. 2 Side-facing rear bench seat 3 Recess

7 Fold out support 1.

7 Fold side-facing rear bench seat 2 downwards.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 101 Controls in detail Storing settings

Using the memory function, you can store Storing 7 Press required position button 2 until three settings on the driver's side per key. adjustment is complete. 7 Set the seats and head restraints, and On the front-passenger side, you can store i one setting per memory button. also the steering wheel and exterior mirror on the driver's side. For safety reasons, the adjustment will The buttons are located on the doors. stop as soon as you release the position 7 Press memory button 1 and then re- button. lease it.

7 Press one of position buttons 2 within You will find information in the "Getting three seconds. started" section about: P54.25-2778-31 Calling up the stored positions A seat adjustment on (R page 27) ! A steering wheel adjustment on If the seat is reclined, first place the (R page 29) backrest in an upright position before A exterior mirror adjustment on recalling a stored position. You could (R page 30) 1 Memory button otherwise damage the seat. 2 Position buttons

7 Make sure that the ignition is switched on or the door is open.

102 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Storing settings

Exterior mirror parking position 7 Press button 3. To make it easier to park, you can set the 7 Adjust the mirror so that you can see position of the exterior mirror on the front- the rear wheel on the front-passenger passenger side in such a way that you can side. P88.70-2179-31 see the rear wheel on the front-passenger 7 Press memory button 4 and the lower side as soon as you engage reverse gear. section of adjustment button 1 within You can store one parking position per key three seconds. for the exterior mirror on the front-passen- The parking position is stored if the ger side. mirror does not move. 1 Adjustment button Storing 2 To select the left-hand exterior mirror 7 Make sure that the vehicle is stationary 3 To select the right-hand exterior mirror and the ignition is switched on. 4 Memory button

7 Make sure that the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING function is activated in the CONVENIENCE submenu (R page 156).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 103 Controls in detail Loading

Loading guidelines Please observe the following information when loading and transporting goods:

Risk of injury G A Do not allow the load, including pas- sengers, to exceed the gross vehicle Secure and position loads as described in P97.00-2005-31 weight or the permitted axle loads for the loading guidelines. the vehicle.

Otherwise, vehicle occupants could be in- A Push heavy loads forwards as far as jured by the load in the event of sharp brak- possible. Fill the rear of the luggage ing, a sudden change of direction, or an compartment with lighter items. accident. The handling characteristics of a laden ve- A Do not stack loads higher than the up- Even if you follow all loading guidelines, the hicle depend on the distribution of the load per edge of the backrests. load increases the risk of injury in the event within the vehicle. For this reason, you A Always place the load against the back- of an accident. should load the vehicle as shown in the illustration. rests of the front or rear seats.

Risk of poisoning G

Close the rear door when the vehicle is in motion. Exhaust fumes could otherwise enter the ve- hicle interior and poison you.

104 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Loading

A Whenever possible, transport loads be- A Secure any kind of load with sufficient hind seats that are not occupied. wear and tear-resistant lashing material. A As far as is possible, loads should be transported in the luggage compart- A Pad sharp edges for protection. ment with the backrests engaged in an P68.00-2962-31 upright position. Anchoring loads

Long-wheelbase station wagon: There are four lashing eyelets on the sides of the luggage compartment. Lashing eyelet P68.00-2984-31 Short-wheelbase station wagon and Please note the following information for Cabriolet: anchoring loads: There are two lashing eyelets at the sides A Secure loads to the lashing eyelets. under the rear bench seat. A Do not use elastic securing straps or nets. These are only suitable as anti- A If the rear bench seat is not occupied: slip protection for lighter loads. RR insert each seat belt cross-wise into the opposite buckle

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 105 Controls in detail Loading

A Do not pass the lashing material across Safety net* sharp edges or corners. Pad sharp edg- es for protection. Risk of injury G A Boot tubs that cover the lashing eyelets must be removed before securing If you are transporting light items, use the loads. safety net as described below.

A Observe the instructions issued with P68.00-2963-31 The safety net cannot restrain heavier loads. the lashing material used. For this reason, you should always tie them down. A If you use tensioning straps, please use only those with a breaking strain of at Otherwise, you could damage items of lug- least 700 kg and a maximum strap gage that have not been adequately secured width of 25 mm. in the event of an emergency stop or impact. If the safety net is fitted, the row of seats be- A Pass the tensioning strap cross-wise hind it must not be occupied. over the load as illustrated.

A Spread the load evenly between the lashing eyelets.

A If using tensioners: do not overload the lashing eyelets.

106 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Loading

You can secure the safety net behind the Attaching the safety net at the top rear bench seat, or behind the front seats when the rear bench seat is folded for- i wards. Long-wheelbase station wagon: open the rear doors. This will allow you to P68.50-2186-31 Installation position behind the rear hook in the safety net more easily. bench seat

3 Tensioning buckle P68.50-2185-31 4 Strap P68.50-2194-31 7 Hook safety net 1 into retainer 2 on both sides. Tensioning buckles 3 of straps 4 must point in the direction of travel 1 Safety net (arrow). 7 Fold the rear bench seat forwards 2 Retainer (R page 100) without having folded down the backrest first.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 107 Controls in detail Loading

Attaching the safety net at the bottom Tightening the safety net Removing the safety net

7 Pull the loose ends of straps 4 to gen- 7 Loosen straps 4. tly tighten safety net 1. 7 Move tensioning buckles 3 to the 7 Raise the rear bench seat horizontal position. (R page 100). 7 Unhook hook 5. P68.50-2187-31 The safety net is pulled tight by the rear 7 Unhook safety net 1 at the top. bench seat. 7 Roll up safety net 1 and fasten it with i the Velcro fasteners from the glove Check the tension of the safety net af- compartment. ter travelling a short distance. Retight- 5 Hook 7 Place the safety net behind the rear 6 Lashing eyelet en the safety net if necessary. bench seat.

7 Adjust straps 4 to the necessary length for lashing eyelets 6 using ten- sioning buckles 3.

7 Attach hook 5 to lashing eyelets 6.

108 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Loading

Installation position behind the front Attaching the safety net at the top Attaching the safety net at the bottom seats

P68.50-2189-31 P68.50-2185-31 P68.50-2188-31

1 Safety net 3 Tensioning buckle 7 Fold the rear bench seat forwards 2 Retainer 4 Strap (R page 100). 5 Hook 6 Lashing eyelet RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 109 Controls in detail Loading

7 Hook safety net 1 into retainer 2 on i Short-wheelbase station wagon with both sides. stowage boxes Check the tension of the safety net af- Tensioning buckles 3 on straps 4 ter travelling a short distance. Retight- must be visible when viewed in the di- en the safety net if necessary. rection of the luggage compartment. You will find information about removing 7 Adjust straps 4 to the necessary length for lashing eyelets 6 using ten- the safety net on (R page 108). P68.50-2190-31 sioning buckles 3. Stowing the safety net 7 Attach hook 5 to lashing eyelets 6. 7 Roll up safety net 1. Tightening the safety net Fasten using the Velcro fastener from the glove compartment. 7 Pull the loose ends of straps 4 firmly 1 Safety net until safety net 1 is sufficiently tight- 2 Velcro fastener ened. 3 Slots in the stowage box 7 Guide Velcro fastener 2 through slots in the stowage box 3.

7 Secure safety net 1 using Velcro fas- tener 2.

110 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Loading

Luggage compartment cover Covering the luggage compartment Retracting the blind 7 Take hold of the blind by the pull strip Risk of injury G and remove it from the retainer on both sides. Make sure that the luggage compartment 7 Guide it back slowly. cover is correctly inserted. P68.50-2191-31 It might otherwise come loose and injure Removing the luggage compartment you. cover When the luggage compartment cover is fit- ted, the side-facing rear bench seat must not be occupied. 1 Blind to the rear bench seat 2 Blind to the rear door Station wagon 7 Extend blind 1. Hook it into the retain- P68.50-2197-31 The luggage compartment cover compris- ers on the rear bench seat. es two blinds. You can also completely cover the luggage compartment when the 7 Extend blind 2. Hook it into the retain- rear bench seat is folded forward. ers on the left and right of the tailgate. 1 Locking mechanism 2 Luggage compartment cover RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 111 Controls in detail Loading

7 Roll the luggage compartment cover Covering and uncovering the luggage Stowage boxes* in the short- up. compartment wheelbase station wagon 7 Push locking mechanisms 1 on the The stowage boxes are located to the rear left and right-hand sides of luggage of the luggage compartment on the left compartment cover 2 towards the and right-hand sides. centre of the vehicle.

7 Swing out the luggage compartment P68.50-2192-31 cover upwards.

Short-wheelbase station wagon with P68.00-2964-31 stowage boxes The luggage compartment cover is a fold- 1 Luggage compartment cover ing cover. 2 Retainer 7 Fold luggage compartment cover 1 over the luggage compartment (ar- rowed). Opening 7 Fold the cover upwards. Removing the luggage compartment cover

7 Unhook luggage compartment cover 1 from the left and right-hand sides of retainer 2.

7 Remove luggage compartment cover 1. 112 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Loading

Ski holder* and roof rack* i Trailer tow hitch* Roof racks recommended for use on Risk of accident G Mercedes-Benz vehicles have been Risk of accident G specially developed and tested. These Observe the manufacturer's installation in- roof racks conform to DIN standard In the event of malfunctions or damage, structions when using roof racks. 75302 and are additionally subjected have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at A roof rack that has not been secured cor- to crash and durability tests. a qualified specialist workshop which has rectly or an incorrectly secured load can be- the necessary specialist knowledge and come detached. ! tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Observe the maximum roof load Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- (R page 401, 402) when using roof racks. only use roof racks that have been test- ed and approved for use on Mercedes- pose. Benz vehicles. These help to prevent In particular, work relevant to safety or on vehicle damage. You can obtain more safety-related systems must be carried out detailed information from any at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 113 Controls in detail Loading

Trailer with 7-pin connector Attaching an adapter cable

7 Lift the socket cap.

7 Insert the connector into the socket. Lug 2 on the connector is inserted P31.10-2574-31 into groove 1 in the socket. P31.10-2417-31 7 Turn the connector clockwise to the stop.

7 Let the cap of the socket click into place in the plug. 1 Coupling ball 2 Socket Secure the adapter cable to the trailer with 1 Groove cable ties. 2 Lug Care Using an adapter cable, you can also con- i Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty 7 nect 7-pin connectors to the 13-pin socket The ultrasound reversing aid* (R page 289). in the vehicle. You can obtain the adapter (R page 218) is deactivated when the i cable from a qualified specialist workshop, trailer cable or the adapter cable is in- e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. serted into the socket. Your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will also carry out this maintenance work.

114 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Lighting :Lighting You will find information about switching i Light switch on the lights and using turn signals in the If you are driving in countries where ve- The light switch is on the left of the cock- "Getting started" section (R page 40). hicles are driven on the opposite side of pit. Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for the road to that in the country in which safety reasons, you drive with the head- the vehicle is registered, oncoming traf- lamps switched on even during the day- fic could be dazzled by the asymmetric time. Variations in operation are possible dipped-beam headlamps. Have the in certain countries as a result of legal re- headlamps switched over to symmetri- quirements and self-imposed obligations. cal dipped beam when driving in these P54.25-2781-31 In these countries, the dipped-beam head- countries. You can obtain information lamps are switched on at the same time as from any Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- the ignition. In countries where constant tre. headlamp mode is not a requirement, you can adjust this setting using the operating M Lights off/constant headlamp system (R page 145). mode U Lights controlled automatically C Side lamps, licence plate illumina- tion and instrument lighting B Dipped-beam or main-beam head- lamps on ˆ Right-hand parking lamp on ‚ Left-hand parking lamp on

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 115 Controls in detail Lighting

Automatic headlamp feature i You should only turn the light switch from A warning sounds if you remove the key The side lamps, dipped-beam headlamps U to B when it is dark if the vehicle is from the ignition lock and open the and licence plate illumination are switched stationary. You could otherwise cause an driver's door while the side lamps or on automatically, depending on the ambi- accident as a result of the headlamps being dipped-beam headlamps are switched ent light. briefly interrupted. on. The automatic headlamp feature is only an The SWITCH OFF LIGHTS! message ap- Risk of accident G aid. You are responsible for the vehicle's pears in the multi-function display. lighting. If the light switch is set to U:

Constant headlamp mode A the headlamps may switch off briefly as 7 Turn the light switch to U. a result of strong glare (e.g. from on- You can set constant headlamp mode us- The side lamps are switched on and off coming traffic) ing the operating system (R page 145). automatically when the key is in posi- the lights do not switch on automatically This does not apply to countries in which A tion 1 in the ignition lock (R page 35). there is a legal requirement to use con- in foggy conditions The dipped-beam headlamps, side stant headlamp mode. Set the light switch to B in good time. lamps and licence plate illumination You will otherwise endanger yourself and 7 Turn the light switch to M. are switched on/off automatically others. The dipped-beam headlamps, side when the engine is running. lamps and licence plate illumination are switched on when the engine is run- ning.

116 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Lighting

Front foglamps/rear foglamp Switching on the front foglamps Switching on the rear foglamp i 7 Make sure that the B dipped-beam 7 Make sure that the B dipped-beam headlamps are switched on. headlamps are switched on. When the light switch is set to U, you cannot switch on the front or rear 7 Pull the light switch to the first stop. 7 Pull the light switch to the second stop. foglamps. To switch on the front The green ‡ indicator lamp in the The yellow † indicator lamp in the foglamps, you must first turn the light light switch lights up. light switch lights up. switch to B.

Risk of accident G

Turn the light switch:

A from U to B when it is dark only if the vehicle is stationary A to B before driving if you suspect foggy conditions You could otherwise cause an accident as a result of the headlamps being briefly inter- rupted.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 117 Controls in detail Lighting

Exterior lighting delayed switch-off i Deactivating delayed switch-off tempo rarily The following lights switch on when you You can reactivate this function within stop the engine in darkness: ten minutes by opening a door. 7 After switching off the engine, turn the key to position 0 in the ignition lock, Side lamps If none of the doors is opened after the A then to 2 and then back to 0 engine is switched off, or an open door Tail lamps ( page 35). A is not closed, the exterior lighting goes R A Licence plate illumination out after 60 seconds. Delayed switch-off is reactivated auto- matically the next time the engine is A Front foglamps started. When a door is opened and then closed You can set or deactivate the delayed again, the delayed switch-off time set in switch-off feature using the operating sys- the operating system (R page 147) begins tem ( page 147). to count down. The lights switch off once R this delayed switch-off time has elapsed.

118 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Lighting

Locator lighting Remote-operated illuminated entry Adjusting the headlamp range If you set the locator lighting to ON in the system The thumbwheel for adjusting the head- operating system (R page 146), the follow- The lamps in the exterior mirrors come on lamp range is to the left of the steering ing lights are switched on after the vehicle when the vehicle is unlocked centrally column. is unlocked centrally when it is dark: when it is dark.

A Side lamps When you open a door, the lamp on the re- spective side goes out. If no door is A Tail lamps opened, the lamps go out: A Licence plate illumination A when you switch on the ignition P54.25-2782-31 A Front foglamps A after no more than 40 seconds The lights are switched off:

A if you open the driver's door

A if you switch on the ignition Thumbwheel or

A automatically after no more than i 40 seconds Only use the settings described below for the respective vehicle.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 119 Controls in detail Lighting

Long-wheelbase station wagon Short-wheelbase station wagon Cabriolet 0 Front seats occupied, or front seats 0 Front seats occupied 0 Front seats occupied and rear bench seat occupied 1 Front seats and rear bench seat 1 Front seats and rear bench seat 1 Front seats and rear bench seat occu- occupied occupied pied and load in the luggage compart- 2 Front seats and rear bench seat occu- 2 Front seats and rear bench seat occu- ment to the maximum permitted rear pied and load in the luggage compart- pied and load in the luggage compart- axle load, but not exceeding the maxi- ment to the maximum permitted rear ment to the maximum permitted rear mum permissible gross vehicle weight axle load, but not exceeding the maxi- axle load, but not exceeding the maxi- 2 Driver's seat occupied and load in the mum permissible gross vehicle weight mum permissible gross vehicle weight luggage compartment to the maximum 3 Driver's seat occupied and load in the 4 Driver's seat occupied and load in the permitted rear axle load, but not ex- luggage compartment to the maximum luggage compartment to the maximum ceeding the maximum permissible permitted rear axle load, but not ex- permitted rear axle load, but not ex- gross vehicle weight ceeding the maximum permissible ceeding the maximum permissible gross vehicle weight gross vehicle weight

120 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Lighting

Combination switch Switching on the main-beam head Hazard warning lamps lamps The combination switch is located on the The hazard warning lamps still operate if left of the steering column. 7 Turn the light switch to B or U the ignition is switched off. They switch on (R page 115). automatically when an airbag is triggered. 7 Press the combination switch towards The switch is located on the upper section 1. of the centre console. The main-beam headlamps come on. P54.25-2783-31 The A main-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Headlamp flasher P54.25-2784-31 7 Pull the combination switch briefly to- wards 2. 1 Main-beam headlamps 2 Headlamp flasher The A main-beam indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up briefly. Hazard warning lamps switch

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 121 Controls in detail Lighting

Switching on the hazard warning lamps Interior lighting Automatic control 7 Press the hazard warning lamps switch. The switches are located on the overhead Switching on All the turn signal lamps flash. control panel. 7 Move rocker switch 3 to the middle position. Switching off the hazard warning lamps When it is dark, the interior lighting (ex- 7 Press the hazard warning lamps switch cept the luggage compartment) switch- again. es on automatically if you: All the turn signal lamps go out. P82.20-2406-31 A unlock the vehicle

i A remove the key from the ignition If the hazard warning lamps have been lock switched on automatically, press the open a door hazard warning lamps switch twice. A 1 Luggage compartment lighting switch The front interior lighting comes on when a 2 Front right reading lamp switch front door is opened, the rear interior light- 3 Rocker switch for automatic control ing comes on when a rear door is opened. 4 Front left reading lamp switch The entry lamps also switch on.

122 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Lighting

The interior lighting switches off after ap- Switching off Manual control proximately 30 minutes if a door is left 7 Press the ñ symbol on rocker open and if the key is not in the ignition Switching on switch 3. lock. ð The interior lighting also remains 7 Press the symbol on rocker The interior lighting switches off automati- 3 switched off when it is dark and you: switch . cally after a delay once the door is closed The interior lighting remains on even if and if the key is not in the ignition lock. A unlock the vehicle the doors are closed. You can set or deactivate the delayed A remove the key from the ignition switch-off feature using the operating sys- lock Switching off tem (R page 148). A open a door 7 Move rocker switch 3 to the middle position. ! The reading lamps do not switch off automatically when they have been switched on manually. Switch off the reading lamps after use so that the bat- tery is not discharged.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 123 Controls in detail Lighting

Rear reading lamps Luggage compartment lighting The rear reading lamps are located above The switch is located on the overhead con- the rear bench seat on the right and left- trol panel. hand sides. P82.20-2407-31

P82.20-2411-31 P82.20-2408-31 Luggage compartment lighting

1 Luggage compartment lighting switch 1 Reading lamp on 2 Reading lamp off 3 Automatic control

124 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Lighting

Switching on and off To switch off:

7 Press the ò switch to switch the 7 Open the rear door. luggage compartment lighting on and 7 Press the lock down in the direction of off. the arrow until it engages. P72.12-2231-31 i The luggage compartment lighting is The luggage compartment lighting switched off. switches on when the rear door is opened. In this case, you cannot switch ! off the luggage compartment lighting Do not close the rear door while the using the ò switch. 1 Lock lock is engaged in the down position. 2 Lock cylinder You could otherwise damage the lock. Switching on and off when the rear door is open To switch on: Press lock cylinder 2. ! 7 Switch off the luggage compartment The luggage compartment lighting lighting if you wish to leave the rear functions again as normal. door open for a long time. This pre- vents the battery from being dis- charged.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 125 Controls in detail Instrument cluster

You will find a complete overview of the in- If you open the driver's door and then do Adjusting the instrument lighting strument cluster in the "At a glance" sec- nothing further, the display will only light You can adjust the brightness of the instru- tion (R page 18). up for approximately 30 seconds. ment lighting using the reset button locat- You can change the display in the instru- ed on the left-hand side of the instrument ment cluster using the operating system, cluster. e.g. the language setting (R page 129). If the vehicle's exterior lighting is switched on, the brightness of the buttons on the P54.30-6733-31 Risk of accident G centre console is also adjusted.

No messages are displayed if the instrument i cluster or the multi-function display has mal- The instrument lighting adjusts itself to functioned. You may then not recognise the brightness of the ambient light. dangers and endanger yourself or others. 1 Reset button Consult a qualified specialist workshop im- The display in the instrument cluster is ac- mediately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service tivated when you: Centre, and have the instrument cluster or A turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the multi-function display checked. ignition lock (R page 35)

A open the driver's door

A press reset button 1

A switch on the lights (R page 115)

126 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Instrument cluster

Brighter Rev counter Outside temperature display 7 Turn reset button 1 clockwise. The red mark in the rev counter denotes The instrument lighting becomes the engine's overrevving range. Risk of accident G brighter. ! Even if the temperature displayed is just Do not drive in the overrevving range. Dimmer above freezing point, the road surface may Doing so could damage the engine. still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on 7 Turn reset button 1 anti-clockwise. bridges. Your vehicle could enter a skid if The instrument lighting becomes dim- The fuel supply is cut off to protect the en- you do not adapt your driving style accord- mer. gine when the red band is reached. ingly. For this reason, always adapt your driving style and speed in accordance with Resetting the trip meter the weather conditions. Environmental note H 7 Press reset button 1 in the instrument cluster repeatedly until the trip meter is Avoid high engine speeds. Your vehicle's When you leave a garage, for example, shown. fuel consumption will increase unnecessari- a lower outside temperature is only dis- played after a delay. 7 Press reset button 1 again and keep it ly and the higher level of pollutant emissions pressed until the display is reset. will damage the environment.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 127 Controls in detail Instrument cluster

There may also be a short delay before a rise in the outside temperature is dis- played. This prevents the wrong tempera- ture, caused by heat radiating from the engine, being displayed when the vehicle is stationary or travelling slowly. i You can set the unit for the tempera- ture display using the operating system (R page 143).

128 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system :Operating system The operating system is activated as soon Multi-function display The basic status of the multi-function dis- as the ignition is switched on. You may per- play shows the current: The multi-function display is in the speed- form the following using the operating sys- ometer. The basic status of the multi-func- A trip meter value tem: tion display shows the trip meter and the A total distance recorded A Call up the information about your total distance recorder in the centre of the vehicle speedometer. This is referred to as the as well as the: A Make settings standard display. The standard display will A outside temperature also show you if any malfunctions are time You can use this not only to find out when present. A the next service is due, but also to set the A transfer case display language for messages in the instrument cluster and much more. A selector lever position/shift range P54.30-XXXX-31 If a different display is shown, press the è or ÿ button repeatedly until the Risk of accident G standard display appears. Only use the operating system when road and traffic conditions permit. You will otherwise 1 Trip meter be too distracted and could cause an accident 2 Total distance recorder as a result. 3 Outside temperature 4 Clock The operating system shows the informa- 5 Selector lever position/automatic tion in the multi-function display. transmission shift range 6 Transfer case display

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 129 Controls in detail Operating system

The multi-function display changes when Multi-function steering wheel Function you press one of these buttons on the The multi-function display and the settings 1 Multi-function display multi-function steering wheel. in the operating system are controlled us- ing the buttons on the multi-function steer- Controlling the operating system The multi-function display can be consid- ing wheel. 2 Selecting a submenu or adjusting the ered as a menu which contains a number volume of submenus. ç Back/decreases the volume Several commands are thematically com- æ Forwards/increases the bined in each of the menus. In the AUDIO volume menu, for example, you will find functions for operating the radio or the CD player. 3 Using the telephone* You can use a function to call up informa- P46.10-2319-31 í Accepts a call tion or to change the settings for your ve- ì Ends a call hicle. 4 Jumping from one menu to another è Forwards ÿ Back 5 Scrolling within the menu j Forwards k Back

130 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

The arrangement of the menus and func- The SETTINGS... menu contains submenus The menus for vehicles with a COMAND/ tions within a menu can be imagined as a instead of functions with which you can COMAND APS system are described on cycle: call up or change a setting. The way in the following pages. which you control these submenus is de- A If you press the è or ÿ button scribed in the "Settings menu" section enough times, each menu will appear ( page 138). one after the other. R The number of menus depends on: A If you press the k or j button enough times, all the functions of each A the special equipment in your vehicle menu will appear one after the other. A whether a COMAND* or Audio 30 sys- tem is installed in your vehicle

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 131 Controls in detail Operating system

Menus on vehicles with a COMAND This is what the displays look like when you The explanations for the individual menus system* installed scroll through the menus. are shown in the following table.

German P54.30--31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6023en-31 Französisch: P54.30-6023fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6023it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6023sp-31

132 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

This is what the menus and their individual functions look like:

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6 Menu 7 Standard AUDIO NAVI* Malfunction Settings Trip computer Telephone* display memory Check the en- Select a radio Activate route Call up a mal- Reset to factory Consumption Enter PIN gine oil level station guidance function settings statistics after start Call up ASSYST Operate the CD Instrument clus- Consumption Load the phone player* ter submenu statistics since book the last reset Digital speed- Select a TV Lighting Call up the Look for a name ometer station* submenu range in the phone book

Functions/submenus Check the cool- Vehicle ant temperature submenu Heater submenu* Convenience submenu

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 133 Controls in detail Operating system

i The standard display can also be modified. Displaying the digital speedometer The digital speedometer can be displayed The tabular overview of the menus con- 7 Press the k or j button repeat- instead of the outside temperature. You tains generic terms which are not al- edly until the speedometer appears in can select this setting in the INSTRUMENT ways shown in the operating system. the display. CLUSTER submenu in the DISPLAY VALUES IN The appropriate generic term should function ( page 145). The current speed is displayed. make it easier for you to familiarise R You can select the following functions yourself with the menus. 7 Checking the coolant temperature in the standard display of the menu by The operating system displays the new pressing the k or j buttons: 7 Press the k or j button repeat- function range with the first menu func- edly until the coolant temperature ap- tion. Function Page pears in the display. The operating system displays the menus Check the engine oil level 254 for the Audio 10*, Audio 10 CD* and Call up ASSYST 283 Audio 30 APS* audio systems in English, P54.30-6396-31 Digital speedometer 134 regardless of the language selected for the Ein Bild für alle Sprachen. display. Check the coolant temperature 134

134 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

k j Audio menu Selecting a radio station 7 Press the or button repeat- edly until you have found the station 7 Switch on the radio. You can control the audio equipment you require. which you have just switched on using the For notes on how to do this, see the Depending on the setting for station se- functions in the Audio menu. separate Operating Instructions. lection (R page 149), the radio search- If no audio equipment has been switched 7 Press the è or ÿ button repeat- es: on and: edly until the station currently selected A for the next stored station (SP) A an audio system is installed, the AUDIO appears in the display. OFF message appears in the display A using the station search function A a COMAND system* is installed, the i P54.30-6073-31 AUDIO OFF message appears in the dis- You can only store new stations using play (DE, EN=IT, FR, SP) the radio itself. For notes on how to do this, see the separate operating instruc- Function Page tions. Radio, select station 135 1 Station You can also operate the radio in the Operate the CD player/CD 136 2 Frequency range same way as usual. changer* 3 Setting for station selection using memory

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 135 Controls in detail Operating system

Operating the CD player* Navigation* menu A If the navigation system is switched on, the NAVI ACTIVE message is displayed. 7 Switch on the radio and select the CD In the NAVI menu, you can set the naviga- player. tion system route guidance to be shown in A When route guidance is activated, you For notes on how to do this, see the the display. will see a display such as that shown below: separate operating instructions. 7 Press the è or ÿ button repeat- 7 Press the è or ÿ button repeat- edly until the NAVI message appears in edly until the settings for the CD being the display. P54.30-6074-31 played are shown in the display. Different messages are shown in the dis- play depending on the status of the naviga- (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT) tion system: P54.30-6072-31 If the navigation system is switched off, A You can read about how to activate route the NAVI OFF message is displayed. (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT) guidance in the separate Audio 30 Export* or COMAND* system Operating Instruc- tions. 1 Current track 2 Current CD (with CD changer*)

7 Press the k or j button repeat- edly until you have selected the track you require.

136 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

k j Malfunction memory menu No malfunction 7 Press the or button. You can call up messages relating to The NO MALFUNCTION message is displayed This scrolls through the malfunction malfunctions which have occurred in the if no malfunctions have occurred. messages in order. You will find possi- Malfunction memory menu. The message ble malfunctions in the "Practical ad- displayed depends on whether or not mal- Malfunctions occurred vice" section (R page 316). functions have occurred. If malfunctions have occurred, the number i of malfunctions is displayed: G When you have scrolled through all the Risk of accident malfunction messages, the display be- gins again from the start. RR The operating system only records and dis- P54.30-6075-31 plays malfunctions and warnings from certain systems. Make sure, therefore, that the vehi- (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT) cle is safe to use. You could otherwise cause an accident as a result of the vehicle not being safe to use. 1 Number of malfunctions

7 Press the è or ÿ button repeat- edly until the corresponding malfunc- tion memory message appears in the display.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 137 Controls in detail Operating system

If malfunctions occur while you are driving, Settings menu Resetting all settings the number of malfunctions will be shown You can reset the functions of all the sub- again in the display at the end of your jour- The SETTINGS... menu has two functions: menus to the factory settings. ney (key in position 0 or removed from A The reset function: RESET WITH RESET the ignition lock). Each malfunction is dis- BUTTON which you can use to reset all 7 To do this, press the reset button locat- played for approximately five seconds. the settings to the factory settings ed on the left-hand side of the instru- Press the reset button to display the next ment cluster for approximately three A A collection of submenus which you malfunction immediately. seconds. can use to make individual settings for 7 Press the reset button located on your vehicle The request prompting you to press the the left of the instrument cluster reset button once more to confirm ap- 7 Press the è or ÿ button repeat- (R page 126) repeatedly until you have pears in the display. edly until the SETTINGS... menu ap- viewed all the malfunction messages. pears in the display. 7 Press the reset button again. i All the submenu functions are reset to All malfunction messages are cleared their factory settings. from the malfunction memory when you P54.30-6076-31 turn the key back to position 1 or 2 in (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT) the ignition lock. Only the priority 1 mal- functions will then be displayed. Should any malfunctions reoccur, they are dis- played once again.

138 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

Submenus in the Settings menu Function Page i k j Reset all settings 138 If you do not press the reset button a 7 Press the or button. second time to confirm, the changed Submenus in the Settings menu 139 All the submenus are shown in the dis- settings remain set. The SETTINGS... play. Reset submenu functions 140 menu is displayed again after approxi- Instrument cluster submenu 142 mately five seconds. Lighting submenu 145 If the settings are reset while the vehi- P54.30-6077-31 cle is being driven, the LIGHT CIRCUIT Vehicle submenu 149 HEADLAMP MODE function in the LIGHTING (DE, EN, FR, SP, IT) Heater submenu 150 submenu is not reset for safety rea- sons. The LIGHTING CANNOT BE COM- Convenience submenu 154 ç PLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS 7 Press the button. WHILE DRIVING! message appears in the The next submenu is selected. display.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 139 Controls in detail Operating system

The submenus are ordered in a hierarchy. i 7 Press the reset button again. You can scroll down by pressing the ç Resetting functions to the factory set- All functions in the submenu are reset button and up by pressing the æ but- tings is only possible at very low road to their factory settings. ton. speeds. Therefore, reset the settings You can select individual functions within when the vehicle is stationary. i the submenus by pressing the k or If you do not press the reset button a j button. 7 Select a function within the submenu second time to confirm, the changed k j settings remain set. The previously se- You can modify the settings again yourself by pressing the or button. lected submenu is displayed again after using the æ or ç button. 7 Press the reset button located on the five seconds. left-hand side of the instrument cluster Resetting submenu functions for approximately three seconds. You can reset the functions in each sub- The request prompting you to press the menu to the factory settings. reset button once more to confirm ap- pears in the display.

140 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

This table shows the settings you can make in the individual submenus. You will find additional information on the following pages.

Instrument cluster Lighting Vehicle Heater* Convenience Set the hours (time) Set constant headlamp Set the station selection Select the switch-on Activate the easy-entry mode (radio) time feature Set the minutes (time) Switch the locator light- Set the automatic door Set the hours Set key dependence ing on/off lock Select the time display Set the exterior lighting Set the minutes Set the parking position delayed switch-off for the exterior mirrors Select the temperature Set the interior lighting Select the heater boost- display delayed switch-off er* settings Select the speedometer and total distance re- corder display Select the language Select the display for the standard display

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 141 Controls in detail Operating system

Instrument cluster submenu Setting the hours 7 Set the hours by pressing the æ or ç button. You can set the clock in the INSTRUMENT This function is only displayed if you have CLUSTER submenu and determine the dis- an Audio 10 or Audio 10 CD* system fitted The hours are set and stored. plays in the instrument cluster. in the vehicle. Setting the minutes You will find the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER sub- 7 Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER sub- menu in the SETTINGS... menu. The follow- menu by pressing the æ or ç This function is only displayed if you have ing settings are possible: button. an Audio 10 or Audio 10 CD* system fitted in the vehicle. 7 Press the j or k button repeat- Function Page edly until the SET TIME HOURS message 7 Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER sub- Set the hours (time) 142 appears in the display. menu by pressing the æ or ç button. Set the minutes (time) 142 The hour figure is highlighted. Select the time display 143 Select the temperature display 143 P54.30-6201-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7431-31 Select the speedometer and to- 144 Französisch: P54.30-7450-31 tal distance recorder display Italienisch: P54.30-6201it-31 Select the language 144 Spanisch: P54.30-6860sp-31 Select the display for the stand- 145 ard display

142 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

7 Press the j or k button repeat- Selecting the time display Selecting the temperature display edly until the SET TIME MINUTES mes- 7 Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER sub- 7 Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER sub- sage appears in the display. menu by pressing the æ or ç menu by pressing the æ or ç The minute figure is highlighted. button. button.

7 Press the j or k button repeat- 7 Press the j or k button repeat- P54.30-6202-31 edly until the 12/24 HOUR message ap- edly until the TEMP. INDICATOR mes- Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7432-31 pears in the display. sage appears in the display. Französisch: P54.30-7449-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6202it-31 The current setting is highlighted. The current setting is highlighted. Spanisch: P54.30-6861sp-31 P54.30-6203-31 P54.30-6204-31 7 Set the minutes by pressing the æ Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7433-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6204en-31 or ç button. Französisch: P54.30-6203fr-31 Französisch: P54.30-6204fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6203it-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6204it-31 The minutes are set and stored. Spanisch: P54.30-6203sp-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6862sp-31

7 Select the 12h or 24h display by press- 7 Select the temperature display in °C ing the æ or ç button. (degrees Celsius) or °F (degrees Fahr- enheit) by pressing the æ or ç button.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 143 Controls in detail Operating system

Selecting the display values for the Selecting the language You can choose between: speedometer, total distance recorder 7 Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER sub- A German (DEUTSCH) and trip computer menu by pressing the æ or ç A English (ENGLISH) 7 Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER sub- button. menu by pressing the æ or ç A French (FRANCAIS) 7 Press the j or k button repeat- button. edly until the TEXT message appears in A Italian (ITALIANO) j k 7 Press the or button repeat- the display. A Spanish (ESPANOL) edly until the DISPLAY VALUES INmes- The current setting is highlighted. sage appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted. P54.30-6206-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6206en-31 P54.30-6205-31 Französisch: P54.30-6206fr-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6205en-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6206it-31 Französisch: P54.30-6205fr-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6206sp-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6205it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6205sp-31 7 Select the language in which you wish the operating system messages to be 7 Select the required display in km or displayed by pressing the æ or ç miles by pressing the æ or ç button. button.

144 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

Selecting the standard display1 Lighting submenu Setting constant headlamp mode

7 Select the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER sub- You can reach the LIGHTING submenu via If you have set constant headlamp mode menu by pressing the æ or ç the SETTINGS... menu. and the light switch is at 0, the following light up automatically: button. You can determine the following settings 7 Press the j or k button repeat- for your vehicle's lighting in the LIGHTING A Side lamps and dipped-beam head- edly until the SELECT DISPLAY message submenu: lamps appears in the display. A Licence plate illumination Function Page The current setting is highlighted. For safety reasons, you can only select Set constant headlamp mode 145 1 Except the United Kingdom. these settings when the vehicle is station- Switch the locator lighting on/ 146 ary. This function is not available in coun- off P54.30-6207-31 tries in which there is a legal requirement Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6207en-31 Set the exterior lighting delayed 147 to use constant headlamp mode. switch-off Französisch: P54.30-7448-31 7 Select the LIGHTING submenu by press- Italienisch: P54.30-6207it-31 Set the interior lighting delayed 148 ing the æ or ç button. Spanisch: P54.30-6207sp-31 switch-off 7 Press the j or k button repeat- edly until the LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLAMP 7 Select the required display by pressing the æ or ç button. MODE message appears in the display. The current setting is highlighted. RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 145 Controls in detail Operating system

Switching the locator lighting on/off P54.30-6210-31 i Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7434-31 If you turn the light switch to a position If you switch the locator lighting to ON, the Französisch: P54.30-7447-31 other than 0, the respective light comes following lights are switched on after the Italienisch: P54.30-7455-31 on. vehicle is unlocked using the remote con- trol when it is dark: Spanisch: P54.30-6210sp-31 If you reset the settings in the LIGHTING submenu to the factory settings while A The side lamps 7 Select whether you wish to operate the the vehicle is moving (R page 140), this lighting manually or whether you wish A The tail lamps setting will not be reset for safety rea- to set constant headlamp mode by sons. A The licence plate illumination pressing the æ or ç button. In this case, the LIGHTING CANNOT BE A The front foglamps COMPLETELY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS The lights are switched off: WHILE DRIVING! message appears in the display. A when you open the driver's door A when you switch on the ignition or

A automatically after no more than 40 seconds

146 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

7 Select the LIGHTING submenu by press- Setting the exterior lighting delayed 7 Select the LIGHTING submenu by press- ing the æ or ç button. switch-off ing the æ or ç button.

7 Press the j or k button repeat- You can set whether and for how long you 7 Press the j or k button repeat- edly until the LOCATOR LIGHTING mes- wish the exterior lighting to remain edly until the HEADLAMPS DELAYED sage appears in the display. switched on in the dark after closing the SWITCH-OFF message appears in the doors by using the HEADLAMPS DELAYED The current setting is highlighted. display. SWITCH-OFF function. The following lights 7 The current setting is highlighted. are switched on when you have set the de- P54.30-6211-31 layed switch-off and removed the key from Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6211en-31 P54.30-6212-31 the ignition: Französisch: P54.30-6211fr-31 Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6212en-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6211it-31 A The side lamps Französisch: P54.30-7446-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6211sp-31 Italienisch: P54.30-7454-31 A The tail lamps Spanisch: P54.30-6212sp-31 7 Switch the locator lighting ON or OFF by A The licence plate illumination pressing the æ or ç button. 7 Select the length of time you wish the A The front foglamps lights to remain on by pressing the i æ or ç button. RR You can reactivate this function within ten minutes by opening a door. If none of the doors is opened after the key is removed from the ignition lock, the exterior lighting goes out after 60 seconds.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 147 Controls in detail Operating system

You can choose between: Setting the interior lighting delayed switch-off P54.30-6213-31 A 0s: delayed switch-off is deactivat- Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7435-31 ed You can set whether and for how long Französisch: P54.30-6213fr-31 you wish the interior lighting to remain A 15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s: delayed Italienisch: P54.30-6213it-31 switched on in the dark after the key has switch-off is activated Spanisch: P54.30-6213sp-31 been removed from the ignition lock using the INT. LIGHTING DELAYED SWITCH-OFF You can temporarily deactivate delayed 7 Select the length of time you wish the switch-off: function. lights to remain on by pressing the æ or ç button. You can choose 7 Select the LIGHTING submenu by press- 7 To do this, turn the key back to position ing the æ or ç button. between: 0 in the ignition lock before leaving the A 0s: delayed switch-off is deacti- vehicle (R page 35). 7 Press the j or k button repeat- edly until the INT. LIGHTING DELAYED vated. 7 Then turn it to position 2 and back to 0 SWITCH-OFF message appears in the again. A 5s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s: delayed display. switch-off is activated. Delayed switch-off is deactivated. It is The current setting is highlighted. reactivated when the engine is started again.

148 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

Vehicle submenu Setting the station selection P54.30-6214-31 You will find the VEHICLE submenu in the You can determine whether the radio Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6214en-31 SETTINGS... menu. The following settings searches for a new station or selects a pre- Französisch: P54.30-7445-31 are possible in the VEHICLE submenu: set station each time the radio is operated Italienisch: P54.30-7438-31 (R page 135) using the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO Spanisch: P54.30-6863sp-31 Function Page MODE function. 7 Select how you wish the radio to Station selection (radio) 149 7 Select the VEHICLE submenu by press- search for a station using the æ or Automatic door locking 150 ing the æ or ç button. ç button: 7 Press the j or k button repeat- STATION SEARCH: the next frequency edly until the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO A MODE message appears in the display. is selected. The current setting is highlighted. A MEMORY: the next stored station is selected.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 149 Controls in detail Operating system

Setting the automatic door lock 7 Select the VEHICLE submenu by press- Heater submenu* ing the æ or ç button. You can switch the automatic door lock on There is only a HEATER submenu if your ve- or off using this function. If the automatic 7 Press the j or k button repeat- hicle has auxiliary heating* or a diesel en- door lock is switched on, the vehicle auto- edly until the AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK gine. You will find the HEATER submenu in matically locks centrally from a road speed message appears in the display. the SETTINGS... menu. of around 15 km/h. The current setting is highlighted. i You will find further information about the You can also reach this function by automatic door lock on (R page 91). P54.30-6215-31 moving the key to position 1 in the igni- Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6215en-31 tion lock and pressing the auxiliary Französisch: P54.30-6215fr-31 heating button. Italienisch: P54.30-6215it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6215sp-31 You can enter up to three switch-on times for the auxiliary heating*. However, you 7 Switch the AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK on or off by pressing the æ or ç but- may only activate one switch-on time. ton.

150 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

You can make the following settings: A switch-on time is activated if it has been selected and: Risk of fire and poisoning G Function Page A the key has been removed from the ig- Hot and poisonous exhaust fumes are pro- Select the switch-on time 151 nition lock duced when the auxiliary heating* or heater Change the switch-on time 152 A a different menu has been selected booster system are in operation. When the ve- Select the heater booster* set- 153 The yellow indicator lamp in the auxilia- hicle is being refuelled, fuel vapours may ig- tings ry heating* switch on the centre con- nite on the hot exhaust system. sole then lights up (R page 194). Do not switch on the auxiliary heating*: Selecting the switch-on time Set the temperature using Thermatic A at the filling station You can set up to three switch-on times us- (R page 184). You can switch off the auxil- A in confined spaces with no ventilation, ing the AUXILIARY HEATING SWITCH-ON TIME iary heating* using the remote control. e.g. in the garage function. Set the exact switch-on time us- ing the additional functions in the HEATER The auxiliary heating* switches off auto- You could otherwise endanger yourself submenu. matically after 50 minutes. You can have and others. RR this time changed. Visit a qualified special- ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Serv- ice Centre, for this purpose.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 151 Controls in detail Operating system

7 Select the HEATER submenu by pressing Changing the switch-on time 7 Press the j button again. the æ or ç button. This function is only displayed if you have P54.30-6219-31 7 Press the j or k button repeat- selected a switch-on time. Enter the time Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6219en-31 edly until the AUXILIARY HEATING at which the auxiliary heating* is to be Französisch: P54.30-6219fr-31 SWITCH-ON TIME message appears in switched on. the display. Italienisch: P54.30-6219it-31 7 Select the HEATER submenu by pressing Spanisch: P54.30-6219sp-31 The current setting is highlighted. the æ or ç button. 7 Set the minute at which the auxiliary 7 Press the j or k button repeat- P54.30-6217-31 heating* is to be switched on by press- edly until the AUXILIARY HEATING Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6217en-31 ing the æ or ç button. SWITCH-ON TIME n HOURSmessage Französisch: P54.30-fr-7444-31 appears in the display. The modified switch-on times are Italienisch: P54.30-6217it-31 stored again as soon as you quit the Spanisch: P54.30-6217sp-31 P54.30-6218-31 menu. Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6218en-31 7 Select the time when you wish the aux- Französisch: P54.30-6218fr-31 iliary heating* to switch on by pressing Italienisch: P54.30-6218it-31 the æ or ç button. Spanisch: P54.30-6218sp-31 A TIME 1, TIME 2, TIME 3: The time is selected 7 Set the hour at which the auxiliary heating* is to be switched on by press- A TIMER OFF: The auxiliary heating* ing the æ or ç button. does not switch on automatically.

152 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

Selecting the heater booster* settings A OFF WITH AC-OFF: You can switch P54.30-6220-31 the heater booster on and off by Vehicles with a diesel engine are equipped Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7436-31 pressing the button (economy with a heater booster system. This means ° Französisch: P54.30-7443-31 mode) on the Thermatic control that less time is required for heating up the Italienisch: P54.30-7453-31 panel (R page 184). vehicle interior and for the engine to reach Spanisch: P54.30-6864sp-31 its operating temperature. Switched off: The indicator lamp in 7 Set the control conditions for the heat- the ° button is lit. 7 Select the HEATER submenu by pressing the æ or ç button. er booster system by pressing the Switched on: The indicator lamp in æ or ç button. You can choose j k the ° button is not lit. 7 Press the or button repeat- between: edly until the HEATER BOOSTER message The heater booster switches on au- appears in the display. A AUTOMATIC: The heater booster tomatically if the outside tempera- switches on automatically if the ture is below 8 °C and the coolant The selection marker is on the current outside temperature is below 8 °C temperature is less than 70 °C. It setting. and the coolant temperature is less switches off again automatically at than 70 °C. It switches off again au- higher temperatures. tomatically at higher temperatures. A OFF: The heater booster is switched off. This reduces diesel consump- tion.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 153 Controls in detail Operating system

Convenience submenu Activating the easy-entry feature G You will find the CONVENIENCE submenu in You can activate or deactivate the easy- Risk of injury the SETTINGS... menu. entry feature using the EASY-ENTRY FEA- If the easy-entry feature is active, the steering TURE ACTIVATEfunction. Depending on the You can make the following settings in the wheel and driver's seat will move in accord- setting, the steering wheel and driver's CONVENIENCE submenu: ance with the setting. Occupants could be- seat will move back when you: come trapped as a result. When the easy- Function Page A remove the key from the ignition lock entry feature is activated, make sure that no- body can become trapped when this feature is Activate the easy-entry feature 154 A open the driver's door and the key is in triggered. Set key dependence 156 position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock ( page 35) Do not leave children unsupervised in the Set the parking position for the 156 R vehicle, even if they are secured in a child exterior mirrors restraint system. Children could open the driver's door from the inside, and thereby un- intentionally activate the easy-entry feature and become trapped.

154 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

After you enter the vehicle, the steering 7 Select the CONVENIENCE submenu by Activate the easy-entry feature by pressing wheel and seat move to the stored position pressing the æ or ç button. the æ or ç button. if the following conditions are met: 7 Press the j or k button repeat- You can determine the following settings A The driver's door is closed. edly until the EASY-ENTRY FEATURE for the easy-entry feature: ACTIVATE message appears in the dis- A The key is in the ignition lock. A OFF: The easy-entry feature is deac- play. tivated. A You press the appropriate memory The selection marker is on the current button on the memory switch A STEERING COLUMN: The easy-entry setting. (R page 102). feature is activated. i P54.30-6221-31 To interrupt the adjustment procedure, Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6221en-31 perform one of the following actions: Französisch: P54.30-7442-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6221it-31 A Move the steering column adjust- Spanisch: P54.30-6221sp-31 ment lever (R page 29)

A Press memory button M on the memory switch (R page 102)

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 155 Controls in detail Operating system

Setting key dependence The exterior mirror swings back to its orig- P54.30-6222-31 inal position: You can use the SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6222en-31 function to determine whether the follow- Französisch: P54.30-7441-31 A after you have disengaged reverse gear ing settings should be stored as key-de- Italienisch: P54.30-7452-31 (with a delay of approximately ten sec- pendent settings: Spanisch: P54.30-6222sp-31 onds) A Seat A when you reach a speed greater than 7 Switch key dependence ON or OFF by 10 km/h, regardless of the gear en- A Steering wheel æ ç pressing the or button. gaged A Mirrors Setting the parking position for the A if you press the button for the driver's 7 Select the CONVENIENCE submenu by side exterior mirror immediately æ ç exterior mirrors pressing the or button. (R page 103) j k Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING 7 Press the or button repeat- function to determine whether the exterior 7 Select the CONVENIENCE submenu by SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT æ ç edly until the mirror on the front-passenger side swings pressing the or button. message appears in the display. down (R page 103) when you are parking 7 Press the j or k button repeat- The selection marker is on the current the vehicle (selector lever position R). edly until the MIRROR SETTING WHEN setting. PARKING message appears in the dis- play. The selection marker is on the current setting.

156 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

Consumption statistics after start P54.30-6223-31 Trip computer menu Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-7437-31 You can call up or reset the statistical in- 7 Press the ÿ or è button repeat- Französisch: P54.30-7440-31 formation for your vehicle in the trip com- edly until the AFTER START message ap- Italienisch: P54.30-6223it-31 puter menu. The following submenus are pears in the display. Spanisch: P54.30-6223sp-31 available: P54.30-6224-31 7 Switch the MIRROR SETTING WHEN Function Page Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6224en-31 PARKING function ON or OFF using the Consumption statistics after 157 Französisch: P54.30-6224fr-31 æ ç or button. start Italienisch: P54.30-6224it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6224sp-31 Consumption statistics since 158 the last reset 1 Time elapsed since the start Call up the range 159 2 Average fuel consumption after start 3 Average speed after start i 4 Kilometres covered after start The consumption statistics AFTER START are always displayed first when you call up the trip computer.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 157 Controls in detail Operating system

i 7 Press and hold the reset button located on the left-hand side of the instrument P54.30-6225-31 All values relating to the last start are Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6225en-31 cluster (R page 19) until the values are reset if you stop the vehicle for longer Französisch: P54.30-6225fr-31 reset to 0. than four hours (key in position 0 or re- Italienisch: P54.30-6225it-31 moved from the ignition lock). Consumption statistics since the last Spanisch: P54.30-6225sp-31 These values are not reset if you turn reset the key back to position 1 or 2 in the 1 Time elapsed since the last reset Press the ÿ or è button repeat- ignition lock within this time. 7 2 Average fuel consumption since the edly until the AFTER START message ap- last reset pears in the display. Resetting the consumption statistics 3 Average speed since the last reset 7 Press the j or k button repeat- 4 Kilometres covered since the last reset 7 Press the ÿ or è button repeat- edly until the AFTER RESET message ap- edly until you see the first function in Press and hold the reset button located on pears in the display. the Trip computer menu. the left-hand side of the instrument cluster (R page 19) until the consumption statis- j k 7 Press the or button repeat- tics are reset to 0. edly until the message you wish to re- set appears in the display.

158 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

Calling up the range TEL* menu Different messages are shown in the dis- play depending on the status of your tele- 7 Press the ÿ or è button repeat- You can operate the permanently installed phone: edly until the AFTER START message ap- telephone in your vehicle or the mobile pears in the display. phone using the functions in the TEL menu A If the telephone is off, the TEL OFF or TEL AUS message is displayed 7 Press the j or k button repeat- if it is connected to the Mercedes-Benz edly until the RANGE: message appears hands-free system and switched on. A If you have still not entered the PIN, the in the display. 7 Switch on the telephone and the TEL ENTER PIN message is displayed COMAND* or audio system. 7 Enter the PIN in the telephone. P54.30-6226-31 For notes on how to do this, see the Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6226en-31 The telephone searches for a net- separate Operating Instructions. Französisch: P54.30-6226fr-31 work. The display is empty during Italienisch: P54.30-6226it-31 7 Press the ÿ or è button repeat- this time. Spanisch: P54.30-6226sp-31 edly until the TEL menu appears in the A As soon as the telephone has found a display. network, the name of the network pro- The approximate range is shown in the dis- vider will be shown in the display play and is derived from the current fuel level and driving style. i The range is no longer displayed when the reserve fuel is reached.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 159 Controls in detail Operating system

You can operate the telephone using the Accepting a call P54.30-6228-31 operating system once this display of oper- You can accept a call at any time if your Für alle Sprachen das selbe Bild. ational readiness is shown. telephone is ready to receive. The follow- i ing message appears in the display when you receive a call: If the display of operational readiness disappears, the vehicle is outside the P54.30-6229-31 Display on vehicles with the audio system range of transmission and reception. Für alle Sprachen das selbe Bild. 1 Network provider 2 Reception quality The following functions are available:

P54.30-6227-31 Function Page Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6227en-31 Accept a call 160 Display on vehicles with the audio system Französisch: P54.30-6227fr-31 Hang up 161 Italienisch: P54.30-6227it-31 P54.30-6230-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6227sp-31 Dial a number in the phone 161 book Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6230en-31 Französisch: P54.30-6230fr-31 Display on vehicles with the COMAND* sys Redial 163 Italienisch: P54.30-6230it-31 tem Spanisch: P54.30-6230sp-31 1 Network provider 2 Reception quality Display on vehicles with the COMAND* sys tem

160 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

7 Press the í button. Dialling a number in the phone book The operating system loads the phone book stored on the SIM card or in the You have accepted the call. The call du- You can look for and dial a number in the telephone. This can take up to 30 sec- ration is shown in the display. phone book at any time if your telephone is onds. The following messages appear ready to receive. i in the display, depending on the equip- Press the ì button if you do not i ment installed on your vehicle: wish to accept the call. The caller will You can only enter new numbers direct- A Audio system: PROCESSING then hear the engaged tone. ly into the phone book on the tele- COMAND* system: PLEASE WAIT! phone. For notes on how to do this, see A Hanging up the separate Operating Instructions. When the PROCESSING or PLEASE WAIT! message disappears, the phone book is 7 Press the ì button. 7 Press the ÿ or è button repeat- stored in the operating system. RR You have hung up. The telephone's opera- edly until the TEL menu appears with tional readiness is displayed again (name the operational readiness symbol in the of the network provider). display.

7 Press the j or k button.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 161 Controls in detail Operating system

7 Press the j or k button repeat- 7 Press the í button. edly until the name you are searching P54.30-6232-31 The operating system dials the phone for appears in the display. Hier auch bei COMAND, für alle number displayed. Sprachen das selbe Bild. The stored names are then displayed in When a connection is established, the ascending or descending alphabetical name of the person you are calling and the order. call duration appear in the display. Example of the display on vehicles with the i P54.30-6231-31 COMAND* system installed The operating system scrolls through Hier auch bei COMAND, für alle the names rapidly if you press and hold If no connection is established, the operat- Sprachen das selbe Bild. the j or k button for more than ing system stores the dialled number in the one second. Fast mode stops when you redial memory. release the button. If you no longer wish to make a call, you Example of the display on vehicles with the can press the ì button at any time. COMAND* system installed The search will then be interrupted and 1 Name from the phone book the name of the network provider will 2 Memory preset number be shown in the display again.

162 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Operating system

Redialling i Memory preset number The operating system stores the most re- Press the ì button if you do not The most recently dialled numbers are al- cently dialled phone numbers. This means wish to make a call. ways stored. The number of stored num- that you do not have to search through the bers depends on which telephone you use. í entire phone book. 7 Press the button. Most recently dialled number: 7 Press the ÿ or è button repeat- The operating system dials the phone A on vehicles with the audio system: L1 edly until the TEL menu appears with number displayed. the operational readiness symbol in the A on vehicles with the COMAND* sys- When a connection is established, the call display. tem: LO duration appears in the display along with: 7 Press the í button. Previously dialled numbers: A the name, if this is stored in the phone The last number dialled is shown in the book A on vehicles with the audio system: L2 display in the redial memory. to Ln A the phone number dialled 7 Press the j or k button repeat- A on vehicles with the COMAND* sys- edly until the number you are searching tem: L1 to Ln for is shown in the display.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 163 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

The automatic transmission automatically Risk of accident G Risk of accident G adapts to your individual driving style by continuously adjusting its shift points. The movement of the pedals must not be re- Do not change down for additional engine These shift point adjustments take into stricted. Always keep the driver's footwell braking on a slippery road surface. The drive account the current operating and driving free from objects. Make sure that floormats wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle conditions. If the operating or driving con- or carpets do not obstruct the pedals. could skid. ditions change, the automatic transmis- Always apply the parking brake when park- sion reacts by adjusting the gearshift ing. pattern. Risk of fire G Never leave children unsupervised in the ve- i hicle. They could move the selector lever Make sure that the exhaust system does not On vehicles with a petrol engine, the and the vehicle could roll away on uphill or come into contact with easily ignitable ma- automatic transmission shifts after a downhill gradients. terial, such as dry grass or petrol. The flam- cold start at higher engine speeds. Do not change down for additional engine mable material may otherwise ignite and set This helps the catalytic converter to braking on a slippery road surface. The drive fire to parts of the vehicle. reach its operating temperature more wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle quickly. could skid. You will find information about driving with an automatic transmission in the "Getting started" section (R page 36).

164 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Automatic transmission

A the HIGH or LOW transfer case posi- In selector lever position D, you can influ- tion ence shifts made by the automatic trans- mission by: A the position of the accelerator pedal A restricting the shift range A the road speed The selector lever position/shift range A shifting manually and the transfer case position are shown in P27.00-2107-31 the multi-function display.

P54.30-6034-31

The automatic transmission shifts auto- 1 Transfer case display matically through the individual gears. This 2 Selector lever position/shift range depends on:

A the selector lever position D with the shift ranges 4, 3, 2 and 1

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 165 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Selector lever positions ë Neutral ê Drive ì Parking lock No power is transferred from The automatic transmission the engine to the drive wheels. changes gear automatically. All Park position with selector lever The vehicle is free to move when five forward gears are shifted lock. Engage the parking lock the brakes are released, to be automatically. Use this selector only when the vehicle is station- pushed or towed for example. lever position for all normal driv- ary. It is then additionally pro- ing situations. tected when the engine is Do not move the selector lever switched off. to N while the vehicle is in mo- tion. You could otherwise dam- One-touch gearshifting You can only remove the key age the automatic transmission. When the automatic transmission is in se- from selector lever position P. When the key is removed, the Only shift briefly to N if: lector lever position D, you can also change gear yourself. selector lever is locked in posi- A ESP has been deactivated or tion P. has malfunctioned and the Downshifting: í Reverse gear vehicle threatens to skid, e.g. on slippery roads in win- 7 Press the selector lever briefly to the Only move the selector lever to ter left towards DÐ. position R when the vehicle is stationary. A you wish to shift the transfer The automatic transmission shifts case down one gear, depending on the gear currently engaged. Doing this also re- stricts the shift range.

166 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Upshifting Selecting the ideal shift range G Risk of accident 7 Press the selector lever briefly to the 7 Press and hold the selector lever to- right towards D+. wards DÐ. Do not shift down until the road speed is in the permissible range for the gear required The automatic transmission shifts up The automatic transmission changes to (R page 396). The drive wheels could other- one gear, depending on the gear cur- the shift range from which you can ac- wise lock. rently engaged. Doing this also extends celerate or slow down the vehicle most the shift range. effectively. To do this, the automatic Do not change down for additional engine transmission shifts down one or sever- braking on a slippery road surface. The drive Derestricting the shift range al gears automatically. wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid. 7 Press the selector lever in the direction Shift ranges of D+ and hold it until D is displayed in When the selector lever is in position , the multi-function display again. D i you can restrict or derestrict the shift The automatic transmission does not The automatic transmission shifts back range for the automatic transmission. change down if you move the selector to D from the current shift range. 7 Press the selector lever briefly to the lever to DÐ when travelling too quickly. right towards D+ or to the left towards The engine could otherwise overrev. DÐ. The shift range set is shown in the mul- ti-function display.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 167 Controls in detail Automatic transmission

The shift range changes to the currently i ç The automatic transmission engaged gear if you press and hold the se- The transmission shifts up, even if the shifts as far as second gear lector lever to the right or left. shift range has been restricted, if the only. For braking on steep maximum engine speed for the shift downhill gradients and for é The automatic transmission range is reached and you continue to driving: shifts as far as fourth gear on- accelerate. The engine could otherwise ly. A on steep mountain roads overrev. è The automatic transmission A in mountainous terrain shifts as far as third gear only. ! A in arduous driving condi- If the transfer case is in the LOW off- The braking effect of the en- tions gine can be utilised in this po- road position, the automatic transmis- æ The automatic transmission sition. sion will not shift up automatically only works in first gear. when it reaches the engine speed limit For braking on extremely for that range. There is a danger of en- steep downhill gradients and gine damage. long downhill mountain roads. It must be ensured that the permissible engine speed is not exceeded.

168 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Automatic transmission

Driving tips 7 Release the accelerator pedal as soon Trailer towing as the desired speed has been 7 Run the engine at a moderate engine reached. Accelerator pedal position speed on uphill gradients. The automatic transmission shifts back Your style of driving influences how the 7 Depending upon the uphill or downhill up again, depending on the engine automatic transmission shifts gear: gradient, shift down to shift range 3 or speed. A Little throttle: 2 even when cruise control is activat- early upshifts ed. Stopping the vehicle 7 Shift the transfer case to the LOW off- A More throttle: If you are only stopping briefly: later upshifts road gear (R page 170) for extreme up- 7 Leave the selector lever in the driving hill or downhill gradients. Kickdown position. Working on the vehicle Use kickdown for maximum acceleration. 7 Use the brake to make sure that the ve- hicle does not roll away. 7 Depress the accelerator pedal beyond Risk of accident G the pressure point. Manoeuvring Apply the parking brake when carrying out The automatic transmission shifts If manoeuvring within a confined space: down one gear, depending on the en- any work on the vehicle with the engine run- gine speed. 7 Control the speed by braking carefully. ning and move the selector lever to position . The vehicle could otherwise roll away. 7 Accelerate only slightly and avoid jerk- P ing.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 169 Controls in detail Transfer case

You will find information about off-road Also use the off-road position Transfer case switch driving in the "Operation" section on steep uphill and downhill The switch is located in the lower section (R page 269). gradients, especially when of the centre console. i towing a trailer. The vehicle has permanent four-wheel- The transfer case reduces the drive. The front and rear axles are al- drive power of the engine. ways driven. The vehicle drives at approxi- mately half the speed com- P54.25-2814-31 Shift ranges pared to when the HIGH road position is selected. The drive H HIGH performance is thereby in- Road position for all normal creased accordingly. driving situations. N Neutral Transfer case switch L LOW Neutral position Off-road position for off-road No power is transferred to the driving. wheels.

170 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Transfer case

The transfer case display in the multi-func- From HIGH to LOW From LOW to HIGH tion display indicates the shift status of the transfer case. ! ! You may only shift if: You may only shift if:

A the engine is running A the engine is running

P54.30-6034-31 A the vehicle is rolling A the vehicle is rolling A the automatic transmission is in se- A the automatic transmission is in lector lever position N selector lever position N 1 Transfer case display A you are driving no faster than A you are driving no faster than 2 Selector lever position (automatic 40 km/h 70 km/h transmission) 7 Press LOW on the upper section of the 7 Press HIGH on the lower section of the transfer case switch. transfer case switch. Risk of accident G L is shown in transfer case display 1 H is shown in transfer case display 1 Always apply the parking brake when park- if the shift procedure is completed. if the shift procedure is completed. ing. Make sure that the transfer case is not in neutral position N when parking the vehi- cle. The vehicle could otherwise be set in motion.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 171 Controls in detail Transfer case

If the shift procedure was not completed, Shifting to neutral the following messages may appear in the Risk of accident G 7 Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition multi-function display: lock (R page 35). Make sure that the transfer case is not in A TC SHIFT CONDITIONS NOT FULFILLED 7 Apply the parking brake (R page 36). neutral position N when parking the vehicle. You have not complied with one or The vehicle could otherwise be set in mo- 7 Depress the brake pedal. more shift conditions. tion. A TC IN NEUTRAL 7 Move the selector lever to N (R page 166). The transfer case has aborted the shift i 7 Press LOW on the transfer case switch procedure and is in neutral position. A warning sounds and the TC IN for approximately five seconds. N is shown in transfer case display 1. NEUTRAL message appears in the multi- A TC SHIFT ABORTED N is shown in transfer case display 1 function display if you open a door if the shift procedure is completed. when the transfer case is in the neutral The transfer case has not carried out position and the key is in the ignition the shift procedure. lock. 7 Carry out the shift procedure again.

172 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Differential locks :Differential locks You will find information about off-road ! driving in the "Operation" section G Only accelerate moderately when pull- Risk of accident ( page 269). R ing away with the differential locks en- Do not drive on firm road surfaces with the The differential locks improve the traction gaged. differential locks engaged. Steering capabil- of the vehicle. Engage the differential To prevent damage to the transfer ity is severely restricted when the front axle locks: case, never operate the vehicle on a differential lock is engaged, thus increasing A on rough terrain roller dynamometer (single axle roller the risk of an accident. dynamometer) unless: A to deactivate ABS and ESP on off-road ESP, BAS and ABS are automatically deacti- terrain A the non-driven axle is jacked up vated when you select a differential lock.

A when fording or

A when driving on snowy, icy or muddy A the relevant propeller shaft is dis- surfaces connected ! and Do not engage the front-axle differen- A the transfer case differential lock is tial lock on tight bends. The steering engaged capability of the vehicle is otherwise severely restricted.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 173 Controls in detail Differential locks

Engaging the differential locks The switches are located on the upper sec- Engaging the transfer case differential tion of the centre console. lock A total of three differential locks can be en- gaged: 7 Press the lower section of switch 1.

A The transfer case differential lock The yellow engagement indicator lamp which controls compensation between beneath switch 1 lights up. the axles v P54.25-2818-31 The warning lamp lights up in the A The rear-axle differential lock which instrument cluster. controls compensation between the The red function indicator lamp above rear wheels switch 1 only lights up when the dif- A The front-axle differential lock which ferential lock is engaged. controls compensation between the 1 Transfer case differential lock The ABS NOT AVAILABLE DISABLING front wheels 2 Rear-axle differential lock ACTIVE message appears in the multi- i 3 Front-axle differential lock function display. 4 Engagement indicator lamps (yellow) v - You can only engage the differential The and warning lamps 5 Function indicator lamps (red) locks in the sequence 1, 2, 3. then light up in the instrument cluster. ! Only engage the differential locks if:

A you are driving more or less at walk- ing speed

A the drive wheels are not spinning

174 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Differential locks

The DIFFERENTIAL LOCKmessage ap- Engaging the front-axle differential lock ESP, BAS and ABS are activated automati- pears in the multi-function display. cally after approximately three seconds of 7 Press the lower section of switch 3. normal driving. The transfer case differential lock is en- The yellow engagement indicator lamp gaged. The DIFFERENTIAL LOCK in the multi-func- lights up first, then the red function in- v - ESP, BAS and ABS are deactivated. dicator lamp. tion display and the and warn- ing lamps in the instrument cluster go out. You may now switch to front-axle differen- The front-axle differential lock is en- tial lock 3 and/or rear-axle differential gaged. i lock 2, depending on driving require- If red indicator lamps 5 do not go out ments. Disengaging the differential locks when the differential locks are disen- You can disengage the differential locks in gaged: Engaging the rear-axle differential lock the reverse sequence (3, 2, 1). 7 Observe the road and traffic condi- 7 Press the lower section of switch 2. To disengage both differential locks simul- tions. taneously: The yellow engagement indicator lamp 7 Gently turn the steering wheel to lights up first, then the red function in- 7 Press the lower section of switch 1. move the vehicle from side to side. dicator lamp. The yellow engagement indicator The red function indicator lamps The rear-axle differential lock is en- lamps go out. The red function indica- will then go out. gaged. tor lamps go out when the differential locks are disengaged.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 175 Controls in detail Good visibility

You will find information about the wind- Headlamp cleaning system Mirrors screen wipers (R page 41) and about ad- The switch is located on the left-hand side justing the mirrors (R page 30) in the Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors "Getting started" section. on the cockpit. The rear-view mirror and exterior mirrors You will find information about how to deal automatically enter anti-dazzle mode if at with a misted-up windscreen (R page 189) the same time: and about defrosting (R page 188) in the the ignition is switched on "Automatic air conditioning" section. A P54.25-2852-31 A headlamp light entering from outside comes into contact with the sensor in the mirror The mirrors do not enter anti-dazzle mode if:

1 To clean the headlamps A reverse gear is engaged

7 Make sure that the ignition is switched A the interior lighting is switched on on.

7 Press switch 1 briefly. The headlamps are cleaned by a high- pressure water jet.

176 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Good visibility

G G ! Risk of accident Risk of injury If electrolyte comes into contact with the vehicle's paintwork, wash it off im- The mirrors do not dim automatically if light Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto- mediately using clean water. It could from other vehicles' headlamps cannot strike matic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. otherwise damage the paintwork. the sensor in the rear-view mirror, e.g. when Electrolyte is an aggressive substance and The electrolyte can only be washed off towing a trailer or when the luggage compart- must not be allowed to come into contact with before it dries. ment is laden up to the roof. the skin, eyes or respiratory organs. You could be dazzled by incident light. You If electrolyte comes into contact with the eyes Heated exterior mirrors may no longer be able to observe the traffic or skin, immediately rinse thoroughly with conditions and could cause an accident. In clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. The exterior mirrors are heated automati- this case, you should dim the rear-view mirror cally when the outside temperature is low. manually.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 177 Controls in detail Good visibility

Activating the exterior mirror parking 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched The exterior mirror swings back to its orig- position (front-passenger side) on. inal position:

To make it easier for you to park, the exte- 7 Make sure that the MIRROR SETTING A approximately 10 seconds after re- rior mirror on the front-passenger side WHEN PARKING function is activated in the verse gear is disengaged swings into the parking position as soon as CONVENIENCE submenu (R page 156). A as soon as you drive faster than you engage reverse gear. 7 Select reverse gear (selector lever po- 10 km/h You can only activate the parking position sition R). A if you press the selector button if you have already stored it using the or (R page 103) for the driver's side exte- memory function ( R page 102). rior mirror 7 Press the selector button (R page 103) for the front-passenger side exterior mirror. The mirror on the front-passenger side folds down into the stored position.

178 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Good visibility

Windscreen wipers 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched Windscreen heating on. You will find information about the wind- screen wipers in the "Getting started" sec- 7 Move the combination switch to Risk of accident G tion (R page 41). setting I (R page 41). This will result in a wiper sweep. There- Clear all ice or snow from the windscreen Intermittent wipe after, the wipe intervals are controlled and rear window before commencing a jour- ney. Impaired vision could otherwise endan- i in accordance with how wet the wind- screen is. ger yourself and others. If the vehicle is stationary and a front door is open, the windscreen wipers will Rear window wiper ! not operate on intermittent wipe, set- The window heating consumes a great ting I (R page 41). This protects people i deal of electricity. You should therefore entering and leaving the vehicle from The rear wiper comes on automatically being splashed with water. switch off the heating as soon as the if the windscreen wipers are switched windows are clear again. on and you engage reverse gear. Rain sensor The rain sensor controls the windscreen wipers automatically according to how wet the windscreen is.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 179 Controls in detail Good visibility

Windscreen heating* Rear window heating Switching on

The windscreen heating is combined with The rear window heating switches off auto- 7 Press the F button on the Thermat- the Thermatic defrosting function matically after approximately 6 to 7 min- ic control panel (R page 184). ( utes. This depends on the outside R page 188). The indicator lamp in the button lights temperature and the driving conditions. The heating time for the windscreen heat- up. The rear window heating is on. ing is variable and is controlled in accord- The rear window heating only operates ance with the outside temperature and the when the engine is running. Switching off temperature of the engine. The rear window heating switches off auto- 7 Press the F button. matically if too many consumers are The indicator lamp in the button goes switched on or the battery is not sufficient- off. The rear window heating is off. ly charged. The indicator lamp in the but- ton flashes. The rear window heating will automatically switch back on as soon as there is suffi- cient voltage again.

7 Make sure that the ignition is switched on.

180 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Good visibility

Sun visors Glare from the front The sun visors protect you from glare dur- 7 Fold sun visors 1 down when the light ing the journey. is dazzling.

Glare from the side P68.60-2044-31 Risk of accident G 7 Fold down the sun visor. Keep the mirrors in the sun visors covered 7 Pull the sun visor out of retainer 2. while you are driving. Dazzling light may oth- erwise endanger yourself and others. 7 Swing the sun visor to the side. 3 Mirror cover Mirror in the sun visor 4 Lighting

i 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched Mirror light 4 only works if the sun vi- on. sor is engaged in retainer 2. 7 Fold down the sun visor. P68.60-2043-31 7 Fold mirror cover 3 upwards. Mirror lighting 4 comes on.

1 Sun visor 2 Retainer

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 181 Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

P83.30-3663-31

182 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

1 Demister vents for the windscreen i Risk of injury G 2 Swivelling centre air vents For practically draught-free ventilation, position the centre and side air vent When Thermatic is in operation, very hot or 3 Thumbwheel for centre air vents sliders centrally. very cold air may flow from the air vents. 4 Swivelling side air vents This could cause burns or frostbite to bare 5 Demister vents for side windows skin in the immediate vicinity of the air 6 Thumbwheel for side air vents vents. Keep bare skin away from these air outlets. If necessary, use the air-distribution 7 Footwell air vents control to direct the airflow away from the 8 Control panel footwell to a different area of the vehicle in- terior.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 183 Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

Control panel 1 Sets the blower, switches Thermatic Rear air vents on/off 2 Sets the temperature for the left-hand side of the vehicle 3 Sets the temperature for the right- P83.30-3633-31 hand side of the vehicle P83.00-2089-31 4 Adjusts the air distribution manually 5 Rear window heating 6 Activates/deactivates cooling, resid- ual heat/auxiliary ventilation Thermatic control panel 7 Automatic air distribution and blower 1 Thumbwheel for rear-compartment control centre air vents 8 Air-recirculation mode 2 Swivelling rear-compartment centre air vents 9 Demist button

184 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

Thermatic is only operational while the en- In automatic mode, you will seldom need Thermatic consumes additional fuel, there- gine is running. It can only function proper- to change the temperature, airflow or air by damaging the environment and creating ly when all the windows and the sliding distribution. additional costs. To reduce your consump- sunroof* are closed. tion: The combination filter installed filters out Thermatic can be switched off completely all pollen as well as particles of dust to a 7 Switch off cooling in cold weather con- as required (R page 186). great extent. ditions (R page 186). You can allow the air conditioning to adjust i Thermatic will then run in economy automatically ( page 187) or you can mode. R The replacement interval for the filter control it manually (R page 187). depends on environmental influences, 7 Ventilate the vehicle briefly in warm In automatic mode, Thermatic cools or such as high levels of air pollution. It weather conditions, e.g. using the sum- heats the vehicle interior depending on: may be shorter than the interval speci- mer opening feature (R page 85). fied in the Service Booklet. A blocked A the temperature selected This enables the desired temperature filter reduces the air supply to the vehi- inside the vehicle to be reached more A the outside temperature cle interior. quickly. A sunlight 7 Switch off Thermatic completely if you are driving with the windows or sliding sunroof* open for a long time. This reduces the unnecessary con- sumption of energy for air conditioning.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 185 Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

Observe the following notes to ensure that i Switching Thermatic on and off Thermatic functions correctly: Condensation may form on the under- A Keep the air inlet between the bonnet side of the vehicle in cooling mode. Switching off and the windscreen free of deposits, 7 Turn airflow control 1 (R page 184) to e.g. ice or snow, to ensure the flow of 0. fresh air to the vehicle interior. Environmental note H i A Never cover the vents or air inlet and outlet grilles in the vehicle interior. The air conditioning uses the refrigerant Select this setting when you are driving R 134 A. This refrigerant does not damage with the windows or the sliding sun- the earth's ozone layer. roof* open, for example. Air supply and Risk of accident G air circulation are switched off if Ther- matic is switched off. Only select this Follow the settings for heating and cooling setting for a brief period. recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise mist up. You may no longer be able to observe the traffic condi- tions and could cause an accident.

186 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

Switching on Setting the temperature Adjusting air distribution manually 7 Turn airflow control 1 (R page 184) to You can set the temperature separately for 7 You can set the air distribution for 1 or higher. each side of the vehicle using controllers the entire vehicle automatically 2 and 3 (R page 184). (R page 187) or manually using con- Basic settings 4 Change the temperature in small incre- troller (R page 184). Automatic mode ments. We recommend a starting temper- Symbol Meaning U ature of 22 °C. 7 Press the button. Z Directs air to the wind- The indicator lamp in the button lights Increasing the temperature screen vents and to the de- up. Airflow and air distribution will be mister vents for the side controlled automatically. 7 Turn the temperature controller clock- windows wise. X Directs air to the wind- Thermatic controls the set tempera- screen vents, the demister ture. vents for the side windows and the front and rear foot- Reducing the temperature wells 7 Turn the temperature controller anti- Y Directs air to the front and clockwise. rear footwells Thermatic controls the set tempera- a Directs air to the centre, ture. side and cockpit air vents RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 187 Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

U 7 Press the button. Adjusting the airflow manually Defrosting The indicator lamp in the U button You can adjust the airflow automatically Use the following settings to defrost the goes out. Automatic air distribution is (R page 187) or manually using controller windscreen, e.g. when it is covered in ice. switched off. Air distribution is control- 1 (R page 184). There are six adjustment 7 Press the P button. led according to the current position of levels. the controller. The indicator lamp in the button lights Press the U button. 7 up. 7 Turn the air-distribution controller to The indicator lamp in the U button the required symbol. Thermatic automatically switches to goes out. Automatic airflow control is the following functions: Air distribution is controlled according switched off. The airflow is controlled to the current position of the controller. according to the current level set. A Maximum blower and heat output

7 Turn the airflow controller to the re- A Air to the windscreen and the front quired position. side windows The airflow is controlled according to A Windscreen heating* is switched the level selected. on A Rear ventilation off

188 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

i Air-recirculation mode Switching on Only use this setting until the wind- If there are unpleasant odours in the air 7 Press the Ð button. screen is clear again. outside, it is possible to switch off the sup- The indicator lamp in the button lights ply of fresh air temporarily. Fresh air is up. Misted-up windows then no longer taken in, and the air in the vehicle is recirculated. 7 Switch on the windscreen wipers i (R page 179). The system switches to air-recircula- Risk of accident G tion mode automatically at high outside 7 Close the centre air vents in the cock- temperatures. After approximately pit (R page 182). When the outside temperature is lower than 30 minutes, a certain amount of out- 7 Make sure that the automatic transmis- 5 °C, only switch to air-recirculation mode for side air is taken in. sion is switched on (R page 187). a brief period. The windows could otherwise The indicator lamp in the U button mist up, thus impairing visibility and endan- is lit. gering yourself and others. You may no longer be able to observe the traffic conditions and could cause an accident.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 189 Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

Switching off Residual heat Switching on 7 Press the Ð button. If you have stopped the engine, you can 7 Switch off the ignition. The indicator lamp in the button goes heat the stationary vehicle for up to 7 Press the ° button. out. 30 minutes using residual heat from the engine. The indicator lamp in the button lights i up. Air-recirculation mode is deactivated i Switching off automatically: The heating period is dependent on: 7 Press the ° button. A after about 30 minutes if the out- A the temperature selected on the side temperature is above approxi- control panel (R page 184) The indicator lamp in the button goes mately 5 °C out. A the coolant temperature A after about five minutes if the out- The blower runs at a lower speed re- i side temperature is below approxi- gardless of the current setting. mately 5 °C The residual heat function is deactivat- ed automatically: A after five minutes if ° economy mode is selected A when you switch on the ignition A after about 30 minutes

A if the battery voltage is too low

A if the coolant temperature is too low

190 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

Economy mode Activating/deactivating the cooling Environmental note H The air is not cooled or dehumidified in function economy mode. The cooling function is operational when If the cooling function is deactivated, the au- the engine is running and cools according tomatic air conditioning requires less ener- Switching on to the interior temperature selected. The gy. This will lower your fuel consumption cooling function also dehumidifies the air 7 Press the ° button. and will cause less damage to the environ- inside the vehicle and thus prevents the ment. The indicator lamp in the button lights windows from misting up. up. The heater booster system* Deactivating (R page 196) is switched off. G Risk of accident You can deactivate the cooling function. Switching off The air in the vehicle is then not cooled or If you deactivate the cooling function, the dehumidified. 7 Press the ° button again. vehicle will not be cooled in warm weather The indicator lamp in the button goes conditions. The windows could mist up more 7 Press the ° button. off. The system returns to the previous quickly. You may no longer be able to ob- The indicator lamp in the ° button setting. serve the traffic conditions and could cause is lit. The cooling function is deactivat- an accident. ed.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 191 Controls in detail Thermatic (automatic air conditioning)

Activating The rear vents are located on the centre i console in the rear. The windows could mist up when the air is For draught-free ventilation, move the damp. You can dehumidify the air using the sliders for the rear air vents upwards as cooling function. far as possible. 7 Press the ° button. Setting the airflow The indicator lamp in the ° button P83.00-2089-31 goes out. The cooling function is acti- 7 Turn thumbwheel 1 up or down. vated. This increases or reduces the airflow. Rear-compartment air conditioning Rear-compartment air conditioning is con- trolled via the control panel for the auto- 1 Thumbwheel for rear centre air vents matic air conditioning (R page 184). 2 Swivelling rear centre air vents The airflow and air direction can be set in- dividually on the rear vents. Setting the air distribution 7 Press the slider for the left or right- i hand centre air vents to the left, right, The temperature of the air flowing from up or down. the rear centre air vents and the centre air vents in the cockpit is the same. The airflow is directed in the corre- sponding direction.

192 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Auxiliary heating/ventilation* :Auxiliary heating/ventilation* The auxiliary heating/ventilation heats or Before switching on ventilates the vehicle interior according to Risk of fire and poisoning G the settings you have selected on the Ther- 7 You should preferably set the air condi- tioning to U. matic control panel (R page 184). Do not switch on the auxiliary heating: We recommend that you set the left- and You can select up to three switch-on times A at the filling station right-hand temperatures to 22 °C. using the operating system (R page 151). A in confined spaces with no ventilation, The auxiliary heating/ventilation adjusts You can switch the auxiliary heating/ e.g. in the garage automatically to the temperature set. ventilation on and off using: You could otherwise endanger yourself and others. A the switch on the centre console i (R page 194) The auxiliary heating/ventilation can The auxiliary heating switches off automat- also be switched on manually. Setting it A the remote control (R page 194) ically after no more than 50 minutes. You to U gives you an optimum temper- can have this time changed. Visit a quali- A the operating system (R page 150) ature. fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- Benz Service Centre, for this purpose. To call up the HEATER submenu in the operating system, switch on the igni- i tion and press the upper section of the The auxiliary heating/ventilation sys- auxiliary heating/ventilation switch for tem ventilates before heating, depend- about three seconds. ing on temperature and weather conditions. This ensures that the tem- perature required is reached more quickly.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 193 Controls in detail Auxiliary heating/ventilation*

Using the remote control Switching on Red Auxiliary heating/ventila- tion active The remote control has a maximum range Using the switch on the centre console of approximately 300 m. Yellow Auxiliary heating/ventila- The switch is located on the lower section tion preset time activated The range may be reduced in the event of: of the centre console. A sources of radio interference When the ignition is switched on A solid objects between the transmitter Press upper section 1 of the switch 7 and the vehicle for approximately two seconds. A the remote control being in an unsuita- Red indicator lamp 2 in the switch ble position in relation to the vehicle P54.25-2866-31 lights up. A transmission from enclosed spaces When the ignition is switched off (key removed) i You can use a second remote control 7 Press upper section 1 of the switch. for your vehicle. Please consult a 1 Auxiliary heating/ventilation on/off Red indicator lamp 2 in the switch Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for 2 Indicator lamp (red) lights up. further information. 3 Indicator lamp (yellow)

194 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Auxiliary heating/ventilation*

i Switching off The indicator lamp on the remote con- trol tells you: Using the switch on the centre console whether a signal is being transmit- 7 Press and hold the switch for longer P83.70-3797-31 aus R230 A ted to the auxiliary heating/ventila- than two seconds. tion: The red indicator lamp in the switch The radio connection is interrupted goes out. The auxiliary heating/venti- if the indicator lamp on the remote lation is off. control:

1 Indicator lamp (red/green) A flashes in green when you Using the remote control 2 OFF switch on the auxiliary heating/ 7 Press the OFF button. Indicator lamp 3 ON ventilation 1 lights up in red briefly. 7 Press the ON button. Indicator lamp 1 A flashes in red when you switch The red indicator lamp in the switch on lights up in green briefly. off the auxiliary heating/ the centre console (R page 194) goes The red indicator lamp in the switch ventilation out. The auxiliary heating/ventilation on the centre console (R page 194) Repeat the process in this case. is off. lights up in red. The auxiliary heating/ Change your location and move ventilation is active. closer to the vehicle if required.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 195 Controls in detail Heater booster system*

Only on vehicles fitted with a diesel engine. Switch Switching off The heater booster system heats up the The switch is located on the lower section 7 Press upper section 1 of the switch. vehicle interior quickly while the engine is of the centre console. Indicator lamp 2 in the switch lights in its warm-up phase. It cuts in as required. up. You can control the heater booster system The heater booster system remains using the operating system. switched off. To save diesel, you can switch off the heat- er booster using: P54.25-2853-31 Priming for automatic cut-in A the operating system (R page 153) 7 Press lower section 3 of the switch. or Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes out. A the switch on the centre console. The heater booster system is primed 1 Heater booster system off and cuts in as required. 2 Indicator lamp 3 Primed for automatic cut-in

196 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Water separator* :Water separator* The water separator indicator lamp is lo- When you switch on the ignition, indicator 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop, cated on the centre console. lamp 1 lights up for one second (function e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, check) and then goes out again. as soon as possible. The water separator must be serviced if: ! A indicator lamp 1 does not go out after If you continue to drive for a long peri- the ignition is switched on od of time with indicator lamp 1 lit, P54.32-2172 -31 this could lead to engine damage. Dam- A indicator lamp 1 lights up while you are driving age resulting from this will not be cov- ered by the vehicle's warranty.

Environmental note H

1 Indicator lamp Dispose of service products in an environ- mentally-responsible manner.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 197 Controls in detail Open-air

Side windows Risk of injury G The side windows can be opened and closed electrically. The switches are locat- Make sure that nobody can become trapped ed on the respective doors. as you close a side window. If danger threat- P54.00-2362-31 Using the switches on the driver's door you ens, release the switch and open the side win- can: dow.

A open and close all side windows Remove the key from the ignition lock and take it with you when leaving the vehicle, even disable the switches for the rear power A if you are only leaving it for a short time. windows* (child-proof locks) Switches on the driver's door Never leave children unsupervised in the vehi- cle. They could be injured. 1 Disabling switch (rear power Disable the switches for the rear power win- windows*) dows if children are travelling in the rear com- 2 Opens/closes front left window partment. 3 Opens/closes front right window 4 Opens/closes rear right* window 5 Opens/closes rear left* window

198 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Open-air

Opening Closing Disabling the switches for the rear power windows* (child-proof locks) 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched on. on.

7 Press the switch as far as the pressure 7 Pull the switch. point. Each window will close all the while you Each window will open all the while you pull on the switch. press on the switch. P54.25-3460-31 i or You can also open and close the side 7 Press the switch beyond the pressure windows using the remote control point and then release it. (R page 85). The side window opens automatically 7 Slide switch 1 to the right so that the until you press or pull the switch again. 7 symbol becomes visible. The switches for the rear power win- dows* are disabled.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 199 Controls in detail Open-air

i i The switch is located on the overhead con- trol panel. You can also open and close the rear When the sliding sunroof is open, reso- side windows using the switches on the nance noises other than the usual air- driver's door. flow noises can be produced in the vehicle interior as a result of minimal Sliding sunroof* pressure variations. Change the position of the sliding sun- P54.25-2869-31 Risk of injury G roof or open a side window slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises. Make sure that nobody can become trapped as you open and close the sunroof. Remove the key from the ignition lock and 1 To open take it with you when leaving the vehicle, 2 To close even if you are only leaving it for a short 3 To raise time. 4 To lower and close

Never leave children unsupervised in the ve- 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched hicle. They could be injured. on.

200 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Open-air

Opening Closing Cabriolet soft top 7 Press the switch to 1 and hold it. 7 Press the switch towards 2 and hold For safety reasons, you can only open and The sliding sunroof continues opening it. close the soft top while the vehicle is sta- for as long as you press the switch in The sliding sunroof will close all the tionary. direction 1. while you press the switch towards 2. or Risk of accident G Raising 7 Press the switch beyond the pressure Press the switch towards 3 and hold it Never lock or unlock the soft top while the point towards 1 and then release it. 7 until the desired position is reached. vehicle is in motion. Make sure that the soft The sliding sunroof opens automatical- top is locked while the vehicle is in motion. ly until you press or pull the switch Lowering and closing You could otherwise endanger yourself and again. others. 7 Press the switch towards 4 and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The soft top must either be completely open or closed when you are driving. When the soft top is fully open or closed, it will not move if pushed or pulled.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 201 Controls in detail Open-air

Opening G A the luggage compartment is only Risk of injury loaded up to the height of the lug- Before opening the soft top, make sure gage compartment cover that the zip fasteners are closed and the Make sure that nobody can become trapped quick-release locks are secure or injured by moving parts such as the soft top A the luggage compartment cover is (R page 90). frame as you open or close the soft top. not forced upwards by the load Release the soft top switch if danger threat- A there is nothing on top of the lug- ens. The soft top mechanism stops immedi- gage compartment cover ately. A no roof rack is fitted

A the soft top is not dirty or wet ! P77.00-2102-31 the outside temperature is above When opening and closing the soft top, A –15 °C make sure that: A the soft top material is not frozen A the tonneau cover* is not attached to the opened soft top A the vehicle is not standing at a steep angle, e.g. on rough terrain 1 Left-hand release lever A there is sufficient clearance to al- 2 Right-hand release lever low the soft top to be swung up- You could otherwise damage the soft- wards and opened completely top material, the soft-top window or the soft-top mechanism.

202 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Open-air

7 Move the selector lever to position P. Closing

7 Apply the parking brake. 7 Move the selector lever to position P.

7 Make sure that the ignition is switched 7 Apply the parking brake. on. P54.25-2870-31 7 Make sure that the ignition is switched 7 Fold the sun visors down. on.

7 Swing release lever 1 to the left until 7 Fold the sun visors down. the warning sounds.

7 Swing release lever 2 to the right. The soft top is unlocked. 3 To open 4 To close The soft-top switch is located on the over- head control panel. 7 Press the soft-top switch in the direc- P77.00-2142-31 tion of arrow 3 until the soft top is ful- ly open and the warning stops.

7 Swing release levers 1 and 2 back to their original position.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 203 Controls in detail Open-air

7 Swing release lever 1 to the left until 7 Using handle 5, pull the soft top Draught stop* the warning sounds. downwards until you hear at least one release lever engage. 7 Swing release lever 2 to the right. Risk of accident G 7 Swing this release lever back to its 7 Press the soft-top switch in the direc- tion of arrow 4 until the soft top original position. Remove the draught stop if visibility is im- paired or when driving in the dark. It may oth- comes to a halt above the windscreen. 7 Swing the second release lever back to its original position. erwise impair your view to the rear. The warning will stop. Make sure that the draught stop is correctly engaged in the mountings. i Do not drive with the draught stop fitted when If the soft top does not close automati- the rear seat is occupied. P77.00-2104-31 cally, you can close it manually Do not place any objects on the installed (R page 354). draught stop. Avoid frequent opening and closing of the soft top. This drains the vehicle's The draught stop is a wind protection de- battery. vice to use when driving with the soft top 5 Handle open. It is located in its own bag behind the rear seat.

204 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Open-air

Installing

P77.00-2106-31 P77.00-2107-31 P77.00-2105-31

7 Hook draught-stop rail 2 onto the ve- 3 Mounting rod hicle's roll-over bar. 4 Retainer 1 Bag with zip fastener 2 Draught stop 7 Place both sides of mounting rod 3 on side-trim retainer 4. 7 Take draught stop 2 out of bag 1. 7 Press both sides of mounting rod 3 into retainer 4 until they engage audi- bly.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 205 Controls in detail Open-air

Removing Tonneau cover* 7 Pull both sides of mounting rod 3 out The tonneau cover protects the open of retainer 4. Cabriolet soft top from the effects of bad 7 Unhook draught stop rail 2 from the weather and from dirt. It is located in its roll-over bar. own bag in the luggage compartment. P77.00-2108-31

! Securing

Put the draught stop away in the bag 7 Remove the rear-seat head restraints provided. By doing this, you can avoid (R page 96). damaging the draught stop and any 1 Backrest load you have in the vehicle. 7 Take the tonneau cover out of the bag in the luggage compartment. 2 Securing hook

7 Unfold the tonneau cover and lay it 7 Attach mounting hooks 2 on both over the open soft top. sides of rear-seat backrest 1.

206 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Open-air

7 Release tenax buttons 3 by pulling Removing them apart. 7 Turn quick-release locks 5 anti-clock- 7 Press tenax buttons 3 onto the corre- wise and pull them out. sponding pins on the vehicle. 7 Loosen knobs 4. P77.00-2109-31 7 Press knobs 4 onto the corresponding 7 Release tenax buttons 3 by pulling. pins on the vehicle. 7 Unhook retaining hooks 2. 7 Press quick release locks 5 into the corresponding bore holes on the tail- 7 Fold up the tonneau cover and stow it gate until they lock in place. in the bag in the luggage compartment. 3 Tenax buttons 4 Knob 5 Quick-release lock

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 207 Controls in detail Driving systems

Your vehicle's driving systems are de- Cruise control scribed on the following pages: Risk of accident G Cruise control maintains the vehicle's A Cruise control and Speedtronic for con- speed for you. Cruise control cannot take account of road trolling the vehicle's speed Use cruise control if road and traffic condi- and traffic conditions. Ultrasound reversing aid* which offers A tions make it appropriate to maintain a Always pay attention to the traffic condi- assistance with parking and manoeu- steady speed for a prolonged period. You tions when cruise control is activated. vring can select the following speeds: Cruise control is only an aid designed to as- The ABS, BAS, 4-ETS and ESP driving safe- A for vehicles with petrol engine sist driving. You are responsible for the vehi- ty systems are described in the "Safety" any speed above 32 km/h cle's speed and for braking in good time. section (R page 71). A for vehicles with diesel engine any speed above 40 km/h.

208 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Driving systems

Cruise control lever G Risk of accident You can operate the following using the cruise control lever: Do not use cruise control: A Cruise control A in road and traffic conditions which do P54.25-2886-31 not allow you to maintain a constant A Variable Speedtronic speed (e.g. in heavy traffic or winding roads). You could otherwise cause an i accident The last speed stored is cleared when A on slippery road surfaces. The drive you switch off the engine. wheels could lose their grip as a result of 1 To store the current speed or a higher braking or accelerating and the vehicle The cruise control lever is the uppermost speed could skid lever on the left of the steering wheel. 2 To store the current speed or a lower A if visibility is poor, e.g. in fog, heavy rain The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise con- speed or snow trol lever displays which system you have 3 To switch off cruise control selected: 4 To resume the last speed stored 5 To switch between cruise control and A Cruise control Speedtronic LIM indicator lamp off 6 LIM indicator lamp A Variable Speedtronic LIM indicator lamp on

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 209 Controls in detail Driving systems

Selecting cruise control Storing the current speed Resuming a stored speed

7 Accelerate/decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Risk of accident G 7 Press the cruise control lever briefly up Only call up the stored speed if you know what or down. that speed is and whether it is suitable for the P54.25-3941-31 7 Release the accelerator pedal. prevailing road and traffic conditions. Sudden The current speed is stored. acceleration or braking could otherwise en- danger yourself or others. i Cruise control may be unable to main- 1 LIM indicator lamp tain the stored speed on uphill or down- 2 To select cruise control hill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. 7 Check whether cruise control is acti- vated. If this is the case, LIM indicator P54.25-3936-31 lamp 1 will not be lit.

7 If this is not the case, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2. LIM indicator lamp 1 in the cruise 1 To resume a stored speed control lever goes out. Cruise control is selected.

210 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Driving systems

7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in 7 Release the cruise control lever. 7 Press the cruise control lever towards the direction of arrow 1. 1 until the required speed has been The new speed is stored. reached. 7 Release the accelerator pedal. i Cruise control is set to the last speed 7 Release the cruise control lever. Cruise control is not deactivated if you stored. The new speed is stored. depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise Setting a higher speed i control adjusts the vehicle's speed to If you decelerate the vehicle using the the last speed stored after you have fin- cruise control lever, the automatic ished overtaking. transmission changes down if the brak- ing effect is too slow. Setting a lower speed P54.25-3937-31

P54.25-3938-31 1 To set a higher speed

7 Push the cruise control lever towards 1 until the required speed has been reached. 1 To set a lower speed

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 211 Controls in detail Driving systems

Fine adjustment in increments of Deactivating cruise control or 1km/h 7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 1. Cruise control is deactivated. The last speed stored remains stored. P54.25-3940-31 or P54.25-3939-31 7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 2. Cruise control is deactivated. Variable Speedtronic is selected. LIM indicator 1 To deactivate cruise control lamp in the cruise control lever is lit. 1 1 km/h faster 2 To deactivate cruise control, to 2 1 km/h slower Speedtronic or

There are various ways of deactivating 7 Move the selector lever to N while the Faster cruise control: vehicle is in motion (R page 166). 7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in 7 Apply the brakes. the direction of arrow 1. i Cruise control is deactivated. The last speed stored is cleared when Slower you switch off the engine.

7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 2.

212 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Driving systems

Variable Speedtronic i The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise con- trol lever displays which system you have The speed indicated in the speedome- Variable Speedtronic helps you to remain selected: below a set speed, e.g. in built-up areas ter may differ slightly from the speed where the speed limits change frequently. limit set. A Cruise control LIM indicator lamp off You can set the unit for the speed dis- Risk of accident G play using the operating system A Variable Speedtronic (R page 144). LIM indicator lamp on Speedtronic is only an aid designed to assist driving. You are responsible for the vehicle's You can operate the following using the i speed and for braking in good time. cruise control lever: When the engine is running, you can limit the vehicle's speed to any speed A Cruise control above 30 km/h. A Variable Speedtronic The cruise control lever is the uppermost lever on the left of the steering wheel (R page 209).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 213 Controls in detail Driving systems

Selecting variable Speedtronic Storing the current speed Risk of accident G

If there is a change of drivers, advise the new driver of the speed limit set. Only use variable Speedtronic if you are sure P54.25-3941-31 P54.25-3939-31 that you will not have to accelerate suddenly to a speed above that stored as the speed lim- it. You could otherwise cause an accident. You can then only exceed the stored speed limit when you deactivate variable Speed- 1 LIM indicator lamp tronic, e.g. if you depress the accelerator ped- 1 To store the speed rounded up to the 2 To select variable Speedtronic al beyond the pressure point (kickdown). next multiple of 10 km/h 2 To store the speed rounded down to 7 Check whether variable Speedtronic is the nearest multiple of 10 km/h selected. LIM indicator lamp 1 must then light up.

7 If this is not the case, press the cruise control lever in the direction of arrow 2. LIM indicator lamp 1 lights up. Speedtronic is selected.

214 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Driving systems

7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in i Resuming a stored speed the direction of arrow 1. Speedtronic may be unable to prevent The speed displayed is stored. the speed limit from being exceeded on Speedtronic rounds the speed up to downhill gradients. the next multiple of 10 km/h. In this case: or P54.25-3936-31 A you hear a signal Press the cruise control lever briefly in 7 the ’ indicator lamp in the the direction of arrow 2. A speedometer flashes The speed displayed is stored. you will see the LIMIT EXCEEDED Speedtronic rounds the speed down to A message in the multi-function the next multiple of 10 km/h. 1 To resume a stored speed display The stored speed is shown in the multi- 7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in Apply the brakes yourself if necessary. function display. The ’ indicator lamps the direction of arrow 1. in the cruise control lever and in the speed- If the road speed is no more than ometer (R page 19) light up. 30 km/h above the stored speed limit, Speedtronic will adjust to the last speed stored.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 215 Controls in detail Driving systems

Adjustments in 10 km/h increments Lower speed Higher speed

7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in 7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 2. the direction of arrow 1. or or

7 Press and hold the cruise control lever 7 Press and hold the cruise control lever P54.25-3939-31 towards 2 until the required speed towards 1 until the required speed has been reached. has been reached.

Fine adjustment in 1 km/h increments

1 To adjust the speed: 10 km/h faster 2 To adjust the speed: 10 km/h slower

Higher speed P54.25-3936-31 7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in the direction of arrow 1. or

7 Press and hold the cruise control lever towards 1 until the required speed 1 Fine adjustment: 1 km/h faster has been reached.

216 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Driving systems

Deactivating variable Speedtronic There are various ways of deactivating var- Variable Speedtronic is deactivated auto- iable Speedtronic: matically:

7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in A if you depress the accelerator beyond the direction of arrow 1. the pressure point (kickdown)

Variable Speedtronic is deselected. A and at the same time your current P54.25-3940-31 The set speed limit remains stored. speed differs from the set speed by no or more than 20 km/h 7 Press the cruise control lever briefly in G the direction of arrow 5. Risk of accident Variable Speedtronic is deselected. 1 To deactivate variable Speedtronic You cannot deactivate variable Speedtronic The ’ indicator lamps in the cruise 2 To deactivate variable Speedtronic, by braking. control lever and in the speedometer to select cruise control go out. Cruise control is selected.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 217 Controls in detail Driving systems

Ultrasound reversing aid* Risk of accident G The ultrasound reversing aid is an electron- ic parking aid. It visually and audibly in- The ultrasound reversing aid is only intended forms you of the distance between the rear to assist the driver and is unable to detect P88.20-2554-31 area of your vehicle and an obstacle. every obstacle. The system is not designed to The ultrasound reversing aid is automati- relieve the driver of the need to pay attention. cally activated if the ignition is switched on You are always responsible for safety and and reverse gear is engaged. must continue to pay attention to your imme- The ultrasound reversing aid monitors the diate surroundings when parking and ma- rear area of your vehicle using four sensors noeuvring. You could otherwise endanger 1 Sensors in the rear bumper. yourself and others.

Risk of injury G

Make sure that no persons or animals are in the manoeuvring range. They could otherwise be injured.

218 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Driving systems

Range of the sensors ! The sensors must be free from dirt, ice Pay particular attention to objects and slush, otherwise they may not function above or below the sensors when park- correctly. Clean the sensors regularly ing, e.g. flower pots or trailer tow bars. (R page 289), taking care not to scratch or P54.65-2519-31 The ultrasound reversing aid does not damage them. detect such objects at close range. You could otherwise damage the vehicle or the objects. Sources of ultrasound waves, e.g. a lor- ry's compressed-air brakes or a pneu- Minimum distance P54.65-2518-31 matic drill, could interfere with the The minimum distance between the sen- ultrasound reversing aid's operation. sors and the obstacle is 30 cm. If there is an obstacle within this range, all the seg- ments in the warning display will flash and you will hear a warning signal. If your vehi- Centre 150 cm cle's distance to the obstacle falls below the minimum, the distance may no longer Corners 100 cm be displayed.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 219 Controls in detail Driving systems

Warning display Station wagon The warning display shows the distance The warning display is located in the rear between the sensors and the obstacle. compartment near the rear door. The warning display is divided into two green, two yellow and two red seg- ments. It is operational when you hear a signal and all the segments have lit up briefly. P54.65-2520-31 One or more segments light up as the vehi- cle approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehicle's distance from the obstacle. When the fourth segment is lit, you will hear an intermittent warning, and when the sixth segment is lit, you will hear a Cabriolet constant warning lasting a maximum of The warning display is located on the front- three seconds. You have reached the min- passenger side at the top on the roll-over imum distance. bar.

220 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features :Features Stowage compartments Glove compartment Opening the glove compartment 7 Pull handle 3 and fold the cover down- Risk of injury G wards.

Luggage nets are not strong enough to se- Closing the glove compartment cure heavy objects. P68.00-3004-31 7 Fold the cover upwards and push Do not carry hard or heavy objects inside against it until it clicks into place. the vehicle unless they are properly se- cured. They may otherwise be thrown i around and injure someone if you brake The opened glove compartment is lit sharply, change direction suddenly or have when the ignition is switched on. an accident. 1 To unlock 2 To lock There is a cup holder in the glove com- The stowage compartments must be closed 3 Handle partment (R page 224). when you are storing items in them. The items could otherwise fall out when you ap- You can unlock 1 and lock 2 the glove ply the brakes. compartment using the mechanical key el- ement in the remote control (R page 82).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 221 Controls in detail Features

Armrest Opening the stowage tray G There is a shallow stowage tray under the 7 Press button 1 and lift the armrest. Risk of injury armrest with a deeper stowage compart- Keep the cup holders closed while the vehi- ment beneath it (telephone holder*). They i cle is moving. Do not place anything in the can both be opened separately. Telephone cards, for example, can be stored in the lid of the armrest. bottle holder while the vehicle is in motion. You could otherwise be injured by objects Opening the stowage compartment being thrown around if you: A brake sharply 7 Press button 2 and lift the armrest. A change direction suddenly P68.00-3003-31 The armrest is raised together with the stowage tray, making the stowage A have an accident compartment below accessible. Only use the cup holder for sealable contain- ers of the correct size. The drinks could oth- Opening the stowage compartment in erwise spill. the centre console Avoid hot drinks. You may otherwise scald 1 To open the stowage tray yourself. 2 To open the stowage compartment 7 Push the cover back by handle 3. 3 Stowage compartment in the centre You can also use this stowage com- console partment as a cup holder.

222 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

Ruffled pockets/luggage net There is a ruffled pocket on the back of There is a luggage net in the bottom right each front seat. of the cockpit. Risk of injury G

Do not transport heavy, hard, fragile or sharp-edged objects in the ruffled pockets or in the luggage net. Objects must not pro- P68.00-3240-31 P68.50-2231-31 trude over the top of the ruffled pockets or the luggage net. Objects that have not been secured could otherwise cause you injury.

1 Ruffled pockets 1 Luggage net

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 223 Controls in detail Features

Cup holders Cup holders in the glove compartment Cup holders on the centre console

Risk of injury G

Keep the cup holders closed while the vehi- cle is moving. Do not place anything in the P68.10-2767-31 P68.00-3005-31 bottle holder while the vehicle is in motion. You could otherwise be injured by objects being thrown around if you:

A brake sharply A change direction suddenly 7 Open the glove compartment 1 Upper cup holder* A have an accident (R page 221). 2 Fixture* Only use the cup holder for sealable contain- 3 Lower cup holder* ers of the correct size. The drinks could oth- erwise spill. Upper cup holder*

Avoid hot drinks. You may otherwise scald 7 Insert cup holder 1 in fixture* 2 next yourself. to the armrest (arrow).

224 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

Lower cup holder* Cup holders in the rear compartment* Ashtray and cigarette lighter 7 Fold cup holder 3 upwards to the stop (arrow). Risk of injury and fire G ! Only hold the hot cigarette lighter by its Make sure that the cup holder is folded P68.00-3007-31 knob. You could otherwise burn yourself. down before moving the seat forwards, otherwise you could damage the seat Remove the cigarette lighter if children are and the cup holder. travelling with you. They could injure them- selves on a hot cigarette lighter or start a fire. i You can also use the stowage compart- i ment in the centre console (R page 222) as a cup holder. You can also use the cigarette lighter socket for accessories with a maximum power consumption of 180 watts. When the engine has been switched off, it is possible for the battery to dis- charge if the sockets are used for long periods.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 225 Controls in detail Features

Ashtray and cigarette lighter at the Opening the ashtray Removing the ashtray insert front in the centre console 7 Press cover 3 and then release it. The ashtray and cigarette lighter are under G The ashtray and cigarette lighter slide Risk of injury a cover. out. Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake before removing the ashtray insert. Closing the ashtray You could otherwise move the selector lever Press down on cover 3 until it engag- 7 and unintentionally set the vehicle in mo- es. tion. P68.20-2660-31

7 Move the selector lever to N. This will give you more space to remove the insert.

1 Ashtray 2 Cigarette lighter 3 Cover

226 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

7 Press cigarette lighter 2 in. Opening

The cigarette lighter will pop out auto- 7 Fold cover 1 down in the direction of matically as soon as the heating ele- the arrow. ment is red-hot. P68.20-2661-31 Closing Ashtray in the rear passenger compart 7 Fold the cover up completely. ment* There is an ashtray in the side of each of Removing the ashtray insert the rear doors. 7 Press retaining lug 2 (arrow) and pull 4 Release button insert 3 upwards and out. 5 Insert

7 Press release button 4 to the right so that the insert disengages.

7 Pull insert 5 upwards and out. P68.00-3008-31

Cigarette lighter

7 Switch on the ignition.

1 Cover 2 Retaining lug 3 Insert

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 227 Controls in detail Features

Floormats Telephone* This jeopardises the operating safety of the vehicle and therefore your own safety. Fur- Risk of accident G Risk of accident G thermore, high levels of electromagnetic ra- diation can cause damage to your health. Make sure that floormats or carpets in the Only use the telephone when road and traffic Therefore, have the exterior aerial installed driver's footwell do not obstruct the pedals. conditions permit. If you are not using the only at a qualified specialist workshop which hands-free system, stop the vehicle in an area The floormats must always be properly se- has the necessary specialist knowledge and designated for using telephones. cured using the eyelets and retaining pins. tools to carry out the work required. Check that they are secure before starting If the mobile phone is operated from within Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a your journey and adjust them if necessary. A the vehicle: Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- floormat which is not properly secured could A without an exterior aerial pose. slip and get caught between the pedals in A without a reflection-free exterior aerial in- In particular, work relevant to safety or on the event of sudden steering or braking ma- stalled safety-related systems must be carried out noeuvres. You will then not be able to brake at a qualified specialist workshop. A with an incorrectly-installed exterior aerial or accelerate. This could lead to an accident or injury. a malfunction may occur in the vehicle's elec- tronics.

228 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

Hands-free system* Mobile phone* version with Inserting the mobile phone in the tele The microphone for the hands-free system code 852 or code 854 (telephone phone bracket on the armrest and the Linguatronic* system is on the bracket* with spiral cable) 7 Open the stowage compartment in the roof on the left. i armrest (R page 222). You can use all functions of the Nokia 6310i only if the relevant control unit for the Nokia 6310i has been installed in your vehicle. P82.00-2196-31 P82.70-4160-31 The following mobile phones can also be used in this telephone bracket with certain restrictions: Nokia 5110, Nokia 5130, Nokia 6110, Nokia 6130, Nokia 6150, Nokia 6210, Microphone Nokia 6310 7 Remove the round cap in the back of your mobile phone. RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 229 Controls in detail Features

The battery is charged depending on its current charge status and the position of the key in the ignition lock. The charging process is shown in the dis- P82.70-4401-31 P82.70-4403-31 play on the mobile phone. i Depending on the mobile phone set- ting, either the phone book stored on the SIM card or the phone book stored 7 Press the bracket down 1 briefly. 7 Press the mobile phone down 5. in the mobile phone is read. Cradle 2 folds up. Cradle 2 folds down. You can make a call using buttons í 7 Insert the lower part of the mobile 7 Press the mobile phone down further and ì on the multi-function steering phone into lugs 3 in bracket 4. 5 until it engages at the sides of wheel. Other mobile phone functions can bracket 6. be controlled via the operating system The mobile phone is connected to the (R page 159). hands-free system and the multi-func- tion steering wheel.

230 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features i Own number sending: Making a call using the telephone bracket When you remove the key from the igni- The hands-free system does not recog- tion lock, the mobile phone remains nise whether own number sending is The telephone bracket contains a fully op- switched on for approximately ten min- enabled or disabled in the mobile erational receiver with a loudspeaker and a utes (run-on time). If you make a call phone. This means that your number microphone. You can remove the mobile during this time, the mobile phone will will always be displayed to the opposite phone together with the telephone bracket be switched off approximately ten min- party. and make a call in this way. utes after you have hung up. You can enable or disable own number You can change the run-on time by sending by making an additional entry means of an additional phone book en- in the phone book stored on the SIM try. card: Enter "Nachlaufzeit" for the name and a Enter "CALLID" for the name and "0" or P82.70-4403-31 figure between "1" and "30" for the "1" for the number. Your number: number. If you do not enter a figure, or you enter an invalid figure, a run-on A will not be shown if "0" is entered time of ten minutes will still apply. A will be shown if "1" is entered You will find details of how to make an You will find details of how to make an 7 Press briefly on mobile phone 5. entry in the phone book in the mobile entry in the phone book in the mobile phone Operating Instructions. phone Operating Instructions. Cradle 2 folds up. 7 Remove bracket 6 and the mobile phone from cradle 2.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 231 Controls in detail Features

Replacing the telephone bracket Removing the mobile phone from the telephone bracket

P82.70-4404-31 P82.70-4405-31 P82.70-4402-31

Bracket 6 contains a fully operational re- ceiver (arrows) which you can use to make 7 Press bracket 6 along with the mobile a call. phone into cradle 2. 7 Press briefly on the top of the mobile phone in the direction of arrow 5. i 7 Press on the top of the mobile phone in The mobile phone's receiver function is the direction of arrow 5 until cradle Cradle 2 folds up. deactivated while the phone is in brack- 2 engages. 7 Press release button 7 and remove et 6. You can then only make a call via the mobile phone towards the front the receiver in bracket 6. from the telephone bracket.

7 Press bracket 6 in the direction of ar- row 5 until cradle 2 engages again.

232 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

Mobile phone* version with i ! code 386 or code 388 (telephone For some mobile phones there are oth- You cannot remove the mobile phone bracket* without spiral cable) er suitable telephone brackets which together with the telephone bracket. i can be engaged in the Nokia telephone bracket contact (R page 235). You can You can use all functions of the Nokia obtain these telephone brackets from a 6310i only if the relevant control unit qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a for the Nokia 6310i has been installed Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. in your vehicle. P82.70-4160-31 The following mobile phones can also Inserting the mobile phone in the tele be used in this telephone bracket: phone bracket on the armrest A Nokia 6210 i A Nokia 6310 When the mobile phone is inserted in Please also observe the additional Op- the telephone bracket, you can only 7 Remove the round cap on the back of erating Instructions for the Nokia 6210 make a call using the hands-free sys- your mobile phone. RR tem. (R page 236).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 233 Controls in detail Features

The mobile phone is connected to the i hands-free system and the multi-func- When you remove the key from the tion steering wheel. ignition lock, the mobile phone remains The battery is charged depending on its switched on for approximately ten min- P82.70-4637-31 current charge status and the position utes (run-on time). If you make a call of the key in the ignition lock. The during this time, the telephone will be charging process is shown in the dis- switched off approximately ten min- play on the mobile phone. utes after you have hung up. i Run-on time: 1 To engage the mobile phone (arrow) First the phone book stored on the SIM You can change the run-on time by 2 Lugs card is read. If there is sufficient mem- means of an additional phone book en- 3 Telephone bracket ory space remaining, the entries in the try. Enter "Nachlaufzeit" for the name 7 Insert the lower part of the mobile phone book stored on the mobile and a figure between "1" and "30" for phone into lugs 2 in telephone brack- phone are also read. the number. If you do not enter a figure, et 3. or you enter an invalid figure, a run-on You can make a call using buttons í time of ten minutes will still apply. 7 Press the mobile phone down in the di- ì and on the multi-function steering You will find details of how to make an rection of arrow 1 until it engages in wheel. Other mobile phone functions can telephone bracket 3. entry in the phone book in the mobile be controlled via the operating system phone Operating Instructions. (R page 159).

234 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

Own number sending: Removing the mobile phone from the Replacing the telephone bracket telephone bracket The hands-free system does not recog- i nise whether own number sending is For some mobile phones you can en- enabled or disabled in the mobile gage other suitable telephone brackets phone. This means that your number in the Nokia telephone bracket con- will always be displayed to the opposite tact. party. P82.70-4638-31 You can enable or disable own number Removing the telephone bracket sending by making an additional entry in the phone book stored on the SIM card: Enter "CALLID" for the name and "0" or 1 Release button "1" for the number. Your number: 2 Telephone bracket P82.70-3368-31 A will not be shown if "0" is entered 7 Press release button 1 and remove A will be shown if "1" is entered the mobile phone towards the front from telephone bracket 2. You will find details of how to make an entry in the phone book in the mobile phone Operating Instructions. Illustration of a Nokia telephone bracket 1 Contact 2 Release button 3 Telephone bracket RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 235 Controls in detail Features

7 Press release button 2 and remove 7 Insert telephone bracket 3 in recess- Mercedes-Benz telematic services telephone bracket 3 in a downwards es 2 on contact 1. Mercedes-Benz telematics service are: direction. 7 Slide telephone bracket 3 forwards DynAPS* (dynamic route guidance) until it engages. A Installing the telephone bracket A TeleAid* Additional Operating Instructions for The Mercedes-Benz telematics services the Nokia 6210 allow the service centre to establish a con- You can only use all the functions of the nection with your vehicle. Nokia 6210 if the mobile phone uses soft- If you have registered with Mercedes-Benz P82.70-4640-31 ware version "V 05.02" or a more recent telematics services, the service centre version. Mercedes-Benz recommends that sends free, regular text messages (SMS) to you use software version "V 05.56". your mobile phone* or to the permanently- 7 Press the following sequence of but- installed telephone*. tons to display the software version: i Illustration of a Nokia telephone bracket * # 0 0 0 0 # If you use prepaid cards, costs will be 1 Contact i incurred for the SMS messages. These 2 Recesses will be deducted from the credit on If necessary, you can update the soft- 3 Telephone bracket your card. ware at a Nokia service centre.

236 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

DynAPS* (dynamic route guidance) TeleAid* Enter the following sequence of characters in the telephone: Your navigation system* adapts the route You can only use the TeleAid service if you guidance to the current traffic situation. have a permanently-installed telephone*. *#4610# This helps you to avoid traffic jams and You will find further information about how Service mode is selected. reach your destination more quickly. to operate your telephone in the separate telephone Operating Instructions. TeleAid has various functions: i Select service mode if: A Emergency call system You can only use DynAPS in vehicles The system automatically makes an the vehicle battery is to be disconnect- with: A emergency call if you have a serious ac- ed for more than ten days A a permanently-installed telephone* cident in certain European countries. the vehicle battery is discharged You can also initiate an emergency call a mobile phone* version code 852 A A yourself by pressing the emergency or code 854 (telephone bracket* The internal TeleAid battery will otherwise call button ( page 239). with spiral cable) discharge and you will have to have it re- R placed at your own expense at a qualified The system transmits data regarding specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz the vehicle's position and the extent of Service Centre. the accident to the emergency service centre and establishes a connection with this centre.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 237 Controls in detail Features

A Roadside assistance Emergency call system The following messages appear in the mul- When you press the roadside assist- ti-function display: It is only possible to make an emergency ance (breakdown service) button on call is you turn the key to position 1 or 2 in EMERGENCY CALL CONNECTING CALL the telephone*, the system transmits the ignition lock. The indicator lamp in the EMERGENCY CALL CALL CONNECTED the current vehicle position and the ve- emergency call button (R page 239) lights hicle data to the Mercedes-Benz Cus- You will hear an announcement when the up for approximately five seconds. tomer Assistance Center (CAC). The emergency service centre has received CAC then establishes a voice connec- An emergency call is initiated your emergency call. tion with your vehicle. You will find automatically: 7 Wait until a connection is established further information in the separate A when an airbag is triggered with the emergency service centre. telephone operating instructions. A if there is a severe rear-end collision You can now make your emergency. A MB Info This service assists you with any ques- A if the vehicle overturns tions about your vehicle. You will find The indicator lamp in the emergency call further information in the separate button flashes until the emergency call is telephone operating instructions. finished.

238 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

i Prerequisites Initiating an emergency call manually You cannot make another call using the A TeleAid is available in the country you The emergency call system is a public sys- telephone* while connected to the are in. tem. Misuse is a punishable offence. emergency service centre. A A Mercedes-Benz Service Centre has The emergency call button is located in the commissioned TeleAid. overhead control panel. If the indicator lamp lights up constantly without a voice connection having first A You have a contract with a telephone been established, this means that the sys- provider and the TeleAid service. tem has been unable to transmit an emer- A You have a valid telephone card. gency call. The following message appears in the multi-function display: A You have a valid PIN for your telephone card. EMERGENCY CALL CALL FAILED A You are authorised to use TeleAid. You must then initiate your own rescue P82.95-2365-31 measures. A The relevant mobile phone network is available (with SMS service). In Germa- ny this is D1 or D2.

A The vehicle can receive the GPS sig- nals.

A The emergency call system is opera- tional. 1 Cover 2 Emergency call button RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 239 Controls in detail Features

7 Briefly press cover 1 on the emergen- Garage door opener* cy call button on the overhead control The integrated remote control in the rear- panel. view mirror may be used to open and close The cover opens. up to three different door systems. P68.05-2060-31 7 Press emergency call button 2. The transmitter buttons can be pro- The indicator lamp in emergency call grammed. button 2 flashes. i You will hear an announcement when The garage door opener is only availa- the emergency service centre has re- ble for certain countries. Observe the Integrated remote control in the rear-view ceived your emergency call. legal requirements in all countries con- mirror 7 Wait until a connection is established cerned. 1 Indicator lamp with the emergency service centre. It may not be possible to operate some 2 Transmitter button You can now make your emergency garage door opening systems with the 3 Transmitter button call. integrated remote control. You can ob- 4 Transmitter button tain more detailed information from When you have finished the emergency any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. call:

7 Replace the cover on the emergency call button.

240 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

i 7 Release the transmitter button on the G integrated and transportable remote Risk of injury The indicator lamp flashes as soon as control. the first transmitter button is pro- Only press a transmitter button on the remote grammed. If this button has already control if there are no people or objects i been programmed, the indicator lamp present within the sweep of the garage door. If your garage door opening system only begins to flash after 20 seconds. People could otherwise be injured as the door works with a rolling code: moves. 7 Keep pressing the transmitter button. Synchronise the remote control inte- grated in the rear-view mirror with the Programming the remote control 7 Point the transportable garage door re- garage door remote control after pro- mote control and the transmitter at the Switch on the ignition. gramming. 7 left-hand side of the rear-view mirror. 7 Press and hold transmitter button 2, You will find further information in the 7 Press and hold the transmitter button 3 or 4 on the integrated remote con- garage door opening system operating on the garage door remote control until instructions, e.g. the sections on "Syn- trol. 1 indicator lamp flashes several times chronising the transmitter" or "Regis- 1 Indicator lamp starts to flash after a each second. tering a new transmitter". short while. It flashes approximately Programming has been successful. once a second.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 241 Controls in detail Features

Opening/closing the garage door Clearing the remote control memory Sockets The integrated remote control adopts the 7 Switch on the ignition. function of the garage door remote control Socket on the centre console 7 Press and hold buttons 2 and 4 for once it has been programmed. You should approximately 20 seconds until indica- The socket is located at the rear of the cen- therefore also read the garage door sys- tor lamp 1 flashes rapidly. tre console. tem Operating Instructions. The memory is cleared. 7 Switch on the ignition.

7 Press the transmitter button in the i rear-view mirror which you have pro- Clear the remote control memory be- grammed to operate this garage door. fore you sell the vehicle. P68.20-3034-31 i The transmitter transmits a signal all the time the transmitter button is being pressed. Transmission is aborted after a maximum of 20 seconds and indica- 7 Raise the cover and insert the plug. tor lamp 1 flashes. Press the transmit- ter button again if necessary.

242 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Controls in detail Features

Socket in the luggage compartment Steering wheel heating* Switching on The socket is located on the rear left-hand The steering wheel heating heats the leath- i side of the luggage compartment. er areas of the steering wheel. You can use the cigarette lighter socket The lever is on the left of the steering col- (R page 226) for accessories, even if umn. the key has been removed from the ig- nition. The maximum load for the sockets is P68.00-3633-31 180 W. When the engine has been switched off, P54.30-6442-31 the battery may discharge if the sockets are used for long periods.

7 Raise the cover and insert the plug. 7 Turn the key to position 1 or 2 in the ig- nition lock (R page 35).

1 To switch on 7 Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 2 To switch off 1. 3 Indicator lamp 7 The steering wheel is heated. Indicator lamp 3 lights up.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 243 Controls in detail Features

Switching off

7 Turn the lever in the direction of arrow 2.

7 The steering wheel heating is switched off. Indicator lamp 3 goes out. i The steering wheel heating does not switch off automatically.

244 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation The first 1,500 km Refuelling Engine compartment Tyres and wheels Driving tips Winter driving Driving abroad Trailer towing Service Care

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 245 Operation The first 1,500 km

You will find detailed information about op- If you treat the engine with sufficient care A Use ranges 4, 3, 2 or 1 for slow driving erating, maintaining and caring for your ve- from the very start, it will reward you with only, for example in mountainous ter- hicle in the "Operation" section. excellent performance for a very long peri- rain. od afterwards. After 1,500 km, you can gradually bring A You should therefore drive at varying the vehicle up to full road speed and in- road and engine speeds for the first crease the engine speed. 1,500 km. Additional notes for AMG vehicles: A Avoid placing a heavy strain on the en- A Do not drive faster than 140 km/h gine during this time, e.g. by driving at 2 during the first 1,500 km. full throttle. Do not exceed /3 of the top speed for each gear. A Only run the engine at a maximum speed of 4,500 rpm for short periods of Try to avoid depressing the accelerator A time. pedal beyond the pressure point (kick- down). These notes must also be observed if the engine or the axle drive has been replaced A Do not change down a gear manually in on the vehicle. order to brake.

246 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Refuelling :Refuelling 7 Open fuel filler flap 1. To do this, Risk of injury G press on fuel filler flap 1 (arrow). The fuel filler flap folds out. Fuel is highly flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking are therefore prohibited when 7 Turn fuel filler cap 2 anti-clockwise P88.60-2078-31 handling fuels. and remove it.

Switch off the auxiliary heating* when refu- 7 Place fuel filler cap 2 in the holder on elling. the inside of fuel filler flap 1.

Do not allow fuel to come into contact with 7 Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle skin or clothing. Your health may be dam- switches off. Illustration example aged if: 7 Close fuel filler cap 2 again. To do 1 Fuel filler flap A you spill fuel onto your skin this, turn it clockwise until it clicks into 2 Fuel filler cap A you inhale fuel vapours place. 7 Remove the key from the ignition lock. 7 Close fuel filler flap 1. The fuel filler flap is located to the rear on The catch engages. the right-hand side when viewed in the di- rection of travel. When you lock or unlock the vehicle using the key, you automatical- ly lock and unlock the fuel filler flap.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 247 Operation Refuelling

Petrol (EN 228) ! ! Premium unleaded petrol with an octane The following can lead to increased Leaded petrol damages the catalytic rating of at least 95 RON/85 MON for all wear or engine damage: converter and the lambda probe. petrol engines. A Using petrol which does not comply If you exceed the interval for replacing i with EN 228. the spark plugs, this may cause in- creased wear and engine damage. You will generally find information on A Using fuel additives. You may obtain further information petrol grade on the filling pump. The use of non-approved fuels and fuel from any Mercedes-Benz Service additives will lead to the limitation of As a very temporary measure, you may Centre. also use regular unleaded petrol your warranty rights. 91 RON/82.5 MON. This may reduce power and increase fuel consumption. Leaded petrol Avoid the use of full throttle. You may refuel with leaded petrol in coun- tries where unleaded petrol is not availa- ble. This shortens the interval for replacing spark plugs to 20,000 km.

7 Ask at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre before using leaded petrol.

248 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Refuelling

Diesel (EN 590) ! Low outside temperatures i The following can lead to increased To prevent operating problems, diesel with wear or engine damage: improved cold flow qualities is available You will generally find information on during the winter months. diesel grade on the filling pump. A Using diesel which does not comply with EN 590 You can use winter diesel at temperatures down to approximately –20 °C without We recommend having the engine oil A Using marine diesel fuel changed every 7,500 km in countries problems. A Using heating oil where only diesel fuel with a sulphur con- To improve flow properties, it is possible to tent exceeding 0.5 percent by weight is A Using vegetable oil methyl ester mix diesel with kerosene and flow improv- available. (VME) er. A Using fuel additives ("bio-diesel", The mixing ratio depends on the type of FAME fuels) diesel and the outside temperature. How- The use of non-approved fuels and fuel ever, keep the concentration of flow im- additives will lead to the limitation of prover as low as possible. your warranty rights.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 249 Operation Refuelling

7 Put the kerosene into the container ! Outside Summer Kerosene first, then add the diesel. Do not mix diesel with petrol. This tempera diesel would damage the fuel system. After a few minutes' driving, the mix- ture ture will spread to all parts of the fuel Add a maximum of 50% kerosene or –15 °C to 80% 20% system. flow improver to the diesel. –23 °C Only mix diesel with kerosene in a con- G –23 °C to 50% 50% tainer that has been approved for hold- Risk of injury –30 °C ing fuels; do not mix them in the fuel Please note that as a result of adding kero- Outside Winter Kerosene tank. sene the diesel is more highly flammable. tempera diesel ture –25 °C to 80% 20% –30 °C –30 °C to 50% 50% –35 °C

250 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Refuelling

Bleeding the fuel system If the engine does not start, wait for Vegetable oil methyl ester two minutes and repeat the starting proce- (V.O.M.E. fuels)* dure. Do not try to start the engine again if Vehicles with a diesel engine Only models with the special option of the this attempt is unsuccessful. Consult a vegetable oil methyl ester specification If the vehicle is driven until the tank is emp- qualified specialist workshop. ty, the engine may not start again after re- may be filled up with V.O.M.E. fuels. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuelling because air could be trapped in the V.O.M.E. fuels do not attain the same qual- a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this fuel system. ity as winter diesel. We recommend using purpose, as it has the necessary specialist In such cases, start the engine around standard winter diesel at temperatures be- knowledge and tools for the work required. five times after refuelling. low –10 °C. In particular, work relevant to safety or on If the vehicle has not been used for a long safety-related systems must be carried out time (more than about two weeks), we rec- at a qualified specialist workshop. ommend that you first refuel with standard diesel fuel and then drive the vehicle for 30 minutes.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 251 Operation Engine compartment

Bonnet

Risk of accident G

Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- P68.00-3010-31 P88.40-2290-31 cle is in motion. The bonnet could otherwise open.

Opening

! 1 Release lever 2 Bonnet catch Make sure that the windscreen wipers 7 Pull release lever 1 located on the 7 Raise the bonnet slightly. Pull bonnet are not folded away from the wind- cockpit at the bottom left. catch 2 in the direction of the arrow. Raise the bonnet. screen, otherwise the windscreen wip- The bonnet is released. ers or the bonnet may be damaged.

252 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Engine compartment

Closing For this reason, never touch the ignition sys- Risk of injury G tem components (ignition coil, ignition ca- Risk of injury G There is a risk of injury if the bonnet is open bles, spark plug connections, test socket) if: – even if the engine is not running. the engine is running A Make sure that nobody can be trapped as you Parts of the engine can become very hot. To A the engine is being started close the bonnet. avoid burning yourself, only touch those A the ignition is switched on and the en- components specified in the Owner's Manu- gine is being cranked by hand 7 Lower the bonnet and let it drop from a al and observe the notes on the associated The radiator fan can start up automatically, height of about 20 cm. risks. even if the key is removed from the ignition. The bonnet engages audibly. The engine has an electronic ignition system Keep away from the area of rotation of the which carries a high voltage. fan blades. 7 Check that the bonnet has engaged properly. If the bonnet can be raised slightly, it is not properly locked. Open the bonnet again and close it with a little more force.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 253 Operation Engine compartment

Engine oil ! Checking the engine oil level The vehicle consumes a maximum of 0.8 l Do not use special lubricant additives. When checking the oil level, the vehicle of oil per 1,000 km, depending on your They can lead to increased wear and must: damage of the mechanical assemblies. driving style. Oil consumption can exceed A be standing level this if: The use of fuel additives could result in a limitation of your warranty entitle- A be at normal operating temperature A the vehicle is new ment. You may obtain further informa- A have been standing with the engine A you often drive at high engine speeds tion from any Mercedes-Benz Service switched off for at least five minutes The engine oil consumption can only be es- Centre. timated once a lengthy distance has been Using the operating system covered. 7 Turn the ignition to position 2 (R page 35). The standard display appears in the multi-function display (R page 129).

254 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Engine compartment

7 Press the k or j button on the The following messages may appear Other messages in the display: multi-function display until the follow- once the engine oil has been meas- The following message is displayed if the ing message appears in the display: ured: engine is at normal operating temperature A ENGINE OIL LEVEL O.K. and there is too much oil: ENGINE OIL P54.30-6242-31 LEVEL REDUCE OIL LEVEL Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6242en-31 A ADD 1.0 LITRE TO REACH MAX. OIL Französisch: P54.30-7439-31 LEVEL! 7 Have any excess oil siphoned off. Italienisch: P54.30-7451-31 A ADD 1.5 LITRE TO REACH MAX. OIL ! Spanisch: P54.30-6242sp-31 LEVEL! If the oil level is too high, there is a risk The ENGINE OIL LEVEL MEASURING NOW! A ADD 2.0 LITRE TO REACH MAX. OIL of damage to the engine or the catalyt- message appears after about three LEVEL! ic converter. seconds. 7 Top up the oil if necessary The following message is displayed: (R page 257). FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL SWITCH ON IGNITION!

7 Turn the key in the ignition to position 2 (R page 35). RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 255 Operation Engine compartment

If you do not observe the required waiting Using the dipstick time, the following message is displayed: OBSERVE WAITING TIME!

7 Measure again after five minutes if the engine is at normal operating tempera- P18.00-2075-31 ture. P18.00-2074-31 7 Measure again after 30 minutes if the engine is not at normal operating tem- perature. The following message is displayed if the G 270 CDI engine is running: ENGINE OIL LEVEL NOT G 320, G 500, G 55 AMG 1 Dipstick WHEN ENGINE ON! 2 Filler neck 1 Dipstick 7 Switch off the engine and wait for 2 Filler neck around five minutes with the engine at normal operating temperature before measuring. i Press the k or j button on the multi-function steering wheel if you wish to abort the measuring procedure.

256 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Engine compartment

Topping up the engine oil

7 Unscrew the cap on filler neck 2.

7 Top up the oil. P18.00-2084-31 P18.00-2061-31 Make sure that you do not add too Aus M-Klasse Ba. much oil. ! Have any excess oil siphoned off. If the oil level is too high, there is a risk of G 400 CDI 1 Dipstick for G 320, G 500, damage to the engine or the catalytic G 55 AMG, G 400 CDI converter. 1 Dipstick 2 Dipstick for G 270 CDI 2 Filler neck 7 Screw the cap back onto filler neck 2. 7 The oil level is correct if the oil is be- Pull out dipstick 1. RR 7 tween the lower and upper marks on 7 Wipe it off. the dipstick.

7 Insert it into the dipstick tube to the 7 Top up the oil if necessary. stop and pull it out again. i The difference in the quantity of oil be- tween the upper and lower marks on the dipstick is approximately 2 litres.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 257 Operation Engine compartment

Coolant Checking the coolant level Environmental note H Coolant is a mixture of water and anti- The expansion tank is in the engine com- partment on right-hand side when viewed When topping up the oil, take care not to freeze and corrosion inhibitor. Only check in the direction of travel. spill any. Oil must not be allowed to escape the coolant level when the vehicle is level into the soil or waterways. You would other- and the engine has cooled down. wise be damaging the environment. Risk of injury G You will find further information in the "Technical data" section (R page 408). The cooling system is pressurised. You P20.30-2154-31 should therefore only unscrew the cap once Oil level in the automatic the engine has cooled down. The coolant transmission temperature display must show less than There is no need to check the oil level in 70 °C. You could otherwise be scalded by the automatic transmission. Have any oil any hot coolant which escapes. loss from the automatic transmission or 1 Cap problems with gear shifts checked at a 7 Slowly unscrew cap 1 by about half a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a turn in the direction of the arrow and al- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. low any excess pressure to escape.

7 Continue turning the cap and remove it.

258 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Engine compartment

7 The coolant level is correct if: Windscreen washer system, Add windscreen washer concentrate to the washer fluid all year round. A it has reached the mark on the ex- headlamp cleaning system pansion tank when the coolant is The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is in cold the engine compartment on the right-hand Risk of fire G A it is approximately 1.5 cm higher side when viewed in the direction of travel. Windscreen washer concentrate is highly when the coolant is hot It holds around 7.5 litres. The headlamp cleaning system is supplied from the wind- flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking 7 Top up the coolant if necessary. screen washer fluid reservoir. are therefore prohibited when you are han- dling windscreen washer concentrate. 7 Replace the cap and turn it beyond the detent until it clicks three times. Use: You will find further information about coolant in the "Technical data" section A a windscreen washer fluid additive, e.g. MB Summerwash, at temperatures (R page 409). P20.30-2155-31 above freezing point to prevent smear- ing RR

1 Cap

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 259 Operation Engine compartment

A a windscreen washer fluid additive with Opening the windscreen washer fluid ! antifreeze properties, e.g. MB Winter- reservoir Only use windscreen washer fluid that wash, when there is a risk of frost so 7 Pull cap 1 upwards by the tab. is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Un- that the washer fluid does not freeze on suitable windscreen washer fluid may the windscreen Closing the windscreen washer fluid cause damage to the plastic lenses of Mix the washer fluid in a container. Vary reservoir the headlamps. the mixing ratio according to the outside 7 Press cap 1 onto the filler neck until it temperature ( R page 411). clicks fully into place.

260 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Tyres and wheels :Tyres and wheels Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for In addition, when driving with a load, di- safety reasons, you only use tyres that mensional variations and different tyre de- Risk of accident G have been specially approved for your ve- formation characteristics could cause the hicle by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres are tyres to make contact with the bodywork Only use the wheel sizes stated in the vehi- specially suited for use with control sys- and axle components. This may result in cle registration document. If other wheels tems such as ABS or ESP. the tyre or the vehicle being damaged. are fitted: If you use other tyres, Mercedes-Benz can- Retreaded tyres are neither checked nor A the wheel brakes or chassis compo- not be held responsible for any damage recommended by Mercedes-Benz since nents could be damaged, for example that may occur. You may obtain informa- previous damage cannot always be detect- A wheel and tyre clearance is no longer tion about tyres from any Mercedes-Benz ed on retreaded tyres. As a result, guaranteed Service Centre. Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle If you fit tyres other than those approved safety. Modification work on the brake system and recommended by Mercedes-Benz, and wheels is not permitted, nor is the use properties such as handling characteris- of spacer plates or brake dust shields. Any tics, noise emissions and fuel consump- such modifications will invalidate the vehi- tion, etc. may be adversely affected. cle's general operating permit.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 261 Operation Tyres and wheels

General notes A If the vehicle is laden, check the tyre ! pressures and correct them if neces- Damage to the rim could lead to the A Only fit tyres and wheels of the same sary. type and make. loss of air, which in turn could damage A Fit new tyres on the front wheels first if the tyres. Also check the tyres and rims Only fit tyres of the correct size onto A tyres of the same size are fitted on the after contact with a kerb or pothole, for the wheels. front and rear wheels. example. A Run in new tyres at moderate speeds A Store tyres in a cool, dry place, prefer- for the first 100 km. ably in the dark. Protect the tyres from Direction of rotation A Check the tyres and wheels regularly oil, grease and petrol. Tyres with a specified direction of rotation for damage. The service life of a tyre depends on: offer additional benefits, e.g. in the event A Clean heavily soiled wheels, even on of aquaplaning. These benefits will only be A your driving style the inside (e.g. following journeys available to you if the correct direction of through mud). A the tyre pressure rotation is observed.

A Do not continue to use tyres with se- A the distance driven An arrow on the sidewall of the tyre indi- cates its correct direction of rotation. You verely worn treads. Tyre grip is rapidly Replace the tyres and spare wheels, re- may fit a spare tyre against the direction of reduced on wet roads if the tyres have gardless of the degree of tyre wear, after rotation. a tread depth of less than four millime- no more than six years. This applies even if tres. a longer service life is quoted.

262 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Tyres and wheels

Tyre pressures i If the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tyre pressures and correct them if neces- Tyre pressure values given for low loads sary. Risk of accident G are minimum values which offer you good ride comfort characteristics. Tyre pressure changes by approximately 0.1 bar for every 10 °C change in ambient If the pressure in a tyre drops repeatedly: You can, however, also use the values temperature. If you measure the tyre pres- A inspect the tyre for foreign objects for higher loads. These are permissible sure indoors where the temperature differs and will not adversely affect the running A check whether air is escaping from the from the outside temperature, you will of the vehicle. However, ride comfort wheel or the valve have to correct the measured value ac- will be impaired to some degree. cordingly. The pressure of warm tyres should only be corrected if it is too low for the current op- When the vehicle is driven, the tyre tem- erating conditions. Environmental note H perature, and with it the tyre pressure, will increase depending on the road speed and You will find a table of tyre pressures for Check the tyre pressures regularly, at least the load on the tyres. warm and cold tyres on the inside of the every 14 days. vehicle's fuel filler flap. If possible, you should only correct tyre pressures when If the tyre pressures are too low, fuel con- the tyres are cold. sumption will increase.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 263 Operation Tyres and wheels

Interchanging wheels Clean the inner section of the wheel when- ever you interchange wheels. Check the Risk of accident G G tyre pressures. Risk of accident Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety reasons, you only use wheel bolts that Only interchange the front and rear wheels if Risk of accident G are suitable and have been approved by they are of the same size. Mercedes-Benz. After changing the wheel, have the tighten- The wear patterns on the front and rear ing torque checked at a qualified specialist tyres differ depending on the operating workshop which has the necessary special- i conditions. ist knowledge and tools to carry out the We recommend that you have wheels work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends changed at a qualified specialist work- On vehicles with the same size wheels, you that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to tre for this purpose. Centre. 10,000 km depending on the degree of wear of the tyres. Make sure that the direc- In particular, work relevant to safety or on tion of rotation of the wheels is retained. safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Interchange the wheels before too definite The wheel bolts may work loose if they are a wear pattern has formed on the tyres. not tightened to a tightening torque of The front tyres typically wear more on the 130 Nm. outer shoulder, and the rear tyres in the centre of the tread.

264 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Driving tips :Driving tips You will find basic information about driv- After a cold start Free-wheeling with the engine ing the vehicle in the "Getting started" sec- 7 Warm the engine up quickly. switched off tion (R page 26). You can use the engine's full power G Driving and parking once it has reached operating temper- Risk of accident ature. There is no power assistance for the steer- Risk of fire G Pulling away on a slippery surface ing and braking when the engine is not run- ning. The exhaust system can become very hot, ! especially after a long journey. Do not park You will require considerably more effort to Try not to let the drive wheels spin. You the vehicle next to easily ignitable material steer and brake. You could therefore lose could otherwise damage the drive (straw, petrol, leaves, etc.), e.g. in a field. control of the vehicle and cause an accident. train. The flammable material may otherwise ig- Never switch off the engine while the vehicle nite and set fire to parts of the vehicle. Engage the differential locks as re- is in motion. quired (R page 174).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 265 Operation Driving tips

Braking You should therefore maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front. Risk of accident G Shift down to a lower gear (shift range 1, 2 Apply the brakes firmly after driving on wet or 3) on long and steep downhill gradients Make sure that other road users are not en- roads, especially if the road has been salt- (R page 167). This will prevent the brakes dangered when the brakes are applied in ed. The brake discs will be warmed, dry overheating and wearing out too quickly. this way. more quickly and be protected against cor- It is best not to stop the vehicle immediate- rosion. ly after the brakes have been subjected to For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom- an extreme load; continue driving for a If you make only moderate use of the mends that you only have components short time instead. The brakes are cooled brakes, check from time to time that they such as brake pads fitted to your vehicle down more quickly in the airflow. are fully functional. To do this, brake more which have been approved for Mercedes- sharply at a higher speed. The brake will Benz vehicles. Brake pads/linings which The first time the brakes are applied after grip better as a result. a long period of driving in heavy rain with- have not been approved for Mercedes- out braking, it is possible that: Benz may adversely affect the safety of your vehicle. A there will be a delayed braking re- sponse

A you will need to depress the brake ped- al more firmly

266 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Driving tips

Parking brake ! Overrun cut-off You can briefly apply the parking brake Do not drive faster than 40 km/h. You The fuel supply is cut off if the driver's foot when the vehicle is moving to achieve a could otherwise damage the brakes. is completely removed from the accelera- better braking effect between service in- tor pedal when the engine is overrunning. tervals. G Driving in wet conditions Drive at a speed of around 30 km/h on a Risk of accident dry and level road. Pull the parking brake If there is a certain amount of water on the lever up keeping the release knob pressed Make sure that other road users are not en- road surface, the vehicle may aquaplane, dangered when the brakes are applied in (R page 36) until the vehicle brakes no- even though: this way. ticeably. Hold the lever in this position for A you are driving at low speeds around ten seconds and then guide it fully The brake lamps do not light up when the back down again. parking brake is applied. A the tyre tread depth is sufficient For this reason, do not drive in tyre ruts and brake carefully.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 267 Operation Driving tips

Tyre grip Driving in winter Risk of injury G While you may still be able to control your G vehicle at a given speed on a dry road sur- Risk of accident If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, you face, you must reduce your speed on a wet must make sure that the area immediately Do not shift down for additional engine brak- surface to maintain the same degree of surrounding the vehicle, and in particular ing on a slippery road surface. The drive safety. next to the exhaust system, is kept free of wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle Pay particular attention to road conditions snow while the engine is running. Exhaust could skid. when the temperature is around freezing. fumes (including carbon monoxide) could otherwise get into the vehicle interior and, in If ice has formed on the road (e.g. due to high concentrations, could cause uncon- freezing fog), applying the brakes can sciousness or death. Make sure that there is cause a thin layer of water to form rapidly a sufficient flow of fresh air in to the vehicle on the surface of the ice. This layer of wa- immediately (e.g. slightly open the windows ter considerably reduces tyre grip. Drive on the lee side of the vehicle). with particular care in such weather condi- tions.

268 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Driving tips

Drive with particular care on icy roads. Off-road driving Avoid sudden acceleration, steering ma- Never allow the vehicle to roll backwards noeuvres and braking. when in neutral or with the clutch disen- Risk of accident G gaged. If you only use the brakes, you could If it seems likely that the vehicle is about to lose control of the vehicle. enter a skid or cannot be stopped at a low Drive slowly in rough terrain with which you Grains of sand, particles of dirt and other speed: are unfamiliar. This will make it easier to rec- abrasive materials can enter the brake sys- ognise unexpected obstacles and avoid 7 Select neutral. tem. This can lead to excessive wear and un- damage to the vehicle. predictable braking effect. 7 Move the selector lever to N. Do not perform U-turns on mountain roads. Have the brakes checked and cleaned after 7 Try to keep the vehicle under control The vehicle could tip. If a slope is too steep they have been exposed to dirt. There is oth- using corrective steering. for the vehicle, drive back in reverse gear. erwise the danger that there will not be You will find information on driving with Do not drive at an angle up steep inclines. sufficient braking effect available in an snow chains later in this section The vehicle could tip. If you drive up a steep emergency. You could therefore endanger (R page 278). incline at an angle and the vehicle threatens yourself and others. to tip, steer at once into the line of fall. Take the vehicle's centre of gravity into ac- count, especially if the vehicle has roof at- tachments or is carrying a load.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 269 Operation Driving tips

7 Read this section before travelling off- Rules for off-road driving A Shift the transfer case to LOW before road in your vehicle. driving off-road (R page 170). 7 Practise by travelling first over more Risk of injury G A Make sure that items of luggage and gentle off-road terrain. loads are stored safely and are well se- Make sure you secure loose objects in your The following driving systems are specially cured (R page 104). vehicle before starting a journey. These suited to off-road travel: A Always keep the engine running and in could otherwise be thrown about in the vehi- gear when driving on a downhill gradi- A Transfer case (R page 170) cle interior in the event of an accident, sharp ent. braking or sudden change in direction and A Differential locks (R page 173) you or other occupants could be injured. Se- A Drive slowly and evenly, if necessary at A 4-ETS (R page 72) cure objects in the luggage compartment a walking pace. where possible. A Ensure that the wheels are in contact Always use a safety net if you are carrying a with the ground at all times. load. However, the net cannot secure sharp A Drive with extreme care on unknown or heavy objects. off-road routes where visibility is poor. For safety reasons, get out of the vehi- cle first and survey the off-road route.

270 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Driving tips

A Check the depth of water before ford- Checklist for off-road driving Tyres and wheels ing. Engine oil level A Look out for obstacles such as rocks, Risk of accident G holes, tree stumps and furrows. A Check the engine oil level using the operating system (R page 254). The A Check tread depth and tyre pressure. A Always keep the side windows and the sliding sunroof* closed during the jour- ENGINE OIL LEVEL O.K. message must ap- A Check for damage and remove foreign ney. pear in the multi-function display. objects (e.g. small stones) from the tyre Only if this is the case is the engine tread. A Do not stray from marked routes or supplied with sufficient oil if the vehicle A Replace any missing valve caps. paths. is subjected to sharp inclines on off- A Replace dented or damaged wheels. road terrain. H A Check the spare wheel before the jour- Environmental note ney. Vehicle tool kit Protection of the environment is of primary importance. Treat nature with respect. Ob- A Check that the jack is in working order. serve all prohibiting signs. A Make certain that there is a nut wrench, a strong tow rope and a spade in the vehicle.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 271 Operation Driving tips

Tips for driving off-road Gradient: Maximum gradient climbing ability: The maximum gradient climbing ability is Mountainous terrain 80% if the transfer case is shifted to the A Follow the line of fall on slopes and LOW transfer range. steep inclines. i A Shift the transfer case to LOW before P00.00-3288-31 If the load on the front axle is reduced driving on extreme uphilland and down- when pulling away on a mountain slope, hill gradients ( page 170). R the front wheels have a tendency to A Engage the differential locks if neces- spin. 4-ETS recognises this and brakes sary (R page 174). the wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque is increased and it is easier to A Observe the warnings for off-road driv- The table shows the gradient with the max- pull away. ing (R page 269). imum payload.

A Drive slowly. 1 2 A Accelerate carefully and make sure Long-wheelbase 34° 29° that the wheels are gripping. station wagon A Avoid high engine speeds. Short-wheelbase 36° 27° A Select the automatic transmission shift station wagon range that is appropriate for the uphill Cabriolet 34° 26° gradient.

272 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Driving tips

Brow of hill A Make use of the engine braking power Fording to reduce speed. Brake gently if this is When driving up an uphill gradient, reduce insufficient. Ensure that the vehicle is pressure on the accelerator slightly imme- moving in the line of fall when doing so. diately before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of the vehicle's own impetus to A Shift the automatic transmission to travel over the brow. shift range before driving on steep 1 P00.00-3289-31 This style of driving prevents: downhill gradients. A Check that the brakes are working effi- A the vehicle lifting off the ground at the brow of the hill ciently after a long downhill journey.

A loss of tractive force i ABS is deactivated when the differential A Establish how deep and rough the wa- A the vehicle travelling too quickly down ter is before fording. the other side locks are engaged. This allows the front wheels to be tem- The water should be no deeper than Driving downhill porarily locked so that they can grip the 50 cm. loose surface more easily. However, A Drive slowly. 7 Switch off the auxiliary heating please note that locked wheels spin and (R page 193). RR A Do not drive at an angle down steep in- cannot be steered. clines. Steer into the line of fall and drive with the front wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and overturn.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 273 Operation Driving tips

A Shift the transfer case to LOW A Drive slowly and at an even speed Passing obstacles ( page 170). through the water. R Observe the following rules when driving A Engage the differential locks if neces- A Do not stop. over tree stumps, larger stones and other obstacles: sary (R page 174). There is a high degree of water resist- A Avoid high engine speeds. ance, the surface is slippery and in A Shift the transfer case to LOW some cases unstable. It is therefore dif- (R page 170). A Drive slowly. ficult and dangerous to pull away in the A Avoid high engine speeds. A Shift the automatic transmission to water. shift range 1 or 2. A Shift the automatic transmission to Ensure that there is no opportunity for A shift range 1. A Drive into the water where the ground a bow wave to form as you drive. is level and do not exceed walking A Drive very slowly. pace. A Clean any mud from the tyre tread after fording. A Pass straight over obstacles, keeping ! them to the centre, front wheel first A Apply the brakes to dry them after ford- then rear wheel. Under no circumstances should you ing. enter the water too quickly. The bow ! wave could cause water to enter and Obstacles could damage the floor of damage the engine and neighbouring the vehicle or chassis parts. Ask pas- assemblies. sengers to offer directions when driv- ing over large obstacles. Any damage to the vehicle always increases the risk of an accident.

274 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Driving tips

Driving on sand Ruts A If the route permits, where ruts are too deep drive with the wheels on one side A Shift the transfer case to LOW Observe the following rules when travelling on the middle section of turf. (R page 170). along ruts in off-road terrain or roads with loose gravel: A Avoid high engine speeds. Checklist after driving off-road A Shift the transfer case to LOW A Select the automatic transmission shift (R page 170). range that is appropriate for off-road Risk of accident G conditions (R page 166). A Avoid high engine speeds. If you feel the vehicle vibrate suddenly, hear A Drive quickly to overcome rolling re- A Shift the automatic transmission to sistance. shift range 1. driving noises or think that your vehicle has been damaged, switch on the hazard warn- The vehicle could otherwise dig itself A Drive slowly. ing lamps and slowly come to a stop in a into the sand. ! safe place. Check the tyres, vehicle under- If ruts are not too deep and your vehicle body and the engine compartment for dam- A Check that the ruts are not too deep has sufficient clearance: drive in the age and leakages. and that your vehicle has sufficient tracks of other vehicles. clearance, otherwise your vehicle If you think that the vehicle or the tyres are could: unsafe, have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop. A be damaged

A bottom out on the central ridge between the ruts and get stuck

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 275 Operation Driving tips

Travelling over rough terrain places greater A Check whether twigs or other parts of A Foreign objects can cause wheel imbal- demands on your vehicle than driving on plants have become trapped. ance and vibrations. If you detect normal roads. strong vibrations after off-road travel, These increase the risk of fire and can check for foreign objects in the wheels After travelling off-road check the vehicle. damage fuel pipes, brake hoses or the and if necessary remove them. In that way, you can detect damage rubber fittings of the axle joints and promptly and reduce the risk of an acci- drive shafts. A Damage to the vehicle reduces ride dent to yourself and other road users. comfort and creates the risk of an acci- A After the trip, examine the entire floor dent for yourself and other road users. A Shift the transfer case to HIGH assembly, tyres, bodywork structure, If in any doubt, have your vehicle (R page 170). steering, chassis and exhaust system checked at a qualified specialist work- immediately for damage. A Clean headlamps and rear lights and shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service check for any damage. A After driving for long periods across Centre. sand, mud, water or in similarly dirty A Clean the front and rear licence plates. conditions have the brake discs, A Clean the tyre treads with a water jet wheels, brake pads and axle joints and remove any foreign objects. checked and cleaned at a qualified spe- A Clean the tyres, wheel arches and un- cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz derbody with a water jet. Service Centre.

276 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Winter driving :Winter driving Have your vehicle winterproofed at the You will find information about diesel fuels onset of winter at a qualified specialist and low outside temperatures towards the Risk of accident G workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service front of this section (R page 249). Centre. You must replace winter tyres with a tread Also observe the notes about driving in depth of less than 4 mm immediately. They This service includes the following: winter (R page 268). are no longer suitable for winter use. A Engine oil change, Winter tyres if the current oil has not been approved Always observe the maximum permitted for winter use Use winter tyres at temperatures below +4 °C and on snow or ice-covered roads. speed specified for the winter tyres you A A check on the antifreeze/anti-corro- The maximum effect of the ABS, BAS, have fitted. If you fit winter tyres which sion concentration 4-ETS and ESP driving systems is only have a lower maximum permitted speed achieved with winter tyres. than that of the vehicle, affix an appropri- A Concentrated cleaning agent will be ate warning sign in the driver's field of vi- added to the windscreen and headlamp Use winter tyres of the same make and sion. You can obtain this from a qualified cleaning system washer fluid tread on all wheels to maintain safe hand- specialist workshop, such as a Mercedes- A Battery check ling characteristics. Benz Service Centre.

A A tyre change

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 277 Operation Winter driving

Snow chains A Use snow chains on all four wheels to Risk of accident G attain maximum traction and driving The maximum permissible speed of stability. Observe the legal require- 50 km/h for snow chains may only be If you fit the spare wheel when driving with ments in all countries concerned. winter tyres, please be aware that driving driven on snow. Adapt your driving style A Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for stability will be impaired owing to unstable accordingly where there is uneven snow safety reasons, you only use snow cornering characteristics caused by the dif- cover. If you are not driving on snow, re- chains that are suitable and have been ferent tyres. You should therefore adapt move the snow chains as soon as possible. approved by Mercedes-Benz. your driving style to suit these conditions i and drive carefully. You may obtain further information ESP can be deactivated when pulling from any Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- Have the spare wheel replaced at the near- away with snow chains (R page 74). tre. est qualified specialist workshop which This will help you to achieve a better has the necessary specialist knowledge and cutting effect. ! tools to carry out the work required. You must not fit snow chains to AMG Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a If you are intending to fit snow chains, tyres with a dimension of 285/55 R18. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- please observe the following points: pose. A Snow chains cannot be fitted on all In particular, work relevant to safety or on wheel/tyre combinations. safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

278 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Driving abroad :Driving abroad A comprehensive Mercedes-Benz service Symmetrical dipped-beam ! network is available to you both at home headlamps DaimlerChrysler recommends the use and abroad. The appropriate workshop di- of genuine Mercedes-Benz masking rectories are available from any Mercedes- In countries where vehicles are driven on sheets. Other masking sheets could Benz Service Centre. the opposite side of the road to that in the country in which the vehicle is registered, damage the headlamps. Damage Only low-octane fuel is available in certain you must change the headlamps to sym- caused by the use of other masking countries. metrical dipped beam. Oncoming traffic sheets is not covered by our warranty. You will find information on petrol grade on will be dazzled less. You can obtain infor- Remember to change the headlamps (R page 248), and diesel grade on mation from any Mercedes-Benz Service back to asymmetrical dipped-beam (R page 249). Centre. headlamps when you return to driving on the same side of the road as in the country in which the vehicle was regis- tered.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 279 Operation Trailer towing

Coupling a trailer 7 Place the trailer horizontally behind the Risk of accident G vehicle. The maximum noseweight of the trailer towbar on the ball neck is 140 kg (long- Make sure that no-one is present between i wheelbase station wagon) or 115 kg the vehicle and trailer when the vehicle is On vehicles without level control, the (short-wheelbase station wagon/ being reversed up to the trailer. height of the ball neck changes when Cabriolet). It must not exceed the value Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If the vehicle is loaded. In this case, you given on the trailer and the trailer tow should use a trailer with a height- hitch type plates. the trailer is not coupled to the towing vehi- cle correctly, the trailer may break away. adjustable drawbar. You will find the values: Ensure that the following values are not ex- A in the vehicle documents ceeded:

A on the trailer tow hitch type plate A Permissible trailer drawbar noseweight ! A Permissible trailer loads If possible, use a noseweight as close A Permissible rear axle load of the towing P31.10-2581-31 as possible to the maximum permissi- vehicle ble noseweight. However, you should A Permissible gross vehicle weight always use a minimum noseweight of 80 kg, otherwise the trailer may work loose. Trailer coupled up ready to drive

280 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Trailer towing

7 Couple the trailer. Driving with a trailer Your vehicle will have different handling characteristics when it is towing a trailer, ! The maximum permissible speed for compared to when it is driven without a Note that the payload and the rear axle vehicle/trailer combinations is 80 km/h trailer. The vehicle/trailer combination: load are reduced by the actual nose- in Germany. A is heavier weight. ! A has reduced acceleration and gradient You should also keep to the maximum 7 Shift the transfer case to LOW before climbing capability driving on steep uphill or downhill gra- speed of 80 km/h even in countries in which higher speeds are permitted for A has a longer braking distance dients (R page 170). vehicle/trailer combinations. A is more affected by gusts of side winds

A requires more sensitive steering

A consumes more fuel i When driving in mountainous terrain, engine output and gradient-climbing capability decrease with increasing alti- tude.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 281 Operation Trailer towing

Driving tips If the trailer begins to oscillate: G A Maintain greater distances than when A do not accelerate under any circum- Risk of accident travelling without a trailer. stances Do not uncouple a trailer with an overrun A Avoid braking suddenly. Apply the A do not turn the wheel to correct the line brake when the brake is engaged. Your hand brakes lightly at first to allow the trailer could otherwise become trapped between A brake if necessary to run on and then quickly increase the the bumper and drawbar. braking force. Risk of accident G A The vehicle's payload must be reduced according to the noseweight so that Do not under any circumstances attempt to the permissible rear axle weight is not draw out the vehicle/trailer combination by exceeded. accelerating. A The gradient-climbing capability from a standstill is correct for sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine, and with it its gradient-climbing capability from a standstill, decreases with in- creasing altitude.

282 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Service :Service Active Service System i i ASSYST, the Active Service System, in- The service due date will be displayed Periods when the battery is discon- forms you when the next service is due. in days or kilometres, depending on the nected are not recorded by the service distance driven. indicator. To make sure that you have A service due date is displayed approxi- the service carried out at the correct mately one month in advance. You will The time between service due dates time, you should therefore subtract any then see one of the following messages in depends on your style of driving. It in- periods of battery disconnection from the multi-function display when you are creases if you: the service due date displayed. driving or when the ignition is switched on: A drive with care and at moderate en- The service indicator does not provide SERVICE A IN xx DAYS gine speeds A information about the engine oil level. A SERVICE A IN xx km A avoid journeys which are too short Do not therefore confuse the service for the engine to reach its operating indicator with the : engine oil level A SERVICE A DUE NOW! temperature display. You can call these up separate- P54.30-6244-31 ly (R page 254). Englisch (NL, RU): P54.30-6244en-31 Französisch: P54.30-6244fr-31 Italienisch: P54.30-6244it-31 Spanisch: P54.30-6865sp-31

The SERVICE Aor SERVICE Bmessages pro- vide information about which type of serv- ice is due.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 283 Operation Service

Clearing the service indicator Missing the service due date i The service indicator goes out automatical- If you have missed the service due date, If you do not have the specified service ly after a few seconds. you will see one of the following messages carried out, you could be breaking the law. You may also clear the service indicator in the multi-function display: yourself. A SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY xx DAYS

7 Press the reset button on the left-hand A SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY xx km side of the instrument cluster You also hear a signal. (R page 19). A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, will reset the service indicator when the service has been carried out.

284 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Service

Calling up the service due date Resetting the service indicator 7 Press the reset button located on the left-hand side of the instrument cluster 7 Switch on the ignition. If your vehicle is ever serviced other than (R page 19) for a few seconds. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, you The standard display appears in the can reset the service indicator yourself. The following message appears in the multi-function display ( page 129). R multi-function display: k j 7 Switch on the ignition. 7 Press the or button on the DO YOU WANT TO RESET SERVICE INTER- multi-function display repeatedly until The standard display appears in the VAL? CONFIRM BY USING RESET BUTTON the 9 or ´ service symbol ap- multi-function display (R page 129). Press the reset button to confirm. pears with the service due date. 7 7 Press the k or j button on the The service indicator now displays the multi-function display repeatedly until new value. the 9 or ´ service symbol ap- pears with the service due date. i If you have reset the service indicator accidentally, a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Serv- ice Centre, will be able to update it again.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 285 Operation Care

The value of your vehicle will be retained by Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas af- regular and proper care. The best way to fected by corrosion and damage caused by Risk of poisoning G protect your vehicle from harmful environ- neglected or inadequate care cannot al- mental influences is to wash it and use pro- ways be completely remedied. If this is the Always follow the instructions for using the tective treatments regularly. case, visit a qualified specialist workshop, care products. e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. i Always keep care products tightly closed Repair damage caused by loose chippings and out of the reach of children. Mercedes-Benz recommends the use and remove the following substances im- of Mercedes-Benz care products. They mediately: are specially designed for Mercedes- Environmental note H Benz vehicles and are state of the art. A Insect remains You may obtain Mercedes-Benz care A Bird droppings Dispose of empty containers, cleaning products from any Mercedes-Benz cloths and polishing wads in an environmen- Service Centre. A Tree resin tally-responsible manner. A Oils and grease A Fuels

A Tar stains

286 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Care

Caring for the exterior of your ! The minimum distance between the high- pressure jet and the object to be cleaned vehicle Fold in the exterior mirrors before us- must be approximately 30 cm. ing an automatic car wash. Station wagon Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzle i around when cleaning your vehicle. Do not Automatic car wash direct it at door joints, air spring bellows, Make sure that exterior mirrors are ful- electrical components, connectors or You can clean the vehicle in an automatic ly folded out when you leave the auto- seals. car wash from the very start. It is prefera- matic car wash. They could otherwise ble to use automatic car washes that do vibrate. not have brushes. Cabriolet If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it be- High-pressure cleaners ! fore you drive into the car wash. ! Do not clean the vehicle in an automat- After using an automatic car wash, wipe off ic car wash. Do not use high-pressure cleaners with wax from the windscreen and the wiper round-spray jets for cleaning the tyres. Do not clean the Cabriolet soft top us- blades. This will prevent smears on the You could otherwise damage the tyres. ing a high-pressure cleaner. windscreen. Replace damaged tyres. Do not use sharp objects to remove snow and ice.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 287 Operation Care

The following methods are sufficient if the Intensive cleaning using MB Cabriolet top Cleaning the windscreen and wiper soft top is only lightly soiled: care agents kit can restore these dirt-re- blades pellent properties. A dry cleaning 7 Make sure that the windscreen wipers The soft top seams may start to leak either or are switched off (R page 41). as a result of ageing or of incorrect care A rinsing off with clean water and cleaning. In this case, have the soft top Risk of injury G Do not use: seams resealed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Remove the key from the ignition lock be- A petrol or diesel Centre. fore cleaning the windscreen or the wiper A thinner i blades. The windscreen wipers could other- wise be set in motion and injure you. A tar or stain remover Cover the soft top with a suitable cover A other organic solvents if you are leaving the vehicle parked in the open for any length of time. 7 Fold the wiper arms away from the Frequent cleaning impairs the dirt-repel- windscreen until you feel them engage. lent properties of the soft top. 7 You can now clean the windscreen and wiper blades.

7 Fold the windscreen wipers back be- fore turning the key in the ignition lock.

288 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Operation Care

Cleaning the headlamps Cleaning the trailer tow hitch* Cleaning the ultrasound reversing aid* sensors ! Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty. Only use windscreen washer fluid that 7 Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth is suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Un- or a brush. suitable windscreen washer fluid may 7 Remove traces of rust with a wire cause damage to the plastic lenses of brush. the headlamps. P88.20-2554-31 Do not use: ! Do not clean the ball coupling with a A a dry cloth high-pressure cleaner. Do not use any A abrasive products solvents.

A solvents 1 Sensors 7 You should also lightly oil or grease the A cleaning agents which contain sol- coupling ball after cleaning. 7 Clean bumper sensors 1 with water, vents car shampoo and a soft cloth. i You could otherwise scratch or damage ! the plastic lamp lenses. Your Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will also carry out this maintenance work. Do not use dry, coarse or hard cloths. Do not scrub. You will otherwise scratch or damage the sensors.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 289 290 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting Display messages Where will I find...? Opening/closing in an emergency Changing bulbs Replacing the wiper blades Flat tyre Battery Jump-starting Towing Fuses

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 291 Practical advice Troubleshooting

You will find practical help for possible problems in the "Practical advice" section.

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The anti-theft alarm system* is suddenly You opened the vehicle using the emergency Switch off the anti-theft alarm system*: triggered. key element while the anti-theft alarm sys- 7 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the tem* was still primed. key. or

7 Insert the key in the ignition lock.

A warning sounds. A message appears in the multi-function dis- 7 Observe the notes (R page 316). play.

You are driving with the parking brake on. 7 Release the parking brake (R page 36). You have forgotten to switch off the lights. 7 Turn the light switch to 0. You did not move the selector lever to P after 7 Move the selector lever to P. switching off the engine and you opened the driver's door.

292 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions You wish to leave your vehicle parked up for 7 Disconnect the battery. a long period. 7 Consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

The engine is not running smoothly and it is An ignition cable could be damaged. 7 Do not use too much throttle. misfiring. There could be a malfunction in the engine 7 Have the cause eliminated immedi- Unburned petrol may flow into the catalytic electronics. ately at a qualified specialist work- converter and cause damage. shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

The preglow indicator lamp does not light The preglow system has malfunctioned. 7 Have the cause checked immediately up when the key is in position 2. at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

The headlamps are misted up on the inside. High degree of humidity. 7 If you drive for a short distance with the lights on, the headlamps will no longer be misted up.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 293 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The engine will not start. There could be a malfunction in the engine 7 Turn the ignition back to 0 before at- electronics. tempting to start the engine again.

There could be a malfunction in the petrol 7 Repeat the starting procedure supply. (R page 37). Remember that exces- sively long attempts to start the en- gine will drain the battery.

7 If the on-board voltage is too low, try jump-starting (R page 377).

7 If the engine does not start after sev- eral starting attempts, consult a qual- ified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Vehicles with diesel engines: the fuel tank 7 Bleed the fuel system (R page 251). has run dry.

294 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The coolant display shows a temperature The coolant is too hot and the engine is no 7 Stop at the earliest opportunity and above +120 °C. longer being sufficiently cooled. allow the engine and coolant to cool down.

7 Check the coolant level and top up the coolant if necessary (R page 258).

You have had an accident. The vehicle is 7 Do not start the engine under any cir- losing fuel. cumstances.

7 Inform a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

You have had an accident. You are unable 7 Inform a qualified specialist work- to determine the extent of the damage. shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. You have had an accident. You are unable 7 Turn the key back to position 0 in the to determine any damage to: ignition lock and start the engine as usual. A the major components

A the fuel system

A the engine mountings

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 295 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Automatic transmission

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions Problems with gearshifts. The transmission is losing oil. 7 Have the transmission checked im- mediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

The acceleration capability is deteriorating. The transmission is operating in emergency 7 Stop the vehicle. mode. You can only shift to 2nd and reverse The transmission will not shift. 7 Move the selector lever to P. gear. 7 Switch off the engine.

7 Wait at least ten seconds before re- starting the engine.

7 Shift the selector lever to D (2nd gear) or R.

7 Have the transmission checked im- mediately at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

296 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Soft top switch*

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The Cabriolet soft top does not open or The soft top closing procedure was interrupt- 7 Wait about five seconds and then re- close. ed. peat the process.

The fuse is defective. 7 Check the fuse (R page 383) and re- place it if necessary.

The hydraulic pump has overheated. 7 Wait a few minutes and then repeat the process. RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 297 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The Cabriolet soft top does not open or The control unit is malfunctioning because 7 Move the key to position 0 and back close. the closing procedure was interrupted. to 2 in the ignition lock.

7 Try to close the soft top again. If it still fails to close electrically:

7 Close the soft top manually (R page 354).

7 Have the system checked at a quali- fied specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

298 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Keys

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The key cannot be turned in the ignition The key has been in position 0 in the ignition 7 Remove the key and re-insert it in the lock. lock for a considerable period of time. ignition lock.

The starter battery is discharged. 7 Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary.

7 Jump-starting may be performed.

You cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with The batteries in the key are discharged. 7 Check the batteries in the key the key. (R page 84) and replace them if nec- essary (R page 349).

The key is faulty. 7 Open the door with the emergency key element (R page 348).

7 Open the rear door with the emergen- cy key element (R page 348).

7 Have the key checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- Benz Service Centre.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 299 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The battery check lamp on the key does not The batteries in the key are discharged. 7 Change the batteries (R page 349). light up when tested. You can obtain batteries from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, for example.

You have lost the key. 7 Have the key cancelled immediately at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

7 Report the loss immediately to the ve- hicle insurers.

7 If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy to provide you with a replace- ment.

300 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions You have lost the emergency key element. 7 Report the loss immediately to the ve- hicle insurers.

7 If necessary, have the manual locks changed too. Any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be happy to provide you with a replace- ment.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 301 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Windscreen wipers

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The windscreen wipers are jammed. The windscreen wipers are jammed, e.g. due 7 For safety reasons, you should first re- to leaves or snow. The wiper motor has been move the key from the ignition lock. deactivated. Then remove the cause of the ob- struction.

7 Switch on the windscreen wipers again.

The windscreen wipers fail completely at 7 Select the next highest wiper speed speed I. on the combination switch.

7 Have the windscreen wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

302 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Lamps in the switches and buttons

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions One or both of the lamps in the switch for There is insufficient voltage because too The seat heating* will automatically the seat heating* are flashing. many consumers are switched on. The seat switch back on as soon as there is suffi- heating* has switched itself off automatical- cient voltage again. ly.

The indicator lamp in the ° button on The air-conditioning system is losing refriger- 7 Have the air-conditioning system the Thermatic control panel lights up or ant. The compressor has switched itself off. checked at a qualified specialist work- flashes when you press the button. The cooling system cannot be activated. shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The rear window heating switches off too There is insufficient voltage because too The rear window heating will automatical- soon and the indicator lamp is flashing. many consumers are switched on. The rear ly switch back on as soon as there is suf- window heating* has switched itself off auto- ficient voltage again. matically.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 303 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the cen- A child seat is fitted to the front-passenger tre console lights up. seat. The front-passenger airbag has been deactivated.

If there is no child seat fitted to the front- 7 Only use the rearward-facing child passenger seat, the child seat recognition seat on the rear seat. has malfunctioned. 7 Have the automatic child seat recog- nition checked at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

304 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions The TeleAid* indicator lamp in the overhead The emergency call system has malfunc- 7 Have the TeleAid* system checked at control panel lights up while you are driving. tioned. a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If the indicator lamp goes out again after some time, the system has developed a tem- porary fault.

The TeleAid* indicator lamp in the overhead The emergency call system has malfunc- 7 Have the TeleAid* system checked at control panel does not light up after the ig- tioned. a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a nition has been switched on. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 305 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions A warning sounds when the selector lever is You have attached a trailer. moved to position and none of the seg- R You have inserted an adapter plug in the trail- 7 Remove the adapter plug. ments in the ultrasound reversing aid* light er socket. up. The ultrasound reversing aid* func- tions again as normal.

A deep warning tone sounds when the vehi- The ultrasound reversing aid* sensors are 7 Clean the ultrasound reversing aid* cle is reversing. dirty or are malfunctioning. sensors (R page 289).

7 Switch on the ignition again.

This may be caused by an external radio or 7 Check the ultrasound reversing aid* ultrasound source. The ultrasound reversing at another location. aid* switches itself off.

A deep warning tone sounds when the vehi- The ultrasound reversing aid* is malfunction- 7 Have the ultrasound reversing aid* cle is reversing, or no warning sounds and ing and has switched itself off. checked as soon as possible at a none of the segments lights up. qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

306 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions v The yellow ABS, ESP, 4-ETS You have engaged the differential locks. ABS, 7 ABS, ESP and BAS are re-activated warning lamp lights up while you ESP and BAS have been deactivated. once you have disengaged the differ- are driving. ential locks. 7 Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (R page 316).

ESP is deactivated. There is an increased risk 7 Re-activate ESP (R page 75). of accident. 7 You should always adapt your driving style to the current road and weather conditions.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 307 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions v The yellow ABS, ESP, 4-ETS ESP or traction control is in operation be- 7 Only use as much throttle as neces- warning lamp lights up while you cause at least one of the wheels has reached sary when pulling away. its tyre grip limit. are driving. 7 Take your foot off the accelerator ped- al again while driving.

7 Adapt your driving style to the current road and weather conditions.

7 Do not deactivate ESP, otherwise there would be an increased risk of accident (for exceptions (R page 74)).

308 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions - The yellow ABS indicator lamp You have engaged the differential locks. 7 ABS is re-activated once you have dis- lights up while you are driving. engaged the differential locks. ABS has been deactivated due to undervolt- 7 Switch off all consumers which are age. Perhaps the battery is not being not required. charged. ABS is available again if the battery voltage increases.

7 Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (R page 316). RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 309 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions - The yellow ABS indicator lamp ABS has been deactivated due to a malfunc- 7 Consult a qualified specialist work- lights up while you are driving. tion. ESP, BAS and 4-ETS have also been de- shop as soon as possible which has activated. Other systems, e.g. the navigation the necessary specialist knowledge system* or the ultrasound reversing aid*, and tools to carry out the work re- may fail if the ABS control unit malfunctions. quired. Mercedes-Benz recommends The normal effect of the brake system is still that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service available without ABS. Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety- related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of accident.

7 Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (R page 316).

310 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions 3 The red brake system warning There is insufficient brake fluid in the reser- 7 Risk of accident. Do not drive on. Con- lamp lights up while you are driv- voir. sult a qualified specialist workshop ing and a warning sounds. which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz rec- ommends that you use a Mercedes- Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

7 Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (R page 316). RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 311 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions 3 The red brake system warning You are driving with the parking brake on. 7 Release the parking brake lamp lights up while you are driv- (R page 36). ing and a warning sounds. 7 Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (R page 316). 1 The red restraint system warning The restraint systems have malfunctioned. 7 Drive on carefully to a qualified spe- lamp does not light up when the The airbags or belt tensioners could be trig- cialist workshop which has the neces- key is in position 1. gered unintentionally, or not at all in an acci- sary specialist knowledge and tools dent. to carry out the work required. The red restraint system warning Mercedes-Benz recommends that you lamp flickers or lights up while use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre you are driving. for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qual- ified specialist workshop.

312 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions 1 The red restraint system warning The red restraint system warning lamp is 7 Drive on carefully to a qualified spe- lamp does not light up when the faulty. cialist workshop which has the neces- key is in position 2. sary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qual- ified specialist workshop.

< The red seat belt warning lamp The warning lamp is to remind you to fasten 7 Put on your seat belt. lights up after starting the engine your seat belt. and a warning sounds. The fuel reserve warning lamp The fuel level has fallen below the reserve 7 Refuel at the nearest filling station flashes while you are driving. mark. (R page 247). 7 Observe the additional messages in the multi-function display (R page 316).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 313 Practical advice Troubleshooting

Problem Possible cause Suggested solutions ? The yellow engine diagnostic in- There is a malfunction 7 Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist work- dicator lamp lights up while you A in the fuel injection system are driving. shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service A in the ignition system, or Centre. A in the exhaust system The emission limit values may have been ex- ceeded and the engine may be running in emergency mode.

The fuel tank has run dry. 7 Start the engine three to four times af- ter refuelling.

7 Emergency mode will be cancelled. You do not need to have your vehicle checked.

314 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages :Display messages The control system displays warnings or If you select the Malfunction memory malfunctions in the multi-function display. menu in the operating system Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a ( page 137), both acknowledged and un- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- Certain messages are accompanied by an R acknowledged messages will be shown. pose. In particular, work relevant to safety alarm or a continuous tone. or on safety-related systems must be car- High priority messages are highlighted in G ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. red in the display. These messages are Risk of accident printed in red in the following tables. No messages are displayed if the instrument i Act in accordance with the messages and cluster or the multi-function display has mal- All the indicator lamps and the multi- observe the additional notes in this Own- functioned. Systems which seriously impair function display are activated when you er's Manual. the handling characteristics could have turn the key to position 2 in the ignition failed. lock. Check their function before com- A You can acknowledge lower priority mencing a journey. messages with one of the buttons on Contact a qualified specialist workshop the steering wheel or with the reset which has the necessary specialist know- The following pages show all the display button. These are then stored in the ledge and tools to carry out the work re- messages. So that you can find the rele- malfunction memory. quired. vant message more easily, the messages A The highest priority messages cannot are divided up as follows: be acknowledged and are automatical- ly stored in the malfunction memory. A Text messages from (R page 316) on- wards in alphabetical order

A Symbol messages from (R page 322) onwards

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 315 Practical advice Display messages

Text messages

Display messages Possible cause Possible solution ABS NOT AVAILABLE You have engaged the differential 7 ABS is re-activated once you have disen- DISABLING ACTIVE locks. gaged the differential locks.

ABS SYSTEM ABS has malfunctioned. 7 Drive on carefully. ABS VISIT WORKSHOP! The normal effect of the brake sys- 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- tem is available without ABS. diately which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G

316 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display message Possible cause Possible solution ABS VISIT WORKSHOP! ABS or the ABS display has mal- 7 Drive on carefully. DISPLAY FAULTY: functioned. 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- diately which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 317 Practical advice Display messages

Display message Possible cause Possible solution BAS BRAKE ASSIST BAS has been deactivated due to a 7 Drive on carefully. VISIT WORKSHOP! malfunction. 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- The normal effect of the brake sys- diately which has the necessary specialist tem is available without BAS. knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G

318 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display message Possible cause Possible solution BAS VISIT WORKSHOP! BAS or the BAS display has mal- 7 Drive on carefully. DISPLAY FAULTY: functioned. 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- diately which has the necessary specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G EPC ELEC. POW. CONTROL There is a malfunction in the diesel 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- VISIT WORKSHOP! engine electronics. The engine pow- diately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- er output is reduced. tre.

7 Do not drive at full throttle and do not ex- ceed an engine speed of 2,500 rpm.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 319 Practical advice Display messages

Display message Possible cause Possible solution ESP ELEC. STABIL. PROG. ESP, ABS and BAS have been deac- 7 Turn the steering wheel from full lock to full NOT AVAILABLE tivated following a battery voltage lock and then back to the centre position. supply interruption. The system The system is reset. The message will go must be reset. out.

ESP, ABS and BAS are temporarily 7 Drive a short distance at a speed of over unavailable because the system's 20 km/h. self-diagnosis feature has not yet The message will go out. been deactivated. ESP ELEC. STABIL. PROG. ESP, ABS and BAS have been deac- 7 Drive on carefully. VISIT WORKSHOP! tivated due to a malfunction or volt- 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- age supply interruption. The normal diately which has the necessary specialist effect of the brake system is still knowledge and tools to carry out the work available without these systems. required. Mercedes-Benz recommends If ABS has also malfunctioned, the that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service engine power may be reduced. Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G

320 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display message Possible cause Possible solution ESP VISIT WORKSHOP! ESP or the ESP display has malfunc- 7 Drive on carefully. DISPLAY FAULTY: tioned. 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- The normal effect of the brake sys- diately which has the necessary specialist tem is available. knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 321 Practical advice Display messages

Symbol message

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution # UNDERVOLTAGE The vehicle battery has insufficient 7 Start the engine. ENGINE ON voltage.

UNDERVOLTAGE The vehicle battery has insufficient 7 Switch off all consumers which are not re- SWITCH CONSUMERS OFF! voltage. quired.

BATTERY/ALTERNATOR The battery was charged using a 7 Have the battery checked at a qualified VISIT WORKSHOP! battery charger or was jump-start- specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz ed. Service Centre.

The battery is no longer being 7 Stop immediately and check the charged. Possible causes: poly-V-belt.

A Faulty alternator If it is torn:

A Torn poly-V-belt 7 Do not drive any further.

7 Consult a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If it is OK:

7 Drive immediately to a qualified spe- cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

322 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution 3 BRAKE FLUID There is insufficient brake fluid in 7 Stop the vehicle immediately, observing VISIT WORKSHOP! the reservoir. the road and traffic conditions.

7 Do not drive any further.

7 Consult a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowl- edge and tools to carry out the work re- quired. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work rele- vant to safety or on safety-related systems must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not top up the brake fluid. This will not rectify the fault. Otherwise, there is a risk of an accident. G 3 BRAKE PAD WEAR The brake pads have reached their 7 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as VISIT WORKSHOP! wear limits. possible.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 323 Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution ( DRIVER'S SEAT The driver's seat backrest was not 7 Lock the driver's seat backrest again LOCK! locked properly. (R page 96).

FR. PASSENGER SEAT The front-passenger seat backrest 7 Lock the front-passenger seat backrest LOCK! was not locked properly. again (R page 96). ! PARKING BRAKE You are driving with the parking 7 Release the parking brake (R page 36). RELEASE PARKING BRAKE! brake on. ì TEL ENTER PIN You have not yet entered the PIN for 7 Enter the PIN for your SIM card your telephone. (R page 159). FUNCTION You have inadvertently pressed the NOT AVAILABLE! ì or í button on the multi- function steering wheel, even though your vehicle is not equipped with a telephone*. Ê BOOT OPEN! The rear door is open. 7 Close the rear door.

324 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution < DRIVER'S SEAT BELT You have not fastened your seat 7 Put on your seat belt. PLEASE FASTEN BELT! belt. The message reminds you to fasten your seat belt.

FR. PASS. SEAT BELT You have not fastened your seat 7 Put on your seat belt. PLEASE FASTEN BELT! belt. The message reminds you to fasten your seat belt.

SEAT BELT SYSTEM The seat belt system has malfunc- 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- VISIT WORKSHOP! tioned. diately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- tre.

COOLANT The coolant level is too low. 7 Top up the coolant (R page 258). B CHECK LEVEL! 7 If you are having to top up the coolant fre- quently, have the engine checked at a qual- ified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- Benz Service Centre.

COOLANT The fan is faulty. The coolant is not 7 Keep an eye on the coolant temperature VISIT WORKSHOP! being sufficiently cooled. display (R page 134).

7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- diately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- tre. RR

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 325 Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution COOLANT The poly-V-belt may be torn. Stop immediately and check the poly-V-belt. B STOP, ENGINE OFF! If it is torn:

7 Do not drive any further.

7 Consult a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If it is OK:

7 Do not start the engine until the message has gone out, otherwise you could damage the engine.

7 Keep an eye on the coolant temperature (R page 134).

7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- diately, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- tre.

326 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . DIPPED BEAM, L The left-hand dipped-beam head- 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! lamp is faulty. 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

DIPPED BEAM, R The right-hand dipped-beam head- 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! lamp is faulty. 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

TRAILER TURN SIGNAL, L The left-hand trailer turn signal 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! lamp is faulty.

TRAILER TURN SIGNAL, R The right-hand trailer turn signal 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! lamp is faulty.

TRAILER BRAKE LAMP The trailer brake light is faulty. 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP!

TRAILER TAIL LIGHT, L The left-hand trailer tail light is 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! faulty.

TRAILER TAIL LIGHT, R The right-hand trailer tail light is 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! faulty.

AUTOM. LIGHT ON You have left the key in the ignition 7 Remove the key. RR REMOVE KEY! lock.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 327 Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . REAR TURN SIGNAL, L The rear left-hand turn signal lamp 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! is faulty.

REAR TURN SIGNAL, R The rear right-hand turn signal lamp 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! is faulty.

ADD. TURN SIG LAMP, RH The left-hand turn signal lamp on 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop as CHECK LAMP! the exterior mirror is faulty. You will soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz not see this message unless all the Service Centre. LEDs have blown.

ADD. TURN SIG LAMP, LH The right-hand turn signal lamp on 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop as CHECK LAMP! the exterior mirror is faulty. You will soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz not see this message unless all the Service Centre. LEDs have blown.

328 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . TURN SIGNAL, F, L The front left-hand turn signal lamp 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! is faulty. Another bulb adopts the SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! function.

TURN SIGNAL F, R The front right-hand turn signal 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! lamp is faulty. Another bulb adopts SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! the function.

BRAKE LAMP The brake lamp lights up after a de- 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop as VISIT WORKSHOP! lay, or is continuously lit. soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

TRAILER BRAKE LAMP The brake lamp on the trailer lights 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop as VISIT WORKSHOP! up after a delay, or is continuously soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz lit. Service Centre.

LICENSE PLATE LAMP, L The left-hand licence plate lamp is 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! faulty.

LICENCE PLATE LAMP, R The right-hand licence plate lamp is 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. RR CHECK LAMP! faulty.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 329 Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . LIGHTS The lights are switched on and the 7 Switch off the lights. SWITCH OFF LIGHTS! key is in position 0 in the ignition lock.

FRONT FOGLAMP, L The front left-hand foglamp is 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! faulty.

FRONT FOGLAMP, R The front right-hand foglamp is 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! faulty.

SWITCH OFF A lamp is faulty. The lamp adopts 7 Switch off the rear foglamp. REAR FOGLAMP the function of another lamp. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

SWITCH OFF The rear foglamp is faulty. 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP!

FR. LEFT PARKG LAMP The front left-hand parking lamp is 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! faulty. Another bulb adopts the SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! function.

FR. RIGHT PARKG LAMP The front right-hand parking lamp is 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! faulty. Another bulb adopts the SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON! function.

330 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . REVERSING LAMP The reversing light is faulty. 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP!

TAIL LIGHT, L The left-hand tail lamp is faulty. An- 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! other bulb adopts the function. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

TAIL LIGHT, R The right-hand tail lamp is faulty. 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! Another bulb adopts the function. SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

LIGHT SENSOR The light sensor is faulty. The light 7 Reset the light to manual operation in the VISIT WORKSHOP! switches on automatically. operating system (R page 145).

7 Switch the lighting on and off using the light switch (R page 115).

MAIN BEAM, L The left-hand main-beam headlamp 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! is faulty.

MAIN BEAM, R The right-hand main-beam head- 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! lamp is faulty.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 331 Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution . BRAKE LAMP, L The left-hand brake lamp is faulty. 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP!

BRAKE LAMP, R The right-hand brake lamp is faulty. 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP!

3RD BRAKE LAMP The third brake lamp is faulty. You 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop as CHECK LAMP! will not see this message unless all soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz the LEDs have blown. Service Centre.

SIDELIGHT, L 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

SIDELIGHT, R 7 Change the bulb as soon as possible. CHECK LAMP! SUBSTITUTE LAMP ON!

VISIT WORKSHOP! The lighting display has failed. 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop as DISPLAY DEFECTIVE soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

332 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution O BONNET OPEN! You are driving with the bonnet 7 Close the bonnet (R page 253). open. ENGINE AIR CLEANER The engine air cleaner is clogged 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop as VISIT WORKSHOP! and must be cleaned. soon as possible, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. : ENGINE OIL LEVEL The engine oil level is too low. 7 Check the engine oil level and top up the CHECK LEVEL! engine oil if necessary (R page 254).

ENGINE OIL LEVEL There is no oil left in the engine. 7 Stop the vehicle immediately, observing STOP, ENGINE OFF! There is a danger of engine damage. the road and traffic conditions.

7 Switch off the engine.

7 Top up the engine oil and check the engine oil level (R page 254).

ENGINE OIL LEVEL You have added too much engine 7 Siphon off the oil. Observe legal require- REDUCE OIL LEVEL! oil. There is a risk of damaging the ments. engine or catalytic converter.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 333 Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution : ENGINE OIL The engine oil level has dropped to 7 Check the engine oil level (R page 254) VISIT WORKSHOP! a critical level. and top up with oil if necessary.

7 If you are having to top up the engine oil frequently, have the engine checked for any leaks at a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- tre.

There is water in the oil. 7 Have the oil checked.

ENGINE OIL LEVEL The measurement system is faulty. 7 Have the measuring system checked at a VISIT WORKSHOP! qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

334 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution 1 RESTRAINT SYSTEM The restraint systems have mal- 7 Drive on carefully. VISIT WORKSHOP! functioned. The airbags and belt 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- tensioners could be triggered unin- diately which has the necessary specialist tentionally, or not at all in the event knowledge and tools to carry out the work of an accident. required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. F REPLACE KEY The key is no longer working. 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a VISIT WORKSHOP! Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 335 Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution L TELEAID One or more of the main TeleAid* 7 Have TeleAid* checked at a qualified spe- VISIT WORKSHOP! functions are faulty. cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

TELEAID BATTERY The TeleAid* emergency power bat- 7 Have TeleAid* checked at a qualified spe- VISIT WORKSHOP! tery is faulty. If the vehicle's battery cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz is also discharged, TeleAid* does Service Centre. not function. Ñ SPEEDTRONIC/ Speedtronic or the cruise control 7 Have Speedtronic and the cruise control CRUISE CONTROL system are faulty. checked at a qualified specialist workshop, VISIT WORKSHOP! e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. A RESERVE FUEL The fuel level has fallen below the 7 Refuel at the nearest filling station VISIT FILLING STATION reserve mark. (R page 247). J DOOR OPEN! You wish to set off but not all the 7 Close the doors. doors are closed.

336 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution W WASHER FLUID The washer fluid level has gone 7 Top up the washer fluid (R page 259). CHECK LEVEL! down to about 1/3 of the reservoir capacity. G VISIT WORKSHOP! The displays for several systems 7 Drive on carefully. DISPLAY FAULTY: have failed. 7 Visit a qualified specialist workshop imme- This could mean that some systems diately which has the necessary specialist have also failed. knowledge and tools to carry out the work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose. In particular, work relevant to safety or on safety-related sys- tems must be carried out at a qualified spe- cialist workshop. Otherwise, there is an increased risk of ac- cident.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 337 Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution ± VISIT WORKSHOP! Some electronic systems can no 7 Have the electronic systems checked at a DISPLAY FAULTY: longer supply information to the op- qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a erating system. The following sys- Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. tems may have failed:

A Coolant temperature gauge

A Rev counter

A Cruise control and Speedtronic displays

338 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Display messages

Display symbol Display message Possible cause Possible solution TC SHIFT The gearshifting process was abort- 7 Carry out the gearshifting procedure again ABORTED ed because of an error. (R page 170).

TC SHIFT CONDITIONS One or more transfer case shift con- 7 Carry out the gearshifting procedure again NOT FULFILLED ditions have not been met. (R page 170). TC IN NEUTRAL The transfer case is in neutral. 7 Shift the transfer case to the HIGH or LOW shift range as required (R page 170).

TRANSFER CASE The transfer case is faulty. 7 Do not perform any transfer case gear- VISIT WORKSHOP! shifts.

7 Have the transfer case checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 339 Practical advice Where will I find...?

Warning triangle, first-aid kit and Long-wheelbase station wagon Setting up the warning triangle vehicle tool kit Warning triangle i The warning triangle is secured under- Check the expiry dates on the first-aid neath the rear bench seat. kit contents once a year and replace them if necessary. P58.00-2031-31 aus Ba. 209 Observe national legal requirements when setting up the warning triangle.

Comply with the safety precautions in the P58.10-2059-31 "Flat tyre" section (R page 367) when us- 1 Stand ing the jack. 2 Reflectors 3 Press stud

7 Fold stand 1 out to the sides. 1 Warning triangle 7 Pull reflectors 2 upwards to form a tri- 2 Retainers angle. 7 Open retainers 2 and remove warning 7 Secure reflectors 2 using press-stud 1 triangle . 3.

340 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Where will I find...?

First-aid kit Vehicle tool kit Jack The first-aid kit is located in the stowage The vehicle tool kit is located under a cover The jack is underneath the rear bench well in the driver's door. in the rear footwell. seat.

P86.10-2087-31 P86.10-2061-31 P86.10-2062-31

1 First-aid kit 1 Cover 1 Cover 2 Vehicle tool kit wallet 2 Retainer 3 Jack 7 Fold cover 1 to the side. 7 Fold the rear bench seat forwards 7 Pull the vehicle tool kit 2 out by the tab. (R page 100). 7 Open cover 1.

7 Open retainer 2 and remove jack 3.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 341 Practical advice Where will I find...?

Short-wheelbase station wagon 7 Take out warning triangle 2 or vehicle 7 Open cover 1. tool kit 3. 7 Take out first-aid kit 2. Warning triangle and vehicle tool kit i The warning triangle and the vehicle tool i Setting up the warning triangle kit are located in the luggage compartment Short-wheelbase station wagon with ( page 340). behind the left-hand side trim. R stowage boxes*: The warning triangle and the vehicle First-aid kit tool kit are located in the left-hand The first-aid kit is located in the luggage stowage box. The first-aid kit is located compartment behind the right-hand side in the right-hand stowage box. trim. P58.10-2060-31

P86.10-2063-31 1 Cover 2 Warning triangle 3 Vehicle tool kit wallet

7 Open cover 1. 1 Cover 2 First-aid kit

342 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Where will I find...?

Jack 7 Move the seat back (R page 28).

The jack is located under a cover in front of 7 Remove pins 1 from sockets 2. the front-passenger seat. 7 Remove sockets 2 from cover 3. 7 Remove cover 3. P58.10-2072-31

P58.10-2073-31

1 Strap 2 Retainer 3 Jack 1 1 Pins 7 Pull strap upwards and unhook it 2 2 Sockets from retainer . 3 Cover 7 Remove jack 3.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 343 Practical advice Where will I find...?

Cabriolet 7 Fold handle 1 out in the direction of 7 Take out warning triangle 1, first-aid the arrow. kit 2 or vehicle tool kit 3. Warning triangle, first-aid kit and vehicle 7 Turn handle 1 clockwise and fold cov- tool kit i er 2 upwards in the direction of the ar- Setting up the warning triangle The warning triangle, the first-aid kit and row. ( page 340). the vehicle tool kit are located in the tail- R gate under a cover. Jack The jack is located under a cover in front of the front-passenger seat (R page 343). P86.10-2065-31

P86.10-2064-31

1 Warning triangle 2 First-aid kit 1 Handle 3 Vehicle tool kit wallet 2 Cover

7 Open the tailgate (R page 89).

344 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Where will I find...?

Fire extinguisher* 7 Pull lug 1 upwards. CD changer* The fire extinguisher is located at the front 7 Take out fire extinguisher 2. The CD changer is located in the left-hand under the driver's seat. side of the luggage compartment. i Refill the fire extinguisher after each use. Have the fire extinguisher checked eve- ry one or two years, otherwise it may P68.00-3018-31 not work in an emergency. P82.64-2350-31 Observe the legal requirements in all countries concerned.

1 Lug CD changer 2 Fire extinguisher i See the separate Operating Instruc- tions when using the CD changer.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 345 Practical advice Where will I find...?

Spare wheel 7 Unlock cover rim 1 using key 2 from the glove compartment. The spare wheel is located under a cover on the outside of the rear door. 7 Fold retainer 3 down.

Removing the cover P40.10-2715-31

P40.10-3384-31

P40.10-3391-31 5 Catch 6 Recess i 4 Cover plate When replacing cover plate 4, make sure that catch 5 engages in recess 7 Stretch out cover rim 1 (arrows) and 1 Cover rim remove it. 6. 2 Key 3 Retainer 7 Pull cover plate 4 off towards you.

346 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Where will I find...?

Removing the spare wheel Fitting the spare wheel Cabriolet i Once you have changed the wheel, se- cure the damaged wheel to the spare wheel bracket. Make sure that the P40.10-2716-31 wheel cannot work loose. P40.10-3117-31 Cover the wheel with the spare wheel cover provided.

See the notes in the "Flat tyre" section 1 Securing bolts when changing a wheel (R page 367). 1 Valve 2 Spare wheel bracket 7 Remove securing bolts 1.

7 Remove the spare wheel. i Secure the spare wheel to spare wheel bracket 2 in such a way that valve 1 Risk of injury G is accessible for checking the tyre Make sure that nobody can be injured as the pressure. spare wheel is removed.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 347 Practical advice Opening/closing in an emergency

Unlocking the vehicle Unlocking the driver's door Unlocking the rear door If the vehicle can no longer be locked or unlocked using the remote control in the key, use the emergency key element. On the Cabriolet, you can use the emer- gency key element to unlock the driver's P80.20-2393-31 P72.12-2482-31 door, and on the station wagon you can un- lock the rear door and the driver's door. i The anti-theft alarm system* is trig- gered if you open the vehicle using the 1 Release slide 3 Locked emergency key element (R page 76). 2 Emergency key element (mechanical) 4 Unlocked There are two ways of disabling the 7 Simultaneously pull release slide 1 in 7 Insert emergency key element 2 into alarm: the direction of the arrow and pull out the door lock to the stop, and turn it A Press the Œ or ‹ button on emergency key element 2. anti-clockwise. the key. 7 Insert emergency key element 2 in The rear door is unlocked. A Insert the key into the ignition lock. the door lock to the stop, and turn it anti-clockwise. The driver's door is unlocked.

348 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Opening/closing in an emergency

Changing the batteries i Risk of poisoning G If the remote control batteries are dis- Only replace the batteries in pairs. charged, you can only lock and unlock the Batteries contain poisonous and caustic You can obtain suitable batteries from vehicle manually using the emergency key substances. You should therefore keep bat- a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a element (R page 348). teries away from children. Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. If the batteries for the auxiliary heating* If a battery is swallowed, consult a doctor You can also have batteries changed remote control are discharged, you can immediately. there and return old batteries. Retail only switch the auxiliary heating* on and outlets are legally obliged to take back off using the buttons in the vehicle old batteries. (R page 193). Environmental note H It is then advisable to have the batteries changed at a qualified specialist workshop, Do not dispose of batteries with the house- e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. hold rubbish. Return discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, or at a spe- cial collection point for old batteries.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 349 Practical advice Opening/closing in an emergency

Key 7 Slide battery compartment 3 out in i the direction of the arrow. When inserting the batteries, make 7 Remove the old batteries from the key. sure that they are clean and lint-free. Then check that the buttons on the key are working. P80.35-2150-31

P80.35-2151-31

1 Release slide 2 Emergency key element (mechanical) 3 Battery compartment 4 Batteries 7 Press release slide 1 in the direction 5 Contact spring of the arrow and pull out emergency 7 Insert new batteries 4 with the posi- key element 2. tive terminal facing upwards under 7 Press emergency key element 2 in the contact spring 5. direction of the arrow into the opening. 7 Press battery compartment 3 back Battery compartment 3 is unlocked. into the key housing.

350 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Opening/closing in an emergency

Auxiliary heating remote control* 7 Insert new batteries 2. Note the ter- minal markings in the remote control If the batteries in the remote control are al- casing. most discharged, the indicator lamp lights up when you press the: 7 Slide battery cover 1 back onto the P 83.70-3798-31 aus R230 remote control. A ON button in green 7 Check the auxiliary heating functions in A OFF button in red the vehicle using the remote control. and then briefly lights up in orange. i If the batteries are discharged, the indica- tor lamp lights up in orange when you 1 Battery cover When inserting the batteries, make press the buttons. 2 Batteries sure that they are clean and lint-free.

7 Slide off battery cover 1.

7 Remove batteries 2.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 351 Practical advice Opening/closing in an emergency

Fuel filler flap emergency release i Cabriolet On vehicles with stowage boxes*, the The emergency release is located in the Station wagon securing bolts in the stowage box must left-hand side of the luggage compart- The emergency release is located in the be removed first. ment. luggage compartment behind the rear pan- el trim.

P80.20-2396-31 P80.20-2395-31 P80.20-2394-31

1 Release pin 3 Release band 7 Pull release pin 1 upwards. 1 Edge protection 7 Pull band 3 upwards. The fuel filler flap is released and can 2 Rear panel trim The fuel filler flap is released and can be opened. 7 Open the rear door. be opened.

7 Pull edge protection 1 away from the door pillar.

7 Remove rear panel trim 2.

352 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Opening/closing in an emergency

Sliding sunroof* 7 Remove rear panel trim 2. 7 Insert key 3 into the hexagon head bolt on the drive. i Opening/closing the sliding sunroof Insert screwdriver 4 into the key as a On vehicles with stowage boxes*, the 7 manually lever. securing bolts in the stowage box must The drive is in the luggage compartment be removed first. behind the rear panel trim. Opening 7 Turn the key anti-clockwise.

Closing

7 Turn the key clockwise. P77.10-2016-31 P77.10-2017-31

1 Edge protection 3 Key (vehicle tool kit) 2 Rear panel trim 4 Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit)

7 Open the rear door.

7 Pull edge protection 1 away from the door pillar.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 353 Practical advice Opening/closing in an emergency

Cabriolet soft top 7 Move the selector lever to position P. 7 Swing release levers 1 and 2 down (arrows). 7 Apply the parking brake. Closing the Cabriolet soft top manually 7 Open the front-passenger door. 7 Remove the key from the ignition lock. Always ask a second person to help when opening/closing the Cabriolet soft top 7 Fold the sun visors down. manually. Do not wear any jewellery such as watches, rings or bracelets when doing this. P77.00-2121-31

Risk of injury G P77.00-2120-31

Make sure that nobody can be trapped or in- jured by moving parts such as the soft top frame as you open or close the soft top. 3 Door seal 4 Side trim 1 Left-hand release lever See the notes on the Cabriolet soft top in 7 Pull door seal 3 out a little. the "Controls in detail" section 2 Right-hand release lever (R page 201). 7 Remove right-hand side trim 4.

354 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Opening/closing in an emergency

P77.00-2122-31 P77.00-2123-31 P77.00-2124-31

5 Hexagon head bolt (emergency valve) 6 Locking mechanism 7 Handle

7 Turn the hexagon head bolt to the stop 7 Simultaneously press lock 6 in the di- 7 Using handle 7, pull the Cabriolet soft in the direction of the arrow using the rection of the arrow on both sides of top downwards until you hear at least key (vehicle tool kit). the vehicle, and raise the Cabriolet soft one of release levers 1 or 2 engage. top. 7 Swing this release lever upwards. 7 Fold the Cabriolet soft top fully out to 7 Swing the second release lever up- the front. wards.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 355 Practical advice Opening/closing in an emergency

Releasing the parking lock manually 7 Guide lever 1 into the opening with re- traction protection. In the event of a malfunction, you can re- lease the selector lever lock from position 7 Press the lever downwards and at the P manually, for example to tow the vehicle. same time shift the selector lever to position P.

7 Pull out the lever. i The protective cap will only close again P27.60-2297-31 completely when you briefly press the selector lever towards DÐ.

1 Lever

356 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Changing bulbs :Changing bulbs Bulbs and lights are an important aspect of Front bulbs Rear bulbs vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure that all the bulbs are in good order at all times.

Risk of injury G P54.00-2360-31 P54.00-2429-31

Bulbs and lights can become very hot. You should therefore allow them to cool down before you change them. Keep bulbs out of the reach of children. Never use a bulb which has been dropped. Bulb Type Bulb Type Such a bulb may explode and injure you. 1 Additional turn signal LEDs 1 Third brake lamp LEDs 2 Turn signal1 P 21 W 2 Turn signal PY 21 W 3 Main-beam and H4 60/55 W (yellow) dipped-beam head- 3 Reversing lamp P 21 W lamp Brake lamp P 21 W Side/parking lamp W 4 W Tail and parking lamps W 5 W 4 Front foglamp H3 55 W 4 Licence plate illumi- C 5 W (fes- nation toon lamp) 1 Vehicles with white light lenses* PY 21 W (yellow). 5 Rear foglamp P 21 W

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 357 Practical advice Changing bulbs

Before changing bulbs A If the the new bulb does not light up ei- Changing the front bulbs ther, visit a qualified specialist work- A Only fit 12-volt bulbs of the same type shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service i as before and of the correct wattage. Centre. Have the headlamp adjustment A Switch the lights off before changing a checked regularly at a qualified special- A Have the LEDs changed at a qualified bulb to avoid a short-circuit. specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. A Only hold bulbs with a clean, lint-free Benz Service Centre. cloth. The following lamps are LEDs: Do not turn the headlamp adjustment screws. If the adjustment screws have A Do not work with wet or greasy fingers. A the additional turn signals in the been turned, you must have the head- exterior mirrors lamp adjustment checked at a qualified A the locator lighting bulbs in the ex- specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- terior mirrors Benz Service Centre.

A the third brake lamp

358 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Changing bulbs

Removing the headlamps

P82.10-3236-31 P82.10-3238-31 P82.10-3237-31

4 Sealing ring (headlamp) 5 Adjustment screws (headlamp) 6 Securing screws (headlamp) Left headlamp, mirror image of right 7 Remove sealing ring 4 from the head- lamp (see arrow). Undo securing screws 6. 1 Securing screws (headlamp surround) 7 2 Headlamp surround 7 Remove 3. 3 Headlamp

7 Undo securing screws 1.

7 Remove headlamp surround 2 up- wards (see arrow).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 359 Practical advice Changing bulbs

Changing the bulbs Main-beam/dipped-beam headlamps

7 Remove protective cap 1.

7 Detach connector 3. P82.10-3083-31 7 Unclip retainer spring 4. P82.10-3082-31 7 Remove bulb 5. 7 Insert new bulb 5 into the holder so that the base locates in the recess.

7 Clip in retainer spring 4. 4 Retainer spring 5 Main-beam/dipped-beam headlamp 7 Attach connector 3 to bulb 5. 1 Protective cap 6 Side/parking lamp 2 Connector (side/parking lamp) 7 Press on protective cap 1. 3 Connector (main-beam/dipped-beam headlamp)

360 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Changing bulbs

Side/parking lamps Front foglamps 7 Undo securing screws 1.

7 Detach connector 2 from bulb 6. 7 Remove foglamp surround 2. Removing 7 Press bulb 6 gently, turn it anti-clock- wise and remove it.

7 Insert new bulb 6. To do this, press bulb 6 gently and turn it clockwise un- til it engages. P82.10-3085-31 P82.10-3084-31 7 Attach connector 2 to bulb 6.

4 Securing screws (front foglamp) Right front foglamp, mirror image of left 5 Adjustment screws (headlamp) 1 Securing screws (headlamp surround) 7 Undo securing screws 4. 2 Foglamp surround 3 Front foglamps 7 Remove foglamp 3.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 361 Practical advice Changing bulbs

Changing the bulb 7 Detach connector 6. Turn signals

7 Unclip retainer spring 7. Removing the lens 7 Remove bulb holder 8 along with the bulb.

7 Insert new bulb 8 into the holder so P82.10-3086-31 that the base locates in recess. 7 Refit the bulb holder. P82.10-3091-31 7 Clip in retainer spring 7.

7 Reattach connector 6. 6 Connector 7 Retainer spring 8 Bulb holder 1 Securing screws 2 Lens

7 Undo securing screws 1.

7 Remove lens 2.

362 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Changing bulbs

Changing the bulbs 7 Press bulb 3 gently, turn it anti-clock- Changing the rear bulbs wise and remove it.

7 Insert the new bulb. To do this, press Rear lamp units the bulb gently and turn it clockwise until it engages. Removing the lens P82.10-3092-31 ! Do not overtighten securing screws 1. You could otherwise damage lens 2.

P82.10-3087-31 3 Bulb

1 Securing screws 2 Lens

7 Undo securing screws 1.

7 Remove lens 2.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 363 Practical advice Changing bulbs

Changing the bulbs Reversing lamp/rear foglamp Changing the bulbs

Removing the lens

P82.10-3088-31 P82.10-3090-31

P82.10-3089-31

3 Turn signal 3 Bulb 4 Tail lamp 7 Press bulb 3 gently, turn it anti-clock- 5 Brake lamp 1 Securing screws wise and remove it. 2 Lens 7 Press the bulb gently, turn it anti-clock- 7 Insert the new bulb. To do this, press wise and remove it. Undo securing screws 1. 7 the bulb gently and turn it clockwise 7 Insert the new bulb. To do this, press 7 Remove lens 2. until it engages. the bulb gently and turn it clockwise until it engages.

364 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Changing bulbs

Licence plate illumination Changing the bulb

Removing

P82.10-3094-31

P82.10-3093-31

3 Lamp

7 Remove bulb 3 from bulb holder 2. 1 Securing screws 2 Bulb holder with lens 7 Insert the new bulb.

7 Undo securing screws 1.

7 Remove bulb holder 2.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 365 Practical advice Replacing the wiper blades

Removing Fitting Risk of injury G 7 Fold the wiper arm away from the wind- Remove the key from the ignition lock be- screen until you feel it engage. fore replacing the wiper blades. The wind- 7 Position the wiper blade at right- screen wipers could otherwise be set in angles. motion and injure you. P82.30-2190-31

! Never open the bonnet if a wiper arm is folded forwards. P82.30-2189-31 Guide wiper blade 2 with recess into Do not fold the wiper arms back onto 7 wiper arm 3. the windscreen without a fitted wiper blade. 7 Slide new wiper blade 2 into wiper arm 3. For your own convenience, have this work carried out at a qualified special- 1 Locking spring 7 Let locking spring 1 clip into the end ist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz 2 Wiper blade of the wiper arm. Service Centre. 3 Wiper arm 4 Joint piece

7 Press locking spring 1 and slide wiper blade 2 out of wiper arm 3 along with joint piece 4.

366 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Flat tyre :Flat tyre Changing a wheel and fitting the 7 Straighten the wheels and engage the steering wheel lock. The vehicle must be placed on stands if you spare wheel intend to work under it. 7 Apply the parking brake. G Make sure that the jack is placed on a firm Risk of accident 7 Move the selector lever to position P. and level surface. Use a stable and non-slip support plate for the jack if the surface is Vehicles with AMG equipment: When fitting 7 If necessary, passengers should leave soft or loose. the spare wheel you must observe the fol- the vehicle, ensuring that they are not lowing: endangered as they do so. Prepare the vehicle as described.

A the maximum speed of 80 km/h 7 Place the warning triangle or warning Do not start the engine while the wheel is lights at a suitable distance. Observe being changed. A the specified tyre pressure the legal requirements in all countries Do not lie under the vehicle when it is raised concerned when doing so. Preparing the vehicle with the jack. If the vehicle is not raised as described, it could slip from the jack as a re- 7 Try to park the vehicle away from traffic Risk of injury G sult of vibrations (e.g. starting the engine, and on a firm, level surface. opening and closing a door or the rear door). 7 Switch on the hazard warning lamps. The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is changed. 7 Deactivate the automatic door locking function.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 367 Practical advice Flat tyre

Raising the vehicle

7 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away using chocks or similar.

A On a level road: P40.10-2178-31 P58.10-2061-31 Place the chocks in front of and be- hind the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

A On uphill gradients: Place chocks behind both wheels Wheel wrench Pump lever (three-part) on the other axle. 7 Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel 1 Flattened end 7 Take out the vehicle tool kit and the you wish to change by about one turn 7 Assemble the pump lever for the jack. jack (R page 340). using the wheel wrench. Do not undo It can be found in the vehicle tool kit. the wheel bolts. 7 Remove the spare wheel from the spare wheel bracket (R page 346).

368 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Flat tyre

Removing the wheel

7 Undo the wheel bolts. ! P58.10-2062-31 P40.10-2719-31 Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. This could damage the bolt and wheel hub threads.

7 Remove the wheel.

Jack 7 Fit the jack to the axle carrier tube of Fitting the wheel the front or rear axle. The jack must al- 2 Pressure release screw ways stand vertically, even on slopes. 7 Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact surfaces. 7 Close pressure release screw 2. 7 Raise the vehicle by pumping (arrow) To do this, turn it clockwise to the stop until the wheel is raised a maximum of 7 Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and using flattened end 1 of the pump le- 3 cm from the ground. press it on. ver. 7 Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten them finger-tight. RR i Do not turn pressure release screw 2 by more than one or two turns. Hydrau- lic fluid could otherwise leak out.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 369 Practical advice Flat tyre

Lowering the vehicle G G Risk of accident 7 Open the pressure release screw of the Risk of accident jack by approximately one turn using Replace damaged or corroded wheel bolts. Have the tightening torque checked immedi- the pump lever (R page 368). Never oil or grease wheel bolts. ately following a wheel change. The wheel 7 Put the jack to one side. bolts may work loose if they are not tight- If a wheel hub thread is damaged, you must ened to a tightening torque of 130 Nm. not drive the vehicle. Inform a qualified spe- cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz 7 Push the jack's piston back down and Service Centre or Service 24h. tighten the pressure release screw. Only use wheel bolts that are suitable for the P40.10-2720-31 Stow away the jack and the rest of the wheel and the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz rec- vehicle tool kit. ommends that, for safety reasons, you only use wheel bolts that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Other bolts could work loose.

Do not tighten the wheel bolts while the ve- 7 Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in the hicle is raised. The vehicle could tip. sequence indicated from 1 to 5.

370 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Flat tyre

7 Once you have changed the wheel, se- Spare wheel cure the damaged wheel to the spare G When replacing tyres on the vehicle, you Risk of accident wheel bracket ( page 347). Make R can include the spare wheel as a road sure that the wheel cannot work loose. If the spare wheel is more than six years old wheel if: or is of a different design to the road wheels: 7 Cover the wheel with the spare wheel A it is less than six years old have the spare wheel replaced with a new cover provided. wheel at the nearest qualified specialist A the wheel and tyre are of the same de- 7 Check the tyre pressure and correct it sign as the road wheels workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service if necessary. Centre. There is a table stating tyre pressure Never drive the vehicle with more than one levels for your vehicle on the inside of spare wheel fitted. the vehicle's fuel filler flap. Vehicles with different tyre dimensions on the front and rear axles: the wheel and tyre sizes of the spare wheel and the normal wheel are different. If you are using the spare wheel, the handling characteristics are affected. Do not exceed the maximum speed of 80 km/h.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 371 Practical advice Battery

The battery is under a cover in the rear footwell. Risk of injury G Risk of injury G The battery must always be sufficiently Comply with safety precautions and protec- Wear eye protection. charged so that it achieves its intended tive measures when handling batteries. service life. Have the battery charge checked more fre- Risk of explosion quently if you use the vehicle mainly for short trips or if you leave it parked for an Keep children away. extended period.

To prevent corrosion damage, only replace Fire, naked flames and smoking the battery with one that has a central vent are prohibited when the battery cover. Mercedes-Benz recommends that, is being handled. Avoid creating Observe this Owner's Manual. for safety reasons, you only use batteries sparks. that have been specially tested and ap- proved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Battery acid is caustic. Avoid If you wish to leave your vehicle parked up contact with the skin, eyes or for an extended period, please obtain ad- clothing. vice from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Immediately rinse acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary.

372 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Battery

Environmental note H Risk of injury G Risk of injury G

Do not dispose of batteries with the house- To prevent acid burns, please observe the A Do not touch the battery first. To remove hold rubbish. Dispose of a defective battery following safety notes when handling batter- any electrostatic charge, first get out of in an environmentally-responsible manner. ies: the vehicle and touch the bodywork. Take it to a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre A Do not lean over the battery. A Do not rub the battery with cloths. The or a special collection point for old batteries. electrostatic charge could cause the A Do not place any metal objects on a bat- battery to explode when you touch it or tery. You could otherwise cause a short if a spark arcs over. circuit and the highly explosive gas mix- Risk of injury G ture in the battery could ignite. A Make sure you do not become electro- Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for safety statically charged, e.g. by wearing syn- reasons, you only use batteries that have thetic clothing or by friction with other been specially tested and approved for your textiles. Do not therefore slide the bat- vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The batteries are tery over carpet or other synthetic mate- more impact-resistant so that occupants are rials. not burnt by acid if the battery is damaged in an accident.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 373 Practical advice Battery

! Disconnecting the battery 7 Apply the parking brake and move the selector lever to . Switch off the engine and remove the P key before you loosen or disconnect Risk of accident G 7 Switch all electrical consumers off. the terminal clamps. You may other- 7 Turn the key to position 0 and remove wise destroy electronic components When the battery is disconnected: it. such as the alternator. A you do not have any brake boosting ef- 7 Loosen the negative terminal clamp fect. You will require more effort to Have the starter battery checked and, and remove it. if necessary, replaced every two years brake and the brake pedal travel will be or 20,000 km at a qualified specialist longer. If necessary, you will have to de- The terminal clamp must no longer be workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Serv- press the brake pedal with maximum touching the terminal. force ice Centre. 7 Remove the cover from the positive ter- A you cannot turn the ignition key If your vehicle is fitted with TeleAid*, minal. A the selector lever is locked in position P you must set the telephone to service 7 Loosen the positive terminal clamp and mode (R page 237). remove it. ! Your vehicle is fitted with one battery. It is 7 Remove the breather hose from the Always disconnect the battery in the battery. located under a cover in the rear footwell. order described below. You could oth- erwise damage the vehicle electronics.

374 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Battery

Removing the battery Have the battery charged at a qualified Risk of acid burns G specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz rec- Have the battery removed at a qualified ommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz There is a risk of acid burns during the Service Centre for this purpose. If you Service Centre. charging process due to the gases which es- charge the battery yourself, follow the op- cape from the battery. Do not lean over the Charging and installing the battery erating instructions for your battery charg- battery. er.

Risk of injury G ! Never charge the battery when it is fitted in Only use battery chargers with a maxi- the vehicle. The vehicle electronics may oth- mum charging voltage of 14.8 volts. erwise be damaged. As the battery is being charged, gases can escape and generate mi- nor explosions, which can injure you and others and may cause damage to the paint- work or acid corrosion on the vehicle. Do not lean over the battery while it is being charged.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 375 Practical advice Battery

Connecting the battery 7 Attach the positive terminal and secure i its cover. ! If the power supply has been interrupt- 7 Connect the negative terminal. ed (e.g. by disconnecting and recon- Always connect the battery in the order necting the battery), you must carry out described below. Never swap the ter- 7 Fit the breather hose. the following tasks: minal clamps. You could otherwise Make sure that the battery is fitted with damage the vehicle electronics. a stopper on the opposite side to the A Set the clock (R page 142) breather hose. A Readjust the front seat head re- 7 Switch all electrical consumers off. straints (R page 96)

A Reset ESP, ABS and BAS (R page 320)

376 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Jump-starting :Jump-starting Jump-starting i Risk of explosion G If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the You can obtain jump leads with polarity reversal protection, e.g. from any engine can be started from another vehicle Avoid creating sparks. Keep naked flames Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. using jump leads. away from the battery and do not smoke. Observe the following points: ! Comply with safety precautions and special A Jump-starting must only be performed protective measures when handling the bat- Only jump-start the battery in the en- when the engine and catalytic convert- tery (R page 372). er are cold. gine compartment.

A Do not start the engine if the battery Avoid repeated and lengthy starting at- 7 Make sure that the two vehicles do not has frozen. Let the battery thaw first. tempts. touch.

A Only use batteries with the same nom- Never start the vehicle using a rapid 7 Apply the parking brake and move the inal voltage for jump-starting. battery charger. selector lever to P.

A Only use jump leads that are protected 7 Switch all electrical consumers off. RR against polarity reversal and which G have an adequate cross-section and in- Risk of acid burns sulated battery terminal clamps. Do not lean over the battery while the en- gine is being jump-started.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 377 Practical advice Jump-starting

The jump-starting contacts are in the en- 7 Remove cover 1 from the positive ter- 7 Start the engine. gine compartment. minal and likewise on the donor vehi- You can now switch the electrical con- cle. sumers back on, but do not switch on 7 Connect positive terminals 2 of both the lights. batteries with the jump lead. Start with 7 First disconnect the jump lead from the second battery. negative terminals 3 of the batteries, P54.10-2183-31 7 Run the donor vehicle's engine at idling and then from positive terminals 2. speed. 7 Have the battery checked at a qualified 7 Connect negative terminals 3 of both specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes- batteries with the jump lead. Start with Benz Service Centre. the second battery. 1 Cover 2 Positive terminal (+) 3 Negative terminal (–)

378 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Towing :Towing Having the vehicle carried away on a trans- i G porter or trailer is preferable to towing it Risk of accident Before towing, deactivate the automat- away. If possible, use a towing bar when ic door locking function ( page 150). Have the vehicle towed using a rigid towing you are towing the vehicle away. R You could otherwise become locked out bar if: Observe national legal requirements when when pushing or towing the vehicle. A the engine is not running towing your vehicle. A there is a malfunction in the power sup- You must not tow-start the vehicle. ply or the vehicle's electrical system ! You may tow the vehicle a maximum of The battery must be connected and There is no servo assistance for the steering 50 km. A maximum towing speed of charged when towing the vehicle, other- and braking when the engine is not running. 50 km/h must not be exceeded. wise: You will then need significantly greater force to steer the vehicle and brake. If the transfer case can be shifted to A you will not be able to switch on the ig- nition Do not tow the vehicle away if the key can- the N neutral position, you can tow the not be turned in the ignition lock. The steer- vehicle over a longer distance. A you will not be able to move the selec- ing is then locked and the vehicle cannot be If you are towing the vehicle with a tor lever to N steered. raised axle, turn the ignition to 1. When towing or tow-starting another vehi- cle, its weight must not exceed the permis- sible gross weight of your vehicle (R page 401).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 379 Practical advice Towing

If the engine does not start: Front towing eye Rear towing eye A jump-starting may be performed The towing eye is located at the front un- The towing eye is located at the rear under A notify a qualified specialist workshop, der the bumper on the left when viewed in the bumper on the left when viewed in the e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre the direction of travel. direction of travel. ! Secure the towing cable or the towing bar to the towing eyes only. You could otherwise damage the vehicle. P00.60-2025-31 P00.60-2026-31

1 Towing eye 1 Towing eye

380 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Towing

Towing the vehicle Transporting the vehicle Tow-starting ! The towing eyes can be used to pull the ve- hicle onto a special transporter or trailer Petrol engine vehicles Do not tow the vehicle further than for transportation. Your vehicle is supplied with automatic 50 km. Do not exceed the maximum transmission. This means that the engine speed of 50 km/h. You could other- 7 Switch on the ignition. cannot be tow-started. If the engine does wise damage the transmission. 7 Shift the selector lever to position N. not start, try jump starting (R page 377). 7 Shift the transfer case to the neutral 7 Switch on the ignition. Towing in the event of various position N. 7 Move the selector lever to N. malfunctions 7 Only lash the vehicle by the wheels/ i rims, and not by the chassis parts such In the event of engine damage, trans The transmission can only change gear as transverse links or trailing arms. You mission damage or electrical malfunc if the battery is sufficiently charged. could otherwise damage the vehicle. tioning, If you cannot move the selector lever to 7 Move the selector lever to position N N, the propeller shaft connected to the (R page 166). driven axles must be removed. 7 Shift the transfer case to neutral posi- tion N (R page 170).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 381 Practical advice Towing

With transfer case damage With rear axle damage Towing out a vehicle that is stuck The propeller shafts connected to the driv- If the rear axle is raised, the vehicle may Take great care when towing out a vehicle en axles must be removed. only be towed with wheel rollers under the whose drive wheels have become embed- front axle. ded in loose earth or mud, particularly if With front axle damage the vehicle is laden. ! The front axle must be raised for towing. When the propeller shafts are refitted, Do not jolt the vehicle or tow it at an angle. The propeller shaft between the rear axle new self-locking screw nuts must be You could otherwise damage the chassis. and the transfer case must be removed. used. Never attempt to tow out a vehicle with a trailer attached. i If possible, tow out vehicles backwards You can obtain information on this from along the track it took previously. any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

382 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Fuses

Fuses To the left of the cockpit you will find the Main fuse box main fuse box with: ! Opening A a fuse allocation chart Use only fuses with the amperage rec- ommended by Mercedes-Benz. Any A spare fuses Mercedes-Benz Service Centre will be A a fuse extractor happy to advise you. Additional fuses are located: Do not attempt to repair or bridge P54.15-2380-31 faulty fuses. Have the cause deter- A under the cockpit in the front-passen- mined and rectified at a qualified spe- ger footwell cialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz A in the transmission tunnel Service Centre. A in the battery compartment 1 Cover

7 Open the driver's door.

7 Remove cover 1 in the direction of the arrow.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 383 Practical advice Fuses

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot 7 Undo screws 1. well 7 Remove cover 2 (arrow). i We recommend that you have fuses P54.15-2383-31 changed at a qualified specialist work- shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. P54.15-2382-31

Opening 5 Fuse box 6 Screws You can fold fuse box 5 down a little to 3 Screws make it easier to change the fuse: 4 Cover P54.15-2381-31 7 Undo screws 6. 7 Undo screws 3. 7 Fold fuse box 5 downwards. 7 Remove cover 4 (arrow).

1 Screws 2 Cover

384 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Practical advice Fuses

Fuse box in the transmission tunnel Removing the stop clamps i G We recommend that you have fuses Risk of injury changed at a qualified specialist work- Do not drive if the stop clamps are not in- P54.15-2384-31 shop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service stalled correctly. If you sit too close to the Centre. airbag, you could be seriously or fatally in- jured. Please observe the information about Long-wheelbase station wagon: you must passenger safety (R page 46). remove the stop clamps on the front-pas- senger seat to reach the fuse box. The stop clamps are located at the front on Stop clamp on the right-hand seat rail; the the seat rails. left-hand stop clamp is a mirror image of this 1 Stop clamp 2 Distance

7 Remove stop clamps 1 using a screw- driver. ! Retain correct distance 2 when fitting the stop clamps.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 385 Practical advice Fuses

Opening the fuse box Fuses in the battery compartment The battery compartment is located under a cover in the rear footwell. The fuses in the battery compartment do not normally need to be changed. Visit P54.15-2484-31 a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre, if a fuse needs to be changed.

1 Screws 2 Cover

7 Move the front-passenger seat to its foremost position.

7 Undo screws 1.

7 Remove cover 2 (arrow).

386 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Vehicle electronics Vehicle identification plates Trailer tow hitch Engine Speeds Tyres and wheels Vehicle dimensions Vehicle weights Trailer loads Service products and capacities Frequencies for garage door openers*

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 387 Technical data Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

The "Technical data" section contains all Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts, con- Make sure that replacement parts are suit- the necessary technical data for your vehi- version parts and accessories which have able for your vehicle. In many countries, cle. been approved for your vehicle in terms of parts that constitute a modification to the their reliability, safety and suitability. vehicle could invalidate the general operat- Some of the values given are provisional or ing permit. This is the case if: calculated. Final values and missing data Despite ongoing market research, were not available at the time this manual Mercedes-Benz is unable to guarantee oth- A the type of vehicle approved in the gen- went to print. er parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts eral operating permit has changed no responsibility for the use of such parts A it will endanger road users in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been independently or officially ap- A it has a detrimental effect on exhaust proved. emissions or vehicle noise levels In Germany and other countries, certain The use of non-approved parts could jeop- parts are only officially approved for instal- ardise vehicle safety. lation or modification work if they comply For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recom- with legal requirements. All genuine mends only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Mercedes-Benz parts satisfy these regula- and conversion parts and accessories tions. which have been approved for your vehi- cle.

388 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

Environmental note H

Mercedes-Benz also supplies reconditioned assemblies and parts which are of the same quality as new parts. These parts have the same warranty as new parts.

You can obtain genuine Mercedes-Benz parts and approved conversion parts and accessories from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Here you will receive ad- vice about technical modifications, and the parts will be professionally fitted. Always quote the vehicle identification number and the engine number when or- dering genuine parts. You will find these numbers on the vehicle data card in the Service Booklet or on your vehicle's identi- fication plates (R page 392).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 389 Technical data Vehicle electronics

Tampering with the engine ! Retrofitting electrical or electronic electronics Only have maintenance work on the equipment engine electronics and associated Electrical and electronic equipment can Risk of accident G parts such as control units, sensors or jeopardise the operational safety of your connector leads carried out only at a vehicle. If equipment of this kind is retrofit- Only have the engine electronics and associ- qualified specialist workshop. The vehi- ted, it must be type-approved and bear the ated parts serviced at a qualified specialist cle parts may otherwise wear more e mark. You can obtain the e mark from workshop which has the necessary special- quickly and the vehicle warranty and the equipment manufacturer or an author- ist knowledge and tools to carry out the general operating permit may be inval- ised testing centre. work required. Mercedes-Benz recommends idated. If you wish to install telephones or two-way that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Cen- radios in the vehicle, you must obtain for- tre for this purpose. In particular, work rele- mal approval. Mercedes-Benz permits mo- vant to safety or on safety-related systems bile phones and two-way radios to be in- must be carried out at a qualified specialist stalled if they are fitted professionally and workshop. Road safety could otherwise be an exterior aerial is fitted so as to be reflec- affected. tion-free. The transmission output of the telephone or two-way radio must not exceed the max- imum transmission outputs listed below.

390 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Vehicle electronics

Therefore, have the exterior aerial installed Frequency range Maximum trans Risk of accident G only at a qualified specialist workshop which mission output Mobile phones and two-way radios can in- has the necessary specialist knowledge Short wave 100 W terfere with the vehicle electronics, thereby and tools to carry out the work required. (< 50 MHz) Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a jeopardising the operational safety of the 4mband 20 W vehicle and your own safety, if: Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- pose. In particular, work relevant to safety 2mband 50 W A you do not have an exterior aerial or on safety-related systems must be car- 70 cm band 35 W A the exterior aerial is not reflection-free ried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 25 cm band 10 W A the exterior aerial is incorrectly fitted Excessive levels of electromagnetic radia- ! tion could also damage your health. If electrical or electronic equipment which does not fulfil these conditions is retrofitted, the vehicle's general op- erating permit may be invalidated (EU Directive 95/54/EC).

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 391 Technical data Vehicle identification plates

P00.00-3294-31

392 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Vehicle identification plates

Vehicle identification plate Location 1 Engine number G 270 CDI On the side of the engine block (on the left when viewed in the direction of travel) 2 Engine numbers G 320, G500, G55 AMG, G 400 CDI On the rear of the engine block (on the right when viewed in the direction of travel) 3 Vehicle identification plate On the door frame (on the left when viewed in the direction of travel) 4 Body plate On the front bulkhead cover under the air intake (on the right when viewed in the direction of travel) 5 Vehicle identification number In the wheel housing on the chassis (on the right when viewed in the direc- tion of travel) 6 Fuel grade details In the fuel filler flap (on the right when viewed in the direction of travel) 7 Tyre pressure table In the fuel filler flap (on the right when viewed in the direction of travel)

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 393 Technical data Trailer tow hitch

Installation dimensions G ! Risk of accident Observe securing points 1 on the chassis frame when retrofitting a trail- Have the trailer tow hitch retrofitted only at er tow hitch. a qualified specialist workshop which has the necessary specialist knowledge and Maximum permissible overhang di- tools to carry out the work required. mension 2 is 895 mm. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a You may obtain further information on Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this pur- retrofitting from any Mercedes-Benz pose. In particular, work relevant to safety Service Centre. or on safety-related systems must be car- P31.10-2616-31 ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

394 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Engine :Engine i i The technical data was determined in You will find information about the accordance with EU Directives. All data noise level of your vehicle in your regis- applies to the vehicle's standard equip- tration document. ment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You may obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Engine G 320 G 500 G 55 AMG G 270 CDI G 400 CDI Rated output 158 KW (215 bhp) 218 KW (296 bhp) 350 KW (476 bhp) 115 KW (156 bhp) 184 KW (250 bhp) at engine speed 5,600 rpm 5,500 rpm 6,100 rpm 3,800 rpm 4,000 rpm Rated torque 300 Nm 456 Nm 700 Nm 400 Nm 560 Nm at engine speed 2,800 – 4,800 2,800 – 4,000 2,650 – 4,500 1,800 – 2,600 1,700 – 2,600 Number of cylinders 6 8 8 5 8 Displacement 3,199 cm3 4,966 cm3 5,439 cm3 2,685 cm3 3,996 cm3 Maximum engine speed 6,300 rpm 6,300 rpm 6,500 rpm 4,400 rpm 4,750 rpm

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 395 Technical data Performance

Speeds i The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. All data applies to the vehicle's standard equip- ment. The data may therefore differ for vehicles with optional equipment. You may obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Maximum speed G 320 G 500 G 55 AMG G 270 CDI G 400 CDI 1st gear 50 km/h 61 km/h 74 km/h 41 km/h 45 km/h 2nd gear 81 km/h 101 km/h 122 km/h 67 km/h 74 km/h 3rd gear 132 km/h 161 km/h 190 km/h 109 km/h 125 km/h 4th gear 175 km/h 190 km/h 205 km/h 149 km/h 177 km/h 5th gear 160 km/h 190 km/h 210 km/h 160 km/h 182 km/h

396 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Tyres and wheels :Tyres and wheels Mercedes-Benz recommends that, for ! i safety reasons, you use tyres that have Fitting tyres other than those approved Only correct tyre pressures when the been specially approved for your vehicle and recommended by Mercedes-Benz tyres are cold. by Mercedes-Benz. These tyres are spe- could have the following adverse ef- cially suited for use with control systems You may obtain further information on fects: such as ABS or ESP. If you use other tyres, tyres and wheels from any Mercedes- Mercedes-Benz cannot be held responsi- A Poorer handling characteristics Benz Service Centre. ble for any damage that may occur. You A Louder noise You will find a table of tyre pressures may obtain information about tyres from for warm and cold tyres on the inside of A Increased fuel consumption any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. the vehicle's fuel filler flap. Only correct In addition, tyres and wheels that have tyre pressures when the tyres are cold. not been approved by Mercedes-Benz may be too big or may deform under load. This may cause the tyres and Speed index for tyres wheels to scrape on the bodywork axle The speed index is part of the tyre designa- components and damage the tyres or tion. It indicates the speed range for which the vehicle. a tyre is suitable.

Abbre Speed viation S up to 180 km/h H up to 210 km/h V up to 240 km/h

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 397 Technical data Tyres and wheels

Tyres

G 3204 G 5004 G 55 AMG Tyres 265/70 R16 112H M+S1 265/70 R16 112H M+S1 285/55 R18 113V2, 3 1 1 1 Light-alloy wheel 7 /2J x 16 H2 ET63 7 /2J x 16 H2 ET63 9 /2J x 18 H2 ET50

Tyres 265/60 R18 109H1 265/60 R18 109H1 1 1 Light-alloy wheel 7 /2J x 18 H2 ET63 7 /2J x 18 H2 ET63

Tyres 265/60 R18 110V M+S2 265/60 R18 110V M+S2 1 1 Light-alloy wheel 7 /2J x 18 H2 ET63 7 /2J x 18 H2 ET63 Spare wheel: Tyres 265/60 R18 109H1 1 Light-alloy wheel 7 /2J x 18 H2 ET43 1 Make of tyre recommended by Mercedes-Benz: Bridgestone. 2 Make of tyre recommended by Mercedes-Benz: Yokohama. 3 The use of snow chains is not permitted. 4 The spare wheel is of the same type as the standard tyres.

398 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Tyres and wheels

G 270 CDI3 G 400 CDI3 Tyres 265/70 R16 112H M+S1 265/70 R16 112H M+S1 1 1 Light-alloy wheel 7 /2J x 16 H2 ET63 7 /2J x 16 H2 ET63

Tyres 265/60 R18 109H1 265/60 R18 109H1 1 1 Light-alloy wheel 7 /2J x 18 H2 ET63 7 /2J x 18 H2 ET63

Tyres 265/60 R18 110V M+S2 265/60 R18 110V M+S2 1 1 Light-alloy wheel 7 /2J x 18 H2 ET63 7 /2J x 18 H2 ET63 1 Make of tyre recommended by Mercedes-Benz: Bridgestone. 2 Make of tyre recommended by Mercedes-Benz: Yokohama. 3 The spare wheel is of the same type as the standard tyres.

i Information concerning the use of tyre sizes not mentioned here can be ob- tained from any Mercedes-Benz Serv- ice Centre.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 399 Technical data Vehicle dimensions

Long-wheelbase station Short-wheelbase station Cabriolet wagon wagon Vehicle length1 4,655 – 4,770 mm 4,210 – 4,325 mm 4,255 – 4,370 mm Vehicle width1 2,007 mm 2,007 mm 2,007 mm with mirrors folded outwards Vehicle width1 1,774 – 1,864 mm 1,774 – 1,810 mm 1,774 – 1,810 mm with mirrors folded in Vehicle height1 1,927 – 1,977 mm 1,927 – 1,977 mm 1,927 – 1,977 mm Wheelbase 2,850 mm 2,400 mm 2,400 mm Ground clearance1 205 mm 205 mm 205 mm Turning circle 13.2 – 13.3 m 11.3 m 11.3 m 1 Dimensions may vary, depending on the vehicle's equipment.

400 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Vehicle weights :Vehicle weights The unladen weight includes the driver (75 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full). Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the maximum payload.

Long-wheelbase station wagon

G 320 G 500 G 55 AMG G 270 CDI G 400 CDI Unladen weight 2,370 kg 2,420 kg 2,550 kg 2,430 kg 2,540 kg Maximum permissible gross 3,200 kg 3,200 kg 3,200 kg 3,200 kg 3,200 kg vehicle weight 3,100 kg1 3,100 kg1 Max. permissible front axle 1,450 kg 1,450 kg 1,450 kg 1,450 kg 1,450 kg load Maximum permissible rear 1,900 kg 1,900 kg 1,900 kg 1,900 kg 1,900 kg axle load Trailer towing only: maximum permissible weight 6,700 kg 6,700 kg 6,700 kg 6,700 kg 6,700 kg of vehicle/trailer combina 6,600 kg1 6,600 kg1 tion Maximum payload 830 kg 780 kg 650 kg 770 kg 660 kg 730 kg1 670 kg1 Maximum roof load 200 kg 200 kg – 200 kg 200 kg 1 Different weights

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 401 Technical data Vehicle weights

Short-wheelbase station wagon

G 320 G 500 G 270 CDI G 400 CDI Unladen weight 2,220 kg 2,270 kg 2,280 kg 2,385 kg Maximum permissible gross vehicle 2,850 kg 2,850 kg 2,850 kg 2,850 kg weight Max. permissible front axle load 1,400 kg 1,400 kg 1,400 kg 1,400 kg Maximum permissible rear axle load 1,700 kg 1,700 kg 1,700 kg 1,700 kg Trailer towing only: maximum permissible weight of 5,700 kg 5,700 kg 5,700 kg 5,700 kg vehicle/trailer combination Trailer towing only: maximum permissible rear axle load1 1,800 kg 1,800 kg 1,800 kg 1,800 kg Maximum payload 630 kg 580 kg 575 kg 465 kg Maximum roof load 150 kg 150 kg 150 kg 150 kg 1 The trailer drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.

402 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Vehicle weights

Cabriolet

G 320 G 500 G 400 CDI Unladen weight 2,200 kg 2,250 kg 2,370 kg Maximum permissible gross vehicle 2,850 kg 2,850 kg 2,850 kg weight Max. permissible front axle load 1,400 kg 1,400 kg 1,400 kg Maximum permissible rear axle load 1,700 kg 1,700 kg 1,700 kg Trailer towing only: maximum permissible weight of 5,700 kg 5,700 kg 5,700 kg vehicle/trailer combination Trailer towing only: maximum permissible rear axle load1 1,800 kg 1,800 kg 1,800 kg Maximum payload 650 kg 600 kg 480 kg 1 The trailer drawbar noseweight is not included in the trailer load.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 403 Technical data Trailer loads

Long-wheelbase station Short-wheelbase station Cabriolet wagon wagon Trailer, braked 3,500 kg1 2,850 kg 2,850 kg Trailer, unbraked 750 kg 750 kg 750 kg Maximum trailer drawbar noseweight 140 kg 115 kg 115 kg 1 Trailer load including trailer drawbar noseweight.

404 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Service products and capacities

Service products are: G Fuels A petrol Risk of accident G A diesel When handling, storing and disposing of Risk of injury service products, please observe the rele- A lubricants (e.g. engine oil, Fuel is highly flammable. transmission oil, greases) vant regulations. Failure to do so could en- danger people and the environment. Smoking, fire and naked flames are there- A coolant fore prohibited when handling fuels. Keep service products away from children. A brake fluid Do not allow fuel to come into contact with Consult a doctor immediately if any service skin or clothing. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use product is swallowed. products that have been tested and ap- Your health may be damaged if: proved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and A you spill fuel onto your skin which are listed in the Mercedes-Benz Environmental note H Owner's Manuals since: A you inhale fuel vapours

A vehicle parts and service products are Dispose of service products in an environ- matched to each other mentally-responsible manner.

A damage caused by non-approved serv- ice products is not covered by the war- ranty You may obtain further information from any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 405 Technical data Service products and capacities

Tank content The consumption values were determined i in accordance with EU Directive The actual consumption values of your Total content: approximately 1999/100/EC under the following vehicle may deviate from the values 95 litres test conditions: given depending on: Including reserve approximately Inner-city driving conditions are simu- A driving style fuel 13 litres lated by frequent pulling away and A stopping A road and traffic conditions You will find further information about refu- environmental influences elling and fuels in the "Operation" section A Common extra-urban driving condi- A tions are simulated by accelerating (R page 247). A the vehicle's operating state from 0 to 120 km/h using all gears Fuel consumption A Total fuel consumption is calculated ! using a weighting of approximately 37% The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in Do not use fuel additives. These could for inner-city driving and approximately the following conditions: lead to increased wear and engine 63% for extra-urban driving damage. The use of fuel additives could A At very low temperatures result in a limitation of your warranty A In urban traffic entitlement. A On short trips

A When towing a trailer

A In mountainous terrain

406 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Service products and capacities

Your vehicle's CO emissions vary directly Environmental note H 2 according to the fuel consumption and are therefore dependent on: CO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien- tists currently believe to be chiefly responsi- A the efficient use of fuel by the engine ble for global warming (greenhouse effect). A the style of driving A other non-technical factors, e.g. envi- ronmental influences or road conditions

Fuel consumption in accordance with Directive 1999/100/EC (Directive relating to the carbon dioxide emissions and the fuel consumption of mo- tor vehicles)

G 320 G 500 G 55 AMG G 270 CDI G 400 CDI Urban 20.0 l/100 km 20.9 l/100 km 12.8 l/100 km 16.1 l/100 km Extra-urban 12.8 l/100 km 12.8 l/100 km 9.6 l/100 km 11.0 l/100 km Overall 15.5 l/100 km 15.8 l/100 km 10.9 l/100 km 12.8 l/100 km

CO2 emissions 370.0 g/km 378.0 g/km 289.0 g/km 343.0 g/km

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 407 Technical data Service products and capacities

Engine oil The values indicate the total contents of the various engines.

Engine with oil filter G 320 G 500 G 55 AMG G 270 CDI G 400 CDI Replacement amount 8.5 litres 8.0 litres 8.5 litres 7.0 litres 9.0 litres

You may use any passenger vehicle engine ! The temperatures shown are guidelines oil which has been approved for Mercedes- only, and small deviations either way are Do not use fuel additives. These could Benz vehicles. A list of engine oils which permitted. lead to increased wear and engine has been tested and approved in accord- damage. The use of fuel additives could ance with Mercedes-Benz Specifications result in a limitation of your warranty for Service Products, Sheets 229.1 and entitlement. 229.3, is available from any Mercedes- Benz Service Centre. Some oil containers Engine oil viscosity may also be marked "Approved in accord- P.18.00-2056-31(Aus Ba. 163) ance with MB Sheet 229.1 or 229.3", for Select the SAE class (viscosity) of the en- example. gine oil according to the time of year. The following table shows you which SAE class you should use at which average ambient temperatures.

408 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Service products and capacities

Coolant The following values indicate the various coolant system total contents.

G 320 G 500 G 55 AMG G 270 CDI G 400 CDI Coolant 11.3 litres 12.0 litres 12.7 litres 12.8 litres 14.7 litres Coolant in vehicles 11.8 litres 12.5 litres 13.2 litres 13.3 litres 15.3 litres with heater booster*

Corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze for anti freeze protection down to:

G 320 G 500 G 55 AMG G 270 CDI G 400 CDI Ð37 ûC (50%) 5.7 litres 6.0 litres 6.4 litres 6.4 litres 7.4 litres Ð45 ûC (55%) 6.2 litres 6.6 litres 7.0 litres 7.0 litres 8.1 litres Vehicles with heater booster* Ð37 ûC (50%) 5.9 litres 6.3 litres 6.6 litres 6.7 litres 7.6 litres Ð45 ûC (55%) 6.5 litres 6.9 litres 7.3 litres 7.3 litres 8.4 litres

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 409 Technical data Service products and capacities

Coolant is a mixture of water and anti- If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present If the vehicle is losing coolant: freeze and corrosion inhibitor. It performs in the correct concentration, the boiling 7 Top it up with equal parts of water and the following tasks in the cooling system: point of the coolant will be around 130 °C. an antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor. A Anti-corrosion protection The antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor con- Mercedes-Benz recommends anti- centration in the cooling system should be freeze and corrosion inhibitor that have A Antifreeze protection around 50%. This will protect the cooling been approved by Mercedes-Benz. A Raising the boiling point system against freezing down to around –37 °C. ! ! Have the coolant renewed every The antifreeze and corrosion inhibitor con- Always use a suitable coolant – even in 15 years or after 250,000 km have centration in the cooling system should countries with high temperatures. been covered. not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection If you do not do so, the cooling system down to –45 °C), since the heat is then not will not be sufficiently protected from removed so effectively. corrosion and the boiling point will be too low.

410 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Service products and capacities

Brake fluid Windscreen washer system Risk of fire G Over a period of time, the brake fluid ab- The washer fluid reservoir holds around sorbs moisture from the air; this reduces 7.5 litres. The headlamp cleaning system Windscreen washer concentrate is highly its boiling point. and the windscreen washer system have a flammable. Fire, naked flames and smoking common supply from the washer fluid res- are prohibited when windscreen washer ervoir. Risk of accident G concentrate is being handled. 7 Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too mixture of water and windscreen wash- low, vapour pockets may form in the brake er concentrate. Vary the mixture ratio system when the brakes are applied hard according to the outside temperature. (e.g. when driving downhill). This would im- The windscreen wipers will not then pair the braking efficiency. leave any streaks. The headlamp clean- Have the brake fluid renewed annually. ing system and the windscreen washer system do not freeze. i There is usually a notice in the engine compartment to remind you when the next brake fluid change is due.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 411 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers*

Country Radio Frequency range type approval 27 MHz 30 MHz, 418 MHz 40 MHz 433 MHz number Austria GZ104569-ZB/98 26.975 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.87 – 434.79 Belgium RTT/D/X 2064 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Chile – 433 Cyprus MCW129/95 12/ 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 2000 Czech Republic CTU 2000 3 R1194 26.975 – 27.28 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Denmark 98.3142-266 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Finland FI98080106 27 – 40 433 France 97619 RD 26.957 – 27.283 30.875 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 French Guyana 97619 RD 26.957 – 27.283 30.875 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Germany D800038K 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Gibraltar RTTE 20754/0087847 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Greece JCI 05JUL2000RTTE 27 – 40 433 Guadeloupe 97619 RD 26.957 – 27.283 30.875 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Hungary BB-5793-1/2000 27 – 40 433

412 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers*

Country Radio Frequency range type approval 27 MHz 30 MHz, 418 MHz 40 MHz 433 MHz number Iceland IS-3418-00 27 – 40 433.92 Ireland TRA 24/5/109/5 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 (Republic) Italy DGPGF/4/341032/ 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 TB 0002573 Luxembourg L2433/10510-01J 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 (BR 211, 215, 220, 230, 240)

L2433/10510-03J 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 (BR 163, 203, 209, 463) Malta WT/122/98 27 – 40 433 Martinique 97619 RD 26.957 – 27.283 30.875 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Norway NO20000026 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Poland CLBT/C/66/2002 26.975 – 27.280 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.87 – 433.97 Portugal JCI 03JUL2000 RTTE 27 – 40 433

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 413 Technical data Frequencies for garage door openers*

Country Radio Frequency range type approval 27 MHz 30 MHz, 418 MHz 40 MHz 433 MHz number Reunion 97619 RD 26.957 – 27.283 30.875 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Spain E D.G.Tel.01 00 0398 27 – 40 433 Sweden Ue990195 27.095 – 40.68 433.92 Switzerland BAKOM 98.0746.K.P 26.975 – 27.280 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.87 – 434.97 The Netherlands NL99030970 26.975 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 The Slovak R 267 2001 N – – – 433.05 – 434.75 Republic The United RTTE 20754/0087847 26.957 – 27.283 417.9 – 418.1 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 Kingdom Turkey 0425/TGM-TR/JOCO- 26.957 – 27.283 – 40.66 – 40.7 433.05 – 434.79 EURO

414 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical terms

A-pillar Asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps Ball coupling* The front pillar connecting the roof and Position of the dipped-beam head- Attachment on the vehicle. Part of the the body (->B-pillar, ->C-pillar) lamps which allows the outer edge of trailer coupling to which the trailer is the carriageway to be lit up. coupled. ABS (Anti-lock braking system) Audio 10, Audio 10 CD* and BAS Prevents the wheels from locking when Audio 30 Export* System (Brake Assist) you brake, allowing you to continue Term for your vehicle's car radio includ- System for shortening the stopping dis- steering. ing the built-in loudspeakers. tance in hazardous situations, activat- ed by the driver depressing the brake ASR Automatic transmission (Acceleration skid control) Engine speed-torque converter which pedal rapidly. Components of ->ESP; ASR controls converts the high engine speed (at low Belt drive the drive torque at the ->wheels ac- torque) to lower drive wheel speeds (at Drive connection from the engine to cording to the situation, thus improving high torque). the engine assemblies such as the al- ->traction when driving on slippery sur- ternator or the air-conditioning com- B-pillar faces. The centre pillar connecting the roof pressor. ASSYST and the body (->A-pillar, ->C-pillar) C-pillar (Active Service System) The rear pillar connecting the roof and Service indicator of the ->operating the body (->A-pillar, ->C-pillar) system, which displays when the next service is due.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 415 Technical terms

CAC Chassis number COMAND* (Customer Assistance Center) Number determined by the manufac- (Cockpit Management and Data Sys- DaimlerChrysler Customer Service turer and affixed to the body, by which tem) Center offering advice on all matters each vehicle can be clearly identified. Information and operating centre for concerning your vehicle and support in various functions within your vehicle, Child seat recognition the event of a breakdown. such as the radio, CD player and other Special child seats are available from optional equipment, e.g. a CD changer, CAN system any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for telephone, etc. (Controller Area Network) automatic child seat recognition on the Controls vehicle functions such as the front-passenger seat. If you have fitted Control unit central locking system or windscreen a special child seat of this kind to the The part of the engine electronics wipers depending on the vehicle or en- front-passenger seat, the front-passen- which controls the engine function. vironmental conditions and delivers in- ger airbag is automatically deactivated Cruise control (the AIRBAG OFF warning lamp on the formation to the ->operating system. System which enables a vehicle speed centre console lights up). This system works because the elec- set by the driver to be maintained auto- tronic systems in the vehicle are all in- Cockpit matically. terconnected. All the instruments, switches, buttons Differential lock and warning and indicator lamps in the CDI Provides better ->traction in poor road passenger compartment of your vehi- (Common Rail Direct Injection) conditions. Since the ->differential unit cle necessary for monitoring and con- Diesel injection technology in which all enables ->wheels to spin separately, trolling the vehicle. cylinders have a common feed line. the differential lock can prevent this Fine injection nozzles allow very pre- and lock both driven ->wheels together cise metering, which lowers diesel con- via the ->differential unit. sumption.

416 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical terms

Differential unit DynAPS* EMC ->Transfer case in one axle. Power from (dynamic route guidance) (Electromagnetic Compatibility) the engine is transferred to the Adapts the route guidance calculated The electrical and electronic compo- ->wheels inside the differential unit. by the navigation system to the prevail- nents of the vehicle are protected from The differential unit ensures that ing traffic situation. Traffic jam infor- interference fields, such as transmit- ->wheels rotate at different speeds mation is received by the system in ters, radar systems, overhead power when cornering, since the ->wheels on SMS form. lines or radiophones. the inside have a smaller distance to e mark EN 228 cover than the ones on the outside, Symbol to indicate certification in ac- European standard for unleaded petrol. thereby requiring fewer rotations. cordance with the relevant EU Direc- Engine control system tives. Drive train Controls the engine, e.g. the engine Collective term for all vehicle compo- ELCODE speed. nents which belong to the drive, such (Electronic Code System) as: Engine number System that electronically checks ac- Number determined by the manufac- A the engine cess and authorisation to drive and is turer and marked on the cylinder part of the anti-theft protection system A ->the automatic transmission crankcase, by which each engine can for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. be clearly identified. A ->the differential locks

A ->the transfer case

A the propeller shafts

A the differential hub reduction

A the drive shafts

A ->the wheels

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 417 Technical terms

Engine oil viscosity GPS Instrument cluster Measurement for the inner friction (vis- (Global Positioning System) Displays and indicator lamps in the cosity) of the oil at different tempera- Satellite signals received by suitable driver's field of vision, e.g. the rev tures. The viscosity is better the higher receivers to supply information on the counter, the speedometer and the fuel the temperature the oil can withstand geographical location of the vehicle. gauge. without becoming too thin, or the lower These signals are then compared with a Interior motion sensor* (IRS) the temperature it can withstand with- digital map (e.g. on CD ROM) and used Part of the vehicle's anti-theft systems out becoming too thick. to determine the location of the vehicle which sets off an alarm if the side win- and for navigation purposes. ESP dows are smashed and someone at- (Electronic Stability Program) GSM tempts to put a hand inside while the Improves directional stability and (Global System for Mobile Communica- vehicle is closed and locked. ->traction when cornering. tions) Kickdown The GS standard establishes the guide- FCD The ->automatic transmission is shifted lines for constructing a cellular digital (Floating Car Data) down to the lowest possible gear when mobile system. Thanks to this uniform One of DaimlerChrysler's ->telematics the accelerator pedal is depressed be- standard, you can also use your mobile services for recalling vehicle data for yond the pressure point. This acceler- abroad. Within GSM, there are approxi- traffic guidance and traffic information ates the vehicle more rapidly than mately 300 network operators in systems. without downshifting. 120 countries. The transmission meth- od is digital.

418 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical terms

Knock resistance Linguatronic* MON Resistance of petrol to uncontrolled Operates the carphone, mobile phone Indicates the petrol octane number de- self-ignition of the gas-air mixture in or audio systems, e.g. the radio or termined by standard methods. It the cylinder head (knocking). CD player, by voice control. measures petrol resistance against un- The octane number is a measure of desirable self-ignition (knock resist- Locking knob knock resistance. The higher the ance). Knob on the door which shows whether octane number, the higher the knock the door is locked or unlocked. Multi-function display resistance. Display in the ->instrument cluster Memory function showing ->operating system informa- LED Memory for three individual seat, steer- tion. (Light-Emitting Diode) ing wheel and mirror positions per key. Semiconductor element which directly Multi-function steering wheel Menu converts electricity into light. Steering wheel with buttons which con- The ->operating system displays are ar- trol the ->operating system. LIM indicator lamp ranged in menus. Several commands (Limiter) are thematically combined in the men- On-board voltage Indicator lamp in the cruise control le- us. For example, the Audio menu con- Vehicle's voltage, influenced by outgo- ver which indicates whether variable tains the Select station or Operate CD ing lines, consumers and return lines. ->Speedtronic is activated. player. You can change the settings for The battery can buffer, i.e. accept and Line of fall your vehicle directly using these com- produce, extremely high currents with- The direct line along which an object mands. out causing a significant change to the moves downhill when no forces are voltage. working on it apart from the force of gravity.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 419 Technical terms

Operating system Parking brake Rearward-facing child seat You can use the operating system to Secures the vehicle against rolling Special restraint system for children up look up information on your vehicle and away when parking. to 9 months old or weighing up 10 kg. make adjustments. For these purpos- The rearward-facing child seat is Partial load operation es, information is displayed in the mounted on the front-passenger seat Operating state of the engine in which ->multi-function display, and the but- facing away from the direction of trav- only part of the maximum power or tons on the ->multi-function steering el. The front-passenger seat sensor maximum torque is used, e.g. in ->over- wheel control the operating system dis- system prevents the front-passenger run mode. play and settings. airbag from being released when a RDS rearward-facing seat with ->automatic Overrevving range (Radio-Data-System) child seat recognition is fitted. Speeds in the red area of the rev coun- Signals transmitted by radio broadcast- ter at which the engine can only oper- ers giving traffic reports which are then Restraint systems ate for a short period. Seat belts, belt tensioners, airbags and processed by, e.g. ->COMAND*, for dy- child restraint systems. As independ- Overrun mode namic route guidance. ent systems, their protective functions Passive acceleration of the vehicle, e.g. complement one another. when driving down a mountain.

420 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Technical terms

Roadside assistance* SMS Symmetrical dipped-beam headlamps Transmits vehicle data and the current (Short Message Service) Position of the dipped-beam head- position of your vehicle to the Mobile network service enabling up-to- lamps which allows both edges of the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance date traffic reports to be received from carriageway to be lit up equally. Center using the telephone network –>DynAPS. TeleAid* and ->TeleAid*. Speed index (Telematic Alarm Identification on RON Part of the tyre designation; indicates Demand) Indicates the petrol octane number de- the speed range for which a tyre is suit- ->DaimlerChrysler telematics system termined by standard methods. It able. which includes the emergency call* measures petrol resistance against un- service, ->roadside assistance* and Speedtronic desirable self-ignition (knock resist- Using Speedtronic the driver can deter- MB Info*. ance). mine a variable limit speed. Telematics* Selector lever lock Joint term for telecommunications and SRS Lock which prevents the ->automatic information technology. (Supplemental Restraint System) transmission selector lever from acci- Additional ->restraint systems such as Tightening torque dentally shifting from position to an- P belt tensioners and belt force limiters. Force with which bolts, e.g. wheel other position while the vehicle is bolts, must be tightened (->torque). parked. Steering capability The steering capability describes the TIREFIT kit* Shift range extent to which the driver's steering Accessory for temporarily repairing Number of gears available to the ->au- movements translate into actual tyres. The TIREFIT kit consists of a filler tomatic transmission. The shift range changes in the vehicle's direction. bottle with sealant, a filler hose, a valve can be limited. core extractor with valve core and an electric pump.

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 421 Technical terms

Torque Transfer case Force which is exerted about a central Distributes drive power to the rear and axis where there is rotational move- front axles. In the LOW off-road posi- ment, e.g. when tightening a wheel tion, the drive train speed is reduced by bolt. In engines, the torque is the force half. This increases the drive power ac- transferred to the transmission. The cordingly. maximum torque is achieved at a given Ultrasound reversing aid* engine speed. The higher the maximum System which makes reversing easier torque, the greater the force trans- by giving the driver visual and audible ferred from the vehicle to the wheels. signals. Torque converter Wheel In vehicles with automatic transmis- ->Wheel rim and tyre, commonly sion, this performs the function that known as wheel. the clutch performs in a manual trans- mission. Wheel rim Part of the ->wheel on which the tyre is Traction fitted. Force transferred from the vehicle to the road via the wheels and a term used to describe grip. Traction mode Active acceleration of the vehicle by adding more throttle.

422 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

A Adjusting the front seat Anti-theft systems ...... 76 ABS ...... 71, 415 Switch on the door control A-pillar ...... 415 Indicator lamp ...... 19, 309, 310 panel ...... 24 Armrest ...... 222 Messages in the Adjusting the headlamp Ashtray ...... 225 multi-function display ...... 316, 317 range ...... 17, 119 Front ...... 21, 226 Warning lamp ...... 19 Adjusting the instrument ASR ...... 415 AC OFF button (Thermatic) ...... 191 lighting ...... 126 ASSYST ...... 283, 415 Accepting Alarm Asymmetrical dipped-beam Call ...... 160 Audible ...... 292 headlamps ...... 415 Accident Alarm system ...... 76 Audible alarm ...... 292 Starting the engine ...... 295 Deactivating ...... 77 Audio Menu ...... 135 Active Service System ...... 283 Disabling the alarm ...... 292 Audio systems ...... 415 Additional turn signals Ambient lighting Audio 30* ...... 21 (exterior mirrors) ...... 357 (locator lighting) ...... 146 Automatic Adjusting Angle Locking when driving ...... 91 Belt height ...... 34 Head restraint ...... 29 Automatic air conditioning Ð Exterior mirrors ...... 17, 30 Anti-dazzle mirrors ...... 176 see Thermatic ...... 182 Head restraints Antifreeze protection ...... 409 Automatic car wash ...... 287 Angle ...... 29 Anti-lock braking system Ð see ABS Headlamps ...... 259 Height ...... 29 Anti-theft alarm system Windows ...... 259 Mirrors ...... 17, 30 Deactivating ...... 77 Automatic child seat recognition . . 66 Multi-contour seat* ...... 93 Anti-theft alarm system* ...... 76 Automatic headlamp feature . . . . . 116 Rear-view mirror ...... 30 Disabling the alarm ...... 292 Seats ...... 27 Steering wheel ...... 29

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 423 Index

Automatic B Boot transmission ...... 36, 164, 415 Ball coupling ...... 415 Message in the multi-function Emergency operating mode ...... 296 Ball coupling-trailer tow hitch* . . . 113 display ...... 324 Gear indicator ...... 19 BAS ...... 71, 72, 415 B-pillar ...... 415 Gearshift pattern ...... 36 Battery ...... 372 Brake Assist Ð see BAS Oil level ...... 258 Changing the battery in Brake fluid ...... 411 One-touch gearshifting ...... 166 the auxiliary heating remote Message in the multi-function Problems ...... 296 control* ...... 351 display ...... 323 Problems with gear shifts ...... 296 Jump-starting ...... 377 Brake lamp ...... 357 Releasing the parking lock Key Message in the multi-function manually ...... 356 Changing ...... 349 display ...... 329 Selector lever positions ...... 36, 166 Message in the multi-function Braking Shift ranges ...... 167 display ...... 322 Driving tips ...... 266 Trailer towing ...... 169 Belt drive ...... 415 Message in the multi-function Automatic transmission Belt height display ...... 323 gear indicator ...... 19 Adjusting ...... 34 Warning lamp ...... 19, 311, 312 Automatically Bonnet ...... 252 Bulbs Switching off the telephone* . . . . . 234 Catch ...... 252 Changing the front bulbs ...... 358 Auxiliary heating* Closing ...... 253 Changing the rear bulbs ...... 363 Remote control ...... 194, 195 Messages in the multi-function Messages in the multi-function Changing the batteries ...... 351 display ...... 333 display ...... 327 Setting the switch-on time ...... 151 Opening ...... 252 Buttons on the steering Switching off ...... 151, 195 Bonnet catch ...... 252 wheel ...... 20, 130 Switching on ...... 194 Auxiliary heating/ventilation* . . . 193

424 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

C Cancelling Changing gear Cabriolet Easy-entry adjustment Automatic transmission ...... 36 Care ...... 287 procedure ...... 96, 98, 155 Chassis number ...... 416 Draught stop* Cancelling the adjustment Checking Installing ...... 205 procedure (easy-entry Coolant level ...... 258 Removing ...... 206 feature) ...... 96, 98, 155 Coolant temperature ...... 134 First-aid kit ...... 344 Capacities ...... 405 Engine oil consumption ...... 254 Jack ...... 344 Care ...... 286 Engine oil level ...... 254 Removing the tonneau cover* . . . . 207 Automatic car wash ...... 287 Using the dipstick ...... 256 Soft top ...... 201 Exterior ...... 287 Using the operating system . . . . 254 Button ...... 23 High-pressure cleaners ...... 287 Checklist for off-road driving . . . . . 271 Opening ...... 202 Trailer tow hitch* ...... 289 Child restraint systems ...... 61 Opening/closing manually . . . . . 354 Windscreen ...... 288 Child seat Vehicle tool kit ...... 344 CD changer* ...... 345 Lock ...... 66 Warning triangle ...... 344 CDI ...... 416 Rearward-facing ...... 65 CAC ...... 416 Central locking ...... 82 Recognition ...... 66, 416 Call Activating/deactivating Malfunction ...... 304 Accepting ...... 160 automatically (operating system) . . 150 Recommendations ...... 63 Hanging up ...... 161 Central locking switch ...... 91 Securing system in the rear Calling up Centre armrest ...... 222 passenger compartment ...... 69 Malfunctions ...... 137 Centre console Securing system, ISOFIX* ...... 67 Range ...... 159 Lower section, Overview ...... 22 Weight category ...... 63 Calling up the range Upper section, Overview ...... 21 Child-proof locks ...... 70 (trip computer) ...... 159 Changing a wheel ...... 367 Children in the vehicle ...... 61 CAN system ...... 416 Raising the vehicle ...... 368

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 425 Index

Cigarette lighter ...... 225 Sliding/tilting sunroof* ...... 201 Level Front ...... 21 Manually ...... 353 Checking ...... 258 Cleaning ...... 286 Tailgate (Cabriolet) ...... 91 Messages in the Cabriolet ...... 287 Vehicle in an emergency ...... 348 multi-function display . . . . 325, 326 Headlamps ...... 17 Cockpit ...... 416 Temperature Trailer tow hitch* ...... 289 Overview ...... 16 Checking ...... 134 Ultrasound reversing aid* COMAND* ...... 21, 416 Increased ...... 295 sensors ...... 289 Combination switch ...... 17, 40 Topping up ...... 258 Vehicle ...... 287 Headlamp flasher ...... 121 Cover Wiper blades ...... 288 Main-beam headlamps ...... 17, 121 Luggage compartment ...... 111 Cleaning system Turn signals ...... 17, 41 Cruise control ...... 208, 416 Headlamps ...... 259 Windscreen wipers ...... 17 Deactivating ...... 212 Clearing Consumption statistics Fine adjustment in increments Malfunction memory ...... 138 After start ...... 157 of 1 km/h ...... 212 Clock ...... 19 Resetting ...... 158 Lever ...... 17 Setting the hours ...... 142 Control panel Resuming a stored speed ...... 210 Setting the minutes ...... 142 Thermatic ...... 184 Setting a lower speed ...... 211 Closing ...... 82 Control unit ...... 390, 416 Cruise control lever Bonnet ...... 253 Convenience closing feature ...... 85 Speedtronic ...... 213 Cabriolet soft top manually ...... 354 Coolant ...... 258, 409 Cruise control, Speedtronic lever . . 17 Garage door ...... 242 Components ...... 258, 409 Cup holder ...... 222, 224 Rear door ...... 88 Expansion tank ...... 258 Customer Assistance Center . . . . . 416 Side windows ...... 85, 198 Functions ...... 410

426 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

D Direction of rotation (tyres) ...... 262 Driving safety systems ...... 71 Defrosting the front windows . . . . 188 Display Driving systems Delayed headlamp switch-off . . . . 118 Digital speedometer ...... 134 Ultrasound reversing aid* ...... 218 Delayed switch-off In the instrument cluster . . 19, 20, 130 Driving tips ...... 265 Exterior lighting ...... 118, 147 Message in the multi-function Braking ...... 266 Interior lighting ...... 148 display ...... 337 Driving abroad ...... 279 Diesel ...... 249, 405 Outside temperature ...... 127 Driving in wet conditions ...... 267 Consumption ...... 406 Service ...... 283 Off-road driving ...... 269 Mixing ratio with kerosene ...... 250 Ultrasound reversing aid* ...... 220 Overrun cut-off ...... 267 Reserve fuel warning lamp ...... 313 Distance recorder ...... 19 Trailer towing ...... 280 Tank content ...... 406 Door DynAPS* ...... 236, 417 Diesel engine Message in the multi-function E Bleeding the fuel system ...... 251 display ...... 336 e mark ...... 390 Starting the engine ...... 38 Opening from the inside ...... 85 Easy-entry ...... 96 Winter driving ...... 249 Door control panel Easy-entry feature ...... 98 Differential lock ...... 416 Overview ...... 24 Activating/deactivating in Differential locks ...... 173 Draught stop* ...... 204 the Convenience submenu ...... 154 Differential unit ...... 417 Installing ...... 205 Cancelling the adjustment Digital clock Ð see Clock Removing ...... 206 procedure ...... 98, 155 Digital speedometer ...... 19, 134 Drive train ...... 417 Easy-entry/exit feature Ð Dimensions ...... 400 Driving ...... 31 see Easy-entry feature Dipped-beam headlamps . . . . . 40, 357 In winter ...... 268 Easy-exit/entry feature Ð Changing the bulbs ...... 360 Off-road ...... 269 see Easy-entry feature Message in the multi-function Driving abroad ELCODE ...... 417 display ...... 327 Tips ...... 279 Symmetrical ...... 279 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 427 Index

Electrical system Engine diagnostic Starting after an accident ...... 295 Fuse allocation (chart) ...... 383 Indicator lamp ...... 19 Starting the engine ...... 37 Fuse box ...... 383, 384 Engine diagnostics EPC Fuse extractor ...... 383 Indicator lamp ...... 314 Message in the multi-function Spare fuses ...... 383 Engine oil ...... 254 display ...... 319 Electronic Stability Program Ð Consumption ...... 254 ESP ...... 71, 73, 417, 418 see ESP Filler neck Deactivating ...... 74 Electronic traction support Ð G 270 CDI ...... 256 Warning lamp ...... 19, 307 see 4-ETS G 320, G 500 ...... 256 4-ETS ...... 71, 72 EMC ...... 417 G 400 CDI ...... 257 Warning lamp ...... 19 Emergency Quantity ...... 408 Expansion tank Ð Coolant ...... 258 Unlocking the vehicle ...... 348 Topping up ...... 257 Exterior lighting Emergency call system* ...... 237 Viscosity ...... 408, 418 Changing the bulbs ...... 357 Initiating an emergency call ...... 239 Engine oil level Delayed switch-off ...... 118, 147 Malfunction ...... 305 Checking using the dipstick ...... 256 Overview ...... 357 Prerequisites ...... 239 Checking using the operating See also Lights Emergency key element ...... 348 system ...... 254 Exterior mirrors ...... 30 Lost ...... 301 Messages in the multi-function Additional turn signals ...... 357 Emergency operating mode display ...... 333 Adjusting ...... 17, 30 Automatic transmission ...... 296 Engine Heating ...... 177 EN 228 ...... 417 Checking the oil level ...... 254 Parking position ...... 156, 178 Engine air cleaner Does not start ...... 294 Storing ...... 103 Messages in the multi-function Electronics ...... 390 Eyelets for securing a load ...... 105 display ...... 333 Number ...... 392, 417 Engine control system ...... 417 Rated output ...... 395

428 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

F Front foglamps ...... 357 Fuel gauge ...... 19 Fast mode Changing the bulbs ...... 361 Fuel tank Phone book* ...... 162 Message in the multi-function Run dry (vehicles with FCD (telematics service*) . . . 236, 418 display ...... 330 diesel engines) ...... 294 Fine adjustment Switching on ...... 117 Function Cruise control ...... 212 Front reading lamps Resetting (operating system) . . . . . 140 Variable Speedtronic ...... 216 Switching on and off ...... 23 Fuse extractor ...... 383 Fire extinguisher* Front-passenger airbag Fuses (electric) ...... 383, 384 Specifications ...... 345 Deactivated ...... 304 G First-aid kit Fuel ...... 405 Garage door Cabriolet ...... 344 Bleeding the system Opening/closing ...... 242 Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . 341 (diesel engine) ...... 251 Garage door opener* ...... 240 Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . 342 Consumption ...... 406 Clearing the memory ...... 242 5-speed automatic transmission . . 36 In accordance with Directive Frequencies ...... 412 Floormats ...... 228 1999/100/EC ...... 407 Indicator lamp ...... 23 Folding down the front seat Consumption statistics ...... 157 Programming the remote backrests (easy-entry function) . . . 96 Diesel ...... 249 control ...... 241 4-ETS ...... 71, 72 Petrol ...... 248 Remote control Warning lamp ...... 19 Tank content ...... 406 (rear-view mirror) ...... 240 Frequencies Fuel filler flap Transmitter buttons ...... 23 Garage door opener* ...... 412 Emergency release ...... 352 Gauge Telephone* ...... 391 Locking ...... 247 Fuel ...... 19 Front bulbs Opening ...... 247 Genuine parts ...... 388 Changing ...... 358 Unlocking ...... 247

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 429 Index

Glove compartment ...... 17, 221 Headlamps delayed switch-off Ð I Good visibility ...... 176 see Exterior lighting delayed Ignition ...... 35 GPS ...... 418 switch-off Ignition lock ...... 17, 35 GSM ...... 418 Heater Immobiliser ...... 76 Submenu* (operating system) . . . . 150 Indicator lamp H Heater booster system* ...... 196 ABS ...... 19, 309, 310 Hand brake (parking brake) ...... 36 Selecting the settings ...... 153 Braking ...... 311, 312 Hands-free system* Heating Cruise control with Speedtronic . . . . 19 Microphone* ...... 229 Exterior mirrors ...... 177 Engine diagnostic ...... 19 Hazard warning lamps ...... 121 Seat* ...... 94 Engine diagnostics ...... 314 Head restraints Steering wheel* ...... 243 Garage door opener* ...... 23 Angle ...... 29 Windows ...... 179 Main-beam headlamps ...... 19 Height ...... 29 See also Auxiliary heating*, Preglow on vehicles with Installing and removing ...... 95 Heater booster* and Thermatic diesel engine ...... 19 Resetting the front seat Height SRS ...... 312 head restraints ...... 96 Head restraint ...... 29 Turn signals ...... 19 Headlamp flasher ...... 121 Height adjustment Instrument cluster . . . . . 17, 126, 418 Headlamps Seat belt ...... 34 Display ...... 19, 20, 130 Adjusting the headlamp Steering wheel ...... 29 Overview ...... 18 range ...... 17, 119 High-pressure cleaners ...... 287 Rev counter ...... 127 Changing the bulbs ...... 358 Horn ...... 17 Selecting the language ...... 144 Cleaning ...... 17 Hours Interior lighting ...... 122 Cleaning system ...... 176, 259 Setting ...... 142 Controlling ...... 23 Misted up on the inside ...... 293 Delayed switch-off ...... 148

430 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

Interior motion sensor* ...... 78, 418 L Front foglamps ...... 357, 361 Intermittent wipe ...... 42 Language Hazard warning lamps ...... 121 IRS* Ð see Interior motion sensor* Multi-function display ...... 144 Headlamps ...... 358 ISOFIX* child seat securing Lashing eyelets ...... 105 Interior ...... 122 system ...... 67 LED ...... 419 Licence plate ...... 365 Licence plate illumination ...... 357 Licence plate illumination ...... 357 J Changing the bulb ...... 365 Light switch ...... 40, 115 Jack Message in the multi-function Locator lighting ...... 119 Cabriolet ...... 344 display ...... 329 Luggage compartment lighting . . . 124 Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . 341 Light sensor Main-beam Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . 343 Message in the multi-function headlamps ...... 40, 121, 357, 360 Jump-starting ...... 377 display ...... 331 Parking lamps ...... 357, 361 Rear foglamp ...... 357, 364 K Light switch ...... 17, 40, 115 Switching on ...... 117 Key ...... 26 Light-alloy wheel Rear lamp units ...... 124, 363 Lost ...... 300 Technical data ...... 397 Rear reading lamps ...... 124 Message in the multi-function Lighting ...... 115 Remote-operated illuminated display ...... 335 Additional turn signals ...... 357 entry system ...... 119 Position in the ignition lock ...... 35 Brake lamp ...... 357 Reversing lamp ...... 357, 364 Problems ...... 299 Combination switch ...... 40, 121 Side lamps ...... 357, 361 Keys ...... 82 Delayed headlamp switch-off . . . . . 118 Switching on (exterior) ...... 40 Kickdown ...... 169, 418 Dipped-beam Switching on the front foglamps . . 117 Kilometres display ...... 19 headlamps ...... 40, 357, 360 Third brake lamp ...... 357 Knock resistance ...... 419 Exterior Changing the bulbs ...... 357 Turn signals ...... 357, 362

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 431 Index

Lights ...... 40 Locator lighting ...... 119 M Combination switch ...... 121 Switching on/off ...... 146 Main fuse box ...... 383 Exterior lighting, delayed Locking ...... 44, 82 Main-beam headlamps . . . 17, 40, 357 switch-off ...... 118 Automatically ...... 91 Changing the bulbs ...... 360 Switching on/off automatically . . . 116 Centrally from the inside ...... 91 Indicator lamp ...... 19 See also Lighting Fuel filler flap ...... 247 Message in the multi-function LIM indicator lamp ...... 419 Locking differential ...... 173 display ...... 331 Line of fall ...... 419 Locking knob ...... 419 Switching on ...... 121 Linguatronic* Luggage Making a telephone call* ...... 231 Microphone* ...... 229 Loading ...... 104 Making telephone calls* . . . . . 20, 130 See separate Operating Roof rack* ...... 113 Malfunction memory ...... 137 Instructions Luggage compartment Clearing ...... 138 Loading ...... 104 Lighting ...... 124 Malfunction messages ...... 137 Guidelines ...... 104 Loading guidelines ...... 104 Calling up ...... 137 Roof rack ...... 113 Side-facing rear bench seat ...... 100 Memory ...... 19 Safety net* ...... 106 Luggage compartment blind . . . . . 111 Maximum Ski holder ...... 113 Luggage compartment cover . . . . . 111 Payload Stowage boxes* ...... 112 Luggage compartment light Cabriolet ...... 403 Loads Button ...... 23 Long-wheelbase station Anchoring ...... 105 Luggage net wagon ...... 401 Safety net* ...... 106 In the front-passenger footwell . . . 223 Short-wheelbase station Transporting ...... 104 wagon ...... 402

432 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

Roof load Minimum distance Bonnet ...... 333 Long-wheelbase station Ultrasound reversing aid* ...... 219 Boot ...... 324 wagon ...... 401 Minutes Brake fluid ...... 323 Short-wheelbase station Setting ...... 142 Brake lamp ...... 329 wagon ...... 402 Mirrors ...... 176 Braking ...... 323 Maximum speeds ...... 396 Adjusting ...... 17, 30 Bulbs ...... 327 MB Info* ...... 238 Switch on the door control Coolant level ...... 325, 326 Mechanical key element ...... 348 panel ...... 24 Dipped-beam headlamps ...... 327 Memory function ...... 102, 419 Exterior, automatic anti-dazzle . . . . 176 Display faulty ...... 337 Switch on the door control Heated exterior mirrors ...... 177 Door ...... 336 panel ...... 24 Rear-view, automatic Engine air cleaner ...... 333 Menu anti-dazzle ...... 176 Engine oil level ...... 333 Audio ...... 135 Misfiring ...... 293 EPC ...... 319 In the operating Mobile phone* Front foglamps ...... 330 system ...... 130, 132, 419 Removing from the telephone Key ...... 335 Malfunction memory ...... 137 bracket ...... 232 Licence plate lamp ...... 329 Navigation* ...... 136 Mobile telephone* ...... 228 Light sensor ...... 331 Settings ...... 138 MON ...... 419 Main-beam headlamps ...... 331 Settings menu ...... 139 Multi-contour seat* ...... 93 Parking brake ...... 324 Telephone* ...... 159 Multi-function display . . . . 20, 130, 419 Parking lamps ...... 330 Trip computer ...... 157 Messages Rear foglamp ...... 330 Microphone* ABS ...... 316, 317 Reserve fuel ...... 336 Hands-free system* ...... 229 Battery (vehicle) ...... 322 Restraint systems ...... 335

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 433 Index

Seat belts ...... 325 Off-road driving on mountainous Operating system ...... 129, 420 Speedtronic ...... 336 terrain ...... 272 Auxiliary heating* Tail lamps ...... 331 Oil switch-on time ...... 151 TeleAid* ...... 336 Dipstick ...... 257 Convenience submenu ...... 154 Telephone* ...... 324 Level in the automatic Coolant temperature Trailer turn signal lamp ...... 327 transmission ...... 258 Checking ...... 134 Transfer case ...... 339 Topping up ...... 257 Heater submenu* ...... 150 Turn signals ...... 328 See also Engine oil Instrument cluster submenu . . . . . 142 Washer fluid ...... 337 On-board voltage ...... 419 Malfunction memory menu ...... 137 Selecting the language ...... 144 One-touch gearshifting ...... 166 Menus ...... 130, 132 Multi-function steering Opening ...... 82 Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . 130 wheel ...... 17, 130, 419 Bonnet ...... 252 Navigation* menu ...... 136 Overview ...... 20 Cabriolet soft top ...... 202 Selecting the display for the Manually ...... 354 speedometer, total distance N Door from the inside ...... 85 recorder and trip computer ...... 144 Navigation system* Fuel filler flap ...... 247 Selecting the heater booster* Operating ...... 136 Side windows ...... 198 settings ...... 153 Sliding/tilting sunroof* ...... 201 Selecting the language ...... 144 O Manually ...... 353 Selecting the standard display . . . . 145 Occupant safety ...... 46 Tailgate ...... 86 Selecting the temperature Octane number ...... 421 Tailgate (Cabriolet) ...... 89 display ...... 143 Off-road driving ...... 269 Vehicle in an emergency ...... 348 Selecting the time display ...... 143 Checklist ...... 271 Mountainous terrain ...... 272 Rules ...... 270

434 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

Setting constant headlamp mode P Performance ...... 396 Setting ...... 145 Parking ...... 36 Petrol ...... 248, 405 Setting key dependence ...... 156 Parking aid Ð see Ultrasound Consumption ...... 406 Setting the automatic door lock . . 150 reversing aid* ...... 218 Leaded ...... 248 Setting the exterior lighting Parking and locking ...... 44 Reserve fuel warning lamp ...... 313 delayed switch-off ...... 147 Parking brake ...... 36, 420 Tank content ...... 406 Setting the interior lighting Message in the multi-function Phone book* delayed switch-off ...... 148 display ...... 324 Fast mode ...... 162 Setting the station selection . . . . . 149 Parking lamps ...... 357 Power windows Settings menu ...... 138 Changing the bulbs ...... 361 Opening/closing side windows . . . 198 Submenu ...... 131 Message in the multi-function Practical advice Switching the locator lighting display ...... 330 Troubleshooting ...... 292 on/off ...... 146 Parking lock Preglow indicator lamp Telephone* menu ...... 159 Releasing manually ...... 356 (vehicles with diesel engine) ...... 19 Trip computer menu ...... 157 Parking position Prepaid cards* Vehicle submenu ...... 149 Exterior mirrors ...... 156 Short messages (SMS) ...... 236 Outside temperature Parking position for the Pressure Ð see Tyre pressures . . . 263 display ...... 19, 127 exterior mirrors ...... 103 Pulling away ...... 39 Overhead control panel Partial load operation ...... 420 Overview ...... 23 Payload Overrevving range ...... 420 Cabriolet ...... 403 Overrun cut-off ...... 267 Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . 401 Overrun mode ...... 420 Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . 402

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 435 Index

R Rear window wiper ...... 43, 179 Resetting Radio type approval number . . . . . 412 Rear-view mirror ...... 23 All functions (operating system) . . . 138 Radio* ...... 21 Adjusting ...... 30 All the functions in a submenu . . . . 140 Rain sensor ...... 179 Remote control Consumption statistics ...... 158 Range of the sensors (garage door opener*) ...... 240 ESP, ABS and BAS ...... 320 (ultrasound reversing aid*) ...... 219 Rearward-facing child seat . . . 65, 420 Front seat head restraints ...... 96 RDS (Radio Data System) ...... 420 Refuelling ...... 247 Trip meter ...... 127 Rear air vents (air conditioning) . . 184 Remote control Residual heat Rear bench seat ...... 99 Auxiliary heating* ...... 194, 195 Air conditioning ...... 190 Rear bulbs Changing the batteries ...... 351 Restraint systems ...... 46, 420 Changing ...... 363 In the rear-view mirror* ...... 240 for children ...... 61 Rear door ...... 86 Programming garage door Message in the multi-function Closing ...... 88 openers* ...... 241 display ...... 335 Opening ...... 86 See also Key Warning lamp ...... 19 Rear foglamp ...... 357 Remote-operated illuminated Rev counter ...... 19, 127 Changing the bulb ...... 364 entry system ...... 119 Reversing aid* (ultrasound) ...... 218 Message in the multi-function Reserve fuel Reversing lamp ...... 357 display ...... 330 Message in the multi-function Changing the bulb ...... 364 Switching on ...... 117 display ...... 336 Road speed display ...... 19 Rear lamp units Warning lamp ...... 19, 313 Digital ...... 19 Changing the bulbs ...... 363 Reserve fuel warning lamp Roadside assistance* ...... 238, 421 Rear seats (rear bench seat) ...... 99 (fuel gauge) ...... 19 RON ...... 421 Rear window heating ...... 180 Reserve fuel warning lamp Problems ...... 303 (tank content) ...... 313

436 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

Roof load Seat heating* ...... 94 Sensors (ultrasound Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . 401 Problems ...... 303 reversing aid*) ...... 218 Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . 402 Switch ...... 21 Range ...... 219 Roof rack* ...... 113 Seats ...... 27, 93 Service Ruffled pockets ...... 223 Adjusting ...... 27 Calling up the due date ...... 285 Rules for off-road driving ...... 270 Switch on the door control Display messages ...... 284 Running in ...... 246 panel ...... 24 Missing the due date ...... 284 Run-on time Folding down the front seat Resetting the indicator ...... 285 Telephone* ...... 231, 234 backrests (easy-entry function) . . . . 96 Service life (tyres) ...... 262 Heating* ...... 94 Service products ...... 405 S Memory function ...... 102 Brake fluid ...... 411 Safety Rear bench seat ...... 99 Coolant ...... 409 Anti-theft systems ...... 76 Rear seats ...... 99 Engine oil ...... 408 Children in the vehicle ...... 61 Ruffled pockets ...... 223 Windscreen washer fluid ...... 411 Driving safety systems ...... 71 Side-facing rear bench seat* Setting Occupants ...... 46 in the luggage compartment . . . . . 100 Constant headlamp mode ...... 145 Safety net* ...... 106 Storing settings ...... 102 Convenience functions ...... 154 Seat belts Selecting the standard display Language Child seat lock ...... 66 (operating system) ...... 145 Multi-function display ...... 144 Fastening seat belts ...... 31 Selector lever lock ...... 421 Parking position for the exterior Message in the multi-function Selector lever position mirrors (operating system) display ...... 325 Automatic transmission ...... 19, 166 Set the parking position Warning lamp ...... 19, 313 for the exterior mirrors ...... 156

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 437 Index

Storing settings ...... 102 Side lamps ...... 357 Spare fuses ...... 383 Temperature Changing the bulbs ...... 361 Spare parts ...... 388 Thermatic ...... 187 Side windows Spare wheel Temperature display in Opening and closing ...... 198 Fitting ...... 367 the multi-function display ...... 143 Switch on the door control panel . . . 24 Specifications ...... 346 Time display ...... 143 Side-facing rear bench seat* Speed Vehicle individually ...... 138 in the luggage compartment . . . . . 100 In individual gears ...... 396 Setting the automatic door lock Ski holder* ...... 113 Setting (operating system) ...... 150 Sliding/tilting sunroof* Cruise control ...... 211 Setting the convenience Button ...... 23 Variable Speedtronic ...... 215 functions ...... 154 Opening/closing ...... 201 Storing Setting the station selection . . . . . 149 Manually ...... 353 Variable Speedtronic ...... 214 Setting the unit Sliding/tilting sunroof* ...... 200 Tyre index ...... 397 Temperature ...... 143 SMS ...... 236, 421 Speed index (tyres) ...... 397, 421 Settings Snow chains ...... 278 Speed limit Resetting all (operating system) . . 138 Socket ...... 242 Variable Speedtronic ...... 213 Resetting for a submenu ...... 140 Soft top (Cabriolet) ...... 201 Speedometer ...... 19 Shift ranges ...... 421 Opening ...... 202 Digital ...... 134 Automatic transmission ...... 167 Soft top switches Selecting the display ...... 144 Transfer case ...... 170 Problems ...... 297

438 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

Speedtronic ...... 421 Steering Submenu ...... 131 Cruise control lever ...... 213 Unlocking ...... 35 Convenience ...... 154 Deactivating (variable) ...... 217 Steering lock (ignition lock) . . . . 17, 35 Heater* ...... 150 Fine adjustment ...... 216 Steering wheel ...... 17 Instrument cluster ...... 142 Indicator lamp ...... 19 Adjusting ...... 29 Overview of settings ...... 141 Lever ...... 17 Switch on the door control Resetting a function ...... 140 Message in the multi-function panel ...... 24 Selecting ...... 140 display ...... 336 Buttons ...... 20, 130 Settings menu ...... 139 Set speed display ...... 19 Easy-entry feature ...... 98 Vehicle ...... 149 Setting a speed ...... 215 Heating* ...... 243 Summer opening ...... 85 Storing a speed ...... 214 Storing Sun visors ...... 181 Variable speed limit ...... 213 Key-dependent settings ...... 156 Switching air-recirculation mode SRS ...... 421 Parking position for the exterior on/off (air conditioning) ...... 189 Warning lamp ...... 19, 312 mirrors ...... 103 Switching off Starter battery ...... 372 Storing key-dependent settings . . 156 Telephone* automatically ...... 234 Starting the engine ...... 35, 37 Stowage boxes* ...... 112 Switch-on time Diesel engine ...... 38 Stowage compartments ...... 221 Setting the auxiliary heating* . . . . 151 Engine after an accident ...... 295 Glove compartment ...... 221 Symmetrical dipped-beam Starting the petrol engine ...... 38 In the armrest ...... 222 headlamps ...... 279, 421 Steam cleaners Ð see Ruffled pockets ...... 223 High-pressure cleaners ...... 287

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 439 Index

T Telematics* ...... 421 Temperature Tail lamps DynAPS ...... 236 Display (outside) ...... 127 Message in the multi-function Services ...... 236 Selecting the display in the display ...... 331 Telephone bracket* ...... 229, 233 multi-function display ...... 143 Tailgate (Cabriolet) Making a call with ...... 231 Setting (Thermatic) ...... 187 Closing ...... 91 Replacing ...... 232 Tyres ...... 263 Opening ...... 89 Telephone* ...... 228 The first 1,500 km ...... 246 Tank content ...... 406 Accepting a call ...... 160 Thermatic ...... 182 Technical data Automatic switch-off ...... 234 Adjusting air distribution Engine power output ...... 395 Automatic switch-off manually ...... 187 Frequencies (run-on time) ...... 231 Adjusting the airflow manually . . . . 188 (garage door openers*) ...... 412 Frequencies ...... 391 Basic settings ...... 187 Light-alloy wheel ...... 397 Hands-free system* Control panel ...... 21, 184 Trailer loads ...... 404 Microphone* ...... 229 Problems ...... 303 Tyres ...... 397 Hanging up ...... 161 Rear air vents ...... 184 Vehicle dimensions ...... 400 Memory preset number Residual heat ...... 190 Vehicle weights ...... 401 when redialling ...... 163 Setting the temperature ...... 187 Wheels ...... 397 Messages in the multi-function Switching air-recirculation TeleAid* ...... 237, 421 display ...... 324 mode on/off ...... 189 Emergency call system ...... 237 Network provider ...... 160 Switching economy mode on Initiating an emergency Operating ...... 159 and off ...... 191 call manually ...... 23 Phone book ...... 161 Switching off ...... 186 MB Info ...... 238 Reception quality ...... 160 Switching on ...... 186 Messages in the multi-function Redialling ...... 163 Third brake lamp ...... 357 display ...... 336 Replacing ...... 232 Tightening torque ...... 421

440 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

Time Towing out a vehicle that Transfer case selector position Selecting the display ...... 143 is stuck ...... 382 display ...... 19 Setting the hours ...... 142 Towing speed ...... 379 Transmission Setting the minutes ...... 142 Traction ...... 422 Problems ...... 296 TIREFIT kit* ...... 421 Traction mode ...... 422 Transmission oil ...... 258 Tonneau cover* ...... 206 Traction system, electronic Ð Transmitter buttons, garage door Removing ...... 207 see 4-ETS opener* ...... 23 Securing ...... 206 Trailer loads ...... 404 Trip computer ...... 157 Topping up Trailer tow hitch* ...... 113 Calling up the range ...... 159 Coolant ...... 258 Notes on care ...... 289 Consumption statistics Engine oil ...... 257 Trailer towing ...... 280 after start ...... 157 Torque ...... 422 Automatic transmission ...... 169 Consumption statistics Torque converter ...... 422 Safety notes ...... 280 since the last reset ...... 158 Total distance recorder ...... 19 Trailer turn signal lamp Selecting the display ...... 144 Selecting the display ...... 144 Messages in the multi-function Trip meter ...... 19 Tow-away protection* ...... 77 display ...... 327 Resetting ...... 127 Towing ...... 379 Transfer case ...... 422 Troubleshooting ...... 292 Stuck vehicle ...... 382 Message in the multi-function Lights in the switches and Towing eye display ...... 339 buttons ...... 303 Front ...... 380 Selector position display ...... 19 Rear ...... 380 Shift ranges ...... 170 Towing speed ...... 379

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 441 Index

Turn signals ...... 357 U Vehicle Changing the bulbs ...... 362 Ultrasound reversing aid* . . 218, 422 Care ...... 286 Combination switch ...... 41 Cleaning the sensors ...... 289 Cleaning ...... 287 In the exterior mirrors ...... 357 Malfunction ...... 306 Cabriolet ...... 287 Indicator lamp ...... 19 Minimum distance ...... 219 Leaving parked up ...... 293 Message in the multi-function Sensors Locking ...... 44 display ...... 328 In the rear bumper ...... 218 Locking in an emergency ...... 348 Switching on ...... 41 Range ...... 219 Parking ...... 44 Tyre wear pattern ...... 264 Warning display ...... 220 Setting individually ...... 138 Tyres ...... 261, 397, 422 Unlocking ...... 82 Starting the engine ...... 37 Direction of rotation ...... 262 Centrally from the inside ...... 91 Towing ...... 379 Flat tyre ...... 367 Fuel filler flap ...... 247 Unlocking in an emergency ...... 348 General notes ...... 262 Steering ...... 35 Vehicle dimensions ...... 400 Grip ...... 268 Washing with a high-pressure Pressure ...... 263 V cleaner ...... 287 Retreaded ...... 261 Variable Speedtronic ...... 213 Weights ...... 401 Service life ...... 262 Deactivating ...... 217 Vehicle care Speed index ...... 397, 421 Fine adjustment ...... 216 Exterior ...... 287 Technical data ...... 397 Setting a stored speed ...... 215 Vehicle dimensions ...... 400 Temperature ...... 263 Vegetable oil methyl ester* ...... 251 Vehicle identification plate ...... 392 Tread depth of winter tyres ...... 277 Wear pattern ...... 264 Winter ...... 277

442 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Index

Vehicle tool kit Warning triangle Window heating ...... 179 Cabriolet specifications ...... 344 Cabriolet ...... 344 Windows Long-wheelbase station wagon Long-wheelbase station wagon . . . 340 Automatic car wash ...... 411 specifications ...... 341 Setting up ...... 340 Defrosting ...... 188 Short-wheelbase station wagon Short-wheelbase station wagon . . . 342 Washer fluid ...... 42 specifications ...... 342 Washer fluid ...... 42 Windscreen Viscosity ...... 408 Message in the multi-function Cleaning ...... 288 VME fuels* ...... 251 display ...... 337 Defrosting ...... 188 Voice output Ð see separate Washing the vehicle Windscreen heating* ...... 180 Operating Instructions ...... 419 High-pressure cleaners ...... 287 Windscreen washer system ...... 259 Wearing seat belts ...... 31 Reservoir ...... 411 W Weights ...... 401 Washer fluid ...... 411 Warning lamp Wheel ...... 422 Windscreen wipers ABS ...... 19 Wheel rims ...... 261, 422 Cleaning ...... 288 Braking ...... 19, 311, 312 Wheels ...... 261, 422 Failure ...... 302 ESP ...... 19, 307 General notes ...... 262 Jammed ...... 302 Reserve fuel ...... 19, 313 Interchanging ...... 264 Problems ...... 302 Restraint systems ...... 19 Technical data ...... 397 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 366 Seat belt ...... 19, 313 Where will I find...? ...... 340

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch 443 Index

Windscreen wipers ...... 17, 179 Intermittent wipe ...... 42 Rain sensor ...... 179 Rapid wipe ...... 42 Rear ...... 43, 179 Switching on ...... 41 Wiping with washer fluid ...... 42 Winter diesel ...... 249 Winter driving ...... 268 Snow chains ...... 278 Tyres ...... 277 Winter tyres ...... 277 Tread depth ...... 277 Wiper blades Changing ...... 366 Cleaning ...... 288

444 Nur fuer internen Gebrauch Contact Editorial office Illustrations Mercedes-Benz will be happy to answer You are welcome to forward any Title illustration P00.01-2271-31 any questions you may have: queries or suggestions you might At a glance P00.01-2343-31 have regarding the Owner's Manual Mercedes-Benz Contact Getting started P00.01-2344-31 to the technical documentation team Telephone: 00800 1 777 7777 Safety P00.01-2345-31 at the following address: International: +49 69 95 30 72 77 Controls in detail P00.01-22346-31 DaimlerChrysler AG, HPC: R824, Operation P00.01-2347-31 Internet 70546 Stuttgart, Germany Practical advice P00.01-22348-31 Technical data P00.01-2349-31 Further information about Mercedes-Benz Editorial status: 23.12.2003 vehicles and about DaimlerChrysler can be Not to be reprinted, translated or found on the following websites: otherwise reproduced, in whole or www.mercedes-benz.com in part, without written permission. www.daimlerchrysler.com

Nur fuer internen Gebrauch aussenen.fm Seite 1 Mittwoch, 14. April 2004 1:21 13

G-Class Owner's Manual Manual

É463 584 36 81hË Owner's

Order no. 6515 4058 02 Part no. 463 584 36 81 EN Edition D1, 01/04 G-Class Nur fuer internen Gebrauch